UCM6100 User Manual - Grandstream Networks

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Grandstream  Networks,  Inc.

 

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  

User  Manual

 

 

 

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

Table  of  Content

 

GNU  GPL  INFORMATION  .........................................................................  16

 

CHANGE  LOG  ...........................................................................................  17

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.9.26  .........................................................................................................  17

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.9.25  .........................................................................................................  17

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.9.23  .........................................................................................................  17

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.8.12  .........................................................................................................  18

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.7.11  ..........................................................................................................  19

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.6.11  ..........................................................................................................  20

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.6.10  .........................................................................................................  20

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.5.19  .........................................................................................................  21

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.5.14  .........................................................................................................  21

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.4.7  ...........................................................................................................  21

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.3.13  .........................................................................................................  22

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.2.21  .........................................................................................................  22

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.1.22  .........................................................................................................  23

 

WELCOME  .................................................................................................  25

 

PRODUCT  OVERVIEW  .............................................................................  27

 

FEATURE  HIGHTLIGHTS  ..................................................................................................................  27

 

TECHNICAL  SPECIFICATIONS  .........................................................................................................  28

 

INSTALLATION  ..........................................................................................  31

 

EQUIPMENT  PACKAGING  ................................................................................................................  31

 

CONNECT  YOUR  UCM6100  ..............................................................................................................  31

 

CONNECT  THE  UCM6102  ..........................................................................................................  31

 

CONNECT  THE  UCM6104  ..........................................................................................................  32

 

CONNECT  THE  UCM6108  ..........................................................................................................  33

 

CONNECT  THE  UCM6116  ..........................................................................................................  34

 

SAFETY  COMPLIANCES  ...................................................................................................................  35

 

WARRANTY  .......................................................................................................................................  35

 

GETTING  STARTED  ..................................................................................  37

 

USE  THE  LCD  MENU  .........................................................................................................................  37

 

USE  THE  LED  INDICATORS  ..............................................................................................................  39

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  1  of  304    

 

 

USE  THE  WEB  GUI  ............................................................................................................................  40

 

ACCESS  WEB  GUI  ......................................................................................................................  40

 

WEB  GUI  CONFIGURATIONS  ....................................................................................................  41

 

WEB  GUI  LANGUAGES  ..............................................................................................................  42

 

SAVE  AND  APPLY  CHANGES  ....................................................................................................  42

 

MAKE  YOUR  FIRST  CALL  .................................................................................................................  42

 

SYSTEM  SETTINGS  ..................................................................................  45

 

USER  MANAGEMENT  .......................................................................................................................  45

 

USER  PRIVILEGES  .....................................................................................................................  45

 

CREATE  NEW  WEB  UI  USER  .....................................................................................................  46

 

USER  PORTAL  ............................................................................................................................  48

 

CONCURRENT  MULTI-­USER  LOGIN  .........................................................................................  49

 

OPERATION  LOG  ........................................................................................................................  49

 

CHANGE  BINDNG  EMAIL  ...........................................................................................................  51

 

NETWORK  SETTINGS  .......................................................................................................................  52

 

BASIC  SETTINGS  .......................................................................................................................  52

 

802.1X  ..........................................................................................................................................  59

 

STATIC  ROUTES  .........................................................................................................................  60

 

PORT  FORWORDING  (UCM6102  ONLY)  ...................................................................................  63

 

DDNS  SETTINGS  ........................................................................................................................  65

 

FIREWALL  ..........................................................................................................................................  66

 

STATIC  DEFENSE  .......................................................................................................................  66

 

DYNAMIC  DEFENSE  ...................................................................................................................  69

 

FAIL2BAN  ....................................................................................................................................  70

 

CHANGE  PASSWORD  .......................................................................................................................  71

 

LDAP  SERVER  ...................................................................................................................................  71

 

LDAP  SERVER  CONFIGURATIONS  ...........................................................................................  72

 

LDAP  PHONEBOOK  ....................................................................................................................  73

 

LDAP  CLIENT  CONFIGURATIONS  .............................................................................................  77

 

HTTP  SERVER  ...................................................................................................................................  79

 

EMAIL  SETTINGS  ..............................................................................................................................  79

 

TIME  SETTINGS  ................................................................................................................................  80

 

AUTO  TIME  UPDATING  ..............................................................................................................  80

 

SET  TIME  MANUALLY  ................................................................................................................  82

 

OFFICE  TIME  ..............................................................................................................................  83

 

HOLIDAY  ......................................................................................................................................  84

 

NTP  SERVER  .....................................................................................................................................  86

 

RECORDINGS  STORAGE  .................................................................................................................  87

 

LOGIN  TIMEOUT  SETTINGS  .............................................................................................................  89

 

PROVISIONING  .........................................................................................  91

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  2  of  304    

 

OVERVIEW  .........................................................................................................................................  91

 

CONFIGURATION  ARCHITECTURE  FOR  END  POINT  DEVICE  .....................................................  91

 

AUTO  PROVISIONING  SETTINGS  ....................................................................................................  92

 

DISCOVERY  .......................................................................................................................................  95

 

GLOBAL  CONFIGURATION  ...............................................................................................................  96

 

GLOBAL  POLICY  .........................................................................................................................  96

 

GLOBAL  TEMPLATES  ...............................................................................................................  103

 

MODEL  CONFIGURATION  ..............................................................................................................  106

 

MODEL  TEMPLATES  ................................................................................................................  106

 

MODEL  UPDATE  .......................................................................................................................  108

 

DEVICE  CONFIGURATION  ..............................................................................................................  109

 

CREATE  NEW  DEVICE  .............................................................................................................  109

 

MANAGE  DEVICES  ...................................................................................................................  110

 

SAMPLE  APPLICATION  ...................................................................................................................  116

 

EXTENSIONS  ..........................................................................................  121

 

CREATE  NEW  USER  .......................................................................................................................  121

 

CREATE  NEW  SIP  EXTENSION  ...............................................................................................  121

 

CREATE  NEW  IAX  EXTENSION  ...............................................................................................  127

 

CREATE  NEW  FXS  EXTENSION  ..............................................................................................  131

 

BATCH  ADD  EXTENSIONS  .............................................................................................................  136

 

BATCH  ADD  SIP  EXTENSIONS  ................................................................................................  136

 

BATCH  ADD  IAX  EXTENSIONS  ................................................................................................  139

 

SEARCH  AND  EDIT  EXTENSION  ....................................................................................................  141

 

EXPORT  EXTENSIONS  ...................................................................................................................  143

 

IMPORT  EXTENSIONS  ....................................................................................................................  143

 

EMAIL  TO  USER  ..............................................................................................................................  144

 

TRUNKS  ...................................................................................................  147

 

ANALOG  TRUNKS  ...........................................................................................................................  147

 

ANALOG  TRUNK  CONFIGURATION  ........................................................................................  147

 

PSTN  DETECTION  ....................................................................................................................  150

 

VOIP  TRUNKS  ..................................................................................................................................  153

 

DIRECT  OUTWARD  DIALING  (DOD)  .......................................................................................  164

 

SLA  STATION  ..........................................................................................  166

 

CREATE/EDIT  SLA  STATION  ...........................................................................................................  166

 

SAMPLE  CONFIGURATION  ............................................................................................................  167

 

CALL  ROUTES  ........................................................................................  170

 

OUTBOUND  ROUTES  .....................................................................................................................  170

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  3  of  304    

 

 

INBOUND  ROUTES  .........................................................................................................................  172

 

INBOUND  RULE  CONFIGURATIONS  .......................................................................................  173

 

INBOUND  ROUTE:  PREPEND  EXAMPLE  ................................................................................  174

 

BLACKLIST  CONFIGURATIONS  ..............................................................................................  175

 

CONFERENCE  BRIDGE  .........................................................................  178

 

CONFERENCE  BRIDGE  CONFIGURATIONS  ..........................................................................  178

 

JOIN  A  CONFERENCE  CALL  ....................................................................................................  180

 

INVITE  OTHER  PARTIES  TO  JOIN  CONFERENCE  .................................................................  180

 

DURING  THE  CONFERENCE  ...................................................................................................  181

 

RECORD  CONFERENCE  .........................................................................................................  182

 

IVR............................................................................................................  184

 

CONFIGURE  IVR  .............................................................................................................................  184

 

CREATE  CUSTOM  PROMPT  ...........................................................................................................  186

 

RECORD  NEW  CUSTOM  PROMPT  .........................................................................................  186

 

UPLOAD  CUSTOM  PROMPT  ...................................................................................................  187

 

LANGUAGE  SETTINGS  FOR  VOICE  PROMPT  .....................................  188

 

DOWNLOAD  AND  INSTALL  VOICE  PROMPT  PACKAGE  ..............................................................  188

 

VOICEMAIL  ..............................................................................................  190

 

CONFIGURE  VOICEMAIL  ................................................................................................................  190

 

ACCESS  VOICEMAIL  .......................................................................................................................  191

 

VOICEMAIL  EMAIL  SETTINGS  ........................................................................................................  192

 

CONFIGURE  VOICEMAIL  GROUP  ..................................................................................................  193

 

RING  GROUP  ..........................................................................................  196

 

CONFIGURE  RING  GROUP  ............................................................................................................  196

 

REMOTE  EXTENSION  IN  RING  GROUP  ........................................................................................  198

 

PAGING  AND  INTERCOM  GROUP  .........................................................  202

 

CONFIGURE  PAGING/INTERCOM  GROUP  ...................................................................................  202

 

CALL  QUEUE  ..........................................................................................  204

 

CONFIGURE  CALL  QUEUE  .............................................................................................................  204

 

EXTENSION  GROUPS  ............................................................................  208

 

CONFIGURE  EXTENSION  GROUPS  ..............................................................................................  208

 

USING  EXTENSION  GROUPS  ........................................................................................................  209

 

PICKUP  GROUPS  ...................................................................................  210

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  4  of  304    

 

CONFIGURE  PICKUP  GROUPS  .....................................................................................................  210

 

CONFIGURE  PICKUP  FEATURE  CODE  .........................................................................................  210

 

MUSIC  ON  HOLD  ....................................................................................  212

 

FAX/T.38  ...................................................................................................  214

 

CONFIGURE  FAX/T.38  .....................................................................................................................  214

 

SAMPLE  CONFIGURATION  TO  RECEIVE  FAX  FROM  PSTN  LINE  ...............................................  215

 

SAMPLE  CONFIGURATION  FOR  FAX-­TO-­EMAIL  ..........................................................................  217

 

ASTERISK  MANAGER  INTERFACE  (RESTRICTED  ACCESS)  ............  218

 

BUSY  CAMP-­ON  .....................................................................................  220

 

FOLLOW  ME  ............................................................................................  222

 

ONE-­KEY  DIAL  ........................................................................................  224

 

DISA  .........................................................................................................  226

 

CALLBACK  FEATURE  ............................................................................  228

 

BLF  AND  EVENT  LIST  ............................................................................  230

 

BLF  ...................................................................................................................................................  230

 

EVENT  LIST  .....................................................................................................................................  230

 

DIAL  BY  NAME  ........................................................................................  234

 

DIAL  BY  NAME  CONFIGURATION  ..................................................................................................  234

 

ACTIVE  CALLS  AND  MONITOR  .............................................................  238

 

ACTIVE  CALLS  STATUS  ..................................................................................................................  238

 

HANG  UP  ACTIVE  CALLS  ...............................................................................................................  239

 

CALL  MONITOR  ...............................................................................................................................  239

 

CALL  FEATURES  ....................................................................................  242

 

FEATURE  CODES  ............................................................................................................................  242

 

CALL  RECORDING  ..........................................................................................................................  246

 

CALL  PARK  .......................................................................................................................................  247

 

PARK  A  CALL  ............................................................................................................................  247

 

RETRIEVE  THE  PARKED  CALL  ...............................................................................................  247

 

ENABLE  SPY  ....................................................................................................................................  247

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  5  of  304    

 

INTERNAL  OPTIONS  ..............................................................................  250

 

INTERNAL  OPTIONS/GENERAL  .....................................................................................................  250

 

INTERNAL  OPTIONS/JITTER  BUFFER  ..........................................................................................  252

 

INTERNAL  OPTIONS/RTP  SETTINGS  ............................................................................................  252

 

INTERNAL  OPTIONS/PORTS  CONFIG  ...........................................................................................  253

 

INTERNAL  OPTIONS/STUN  MONITOR  ..........................................................................................  254

 

INTERNAL  OPTIONS/PAYLOAD  ......................................................................................................  255

 

IAX  SETTINGS  .........................................................................................  256

 

IAX  SETTINGS/GENERAL  ...............................................................................................................  256

 

IAX  SETTINGS/REGISTRATION  .....................................................................................................  256

 

IAX  SETTINGS/STATIC  DEFENSE  ..................................................................................................  257

 

SIP  SETTINGS  .........................................................................................  258

 

SIP  SETTINGS/GENERAL  ...............................................................................................................  258

 

SIP  SETTINGS/MISC  .......................................................................................................................  259

 

SIP  SETTINGS/SESSION  TIMER  ....................................................................................................  259

 

SIP  SETTINGS/TCP  AND  TLS  .........................................................................................................  260

 

SIP  SETTINGS/NAT  .........................................................................................................................  261

 

SIP  SETTINGS/TOS  .........................................................................................................................  261

 

VALUE-­ADDED  FEATURES  ...................................................................  264

 

FAX  SENDING  ..................................................................................................................................  264

 

ANNOUNCEMENTS  CENTER  .........................................................................................................  265

 

ANNOUNCEMENTS  CENTER  SETTINGS  ...............................................................................  265

 

GROUP  SETTINGS  ...................................................................................................................  266

 

STATUS  AND  REPORTING  .....................................................................  268

 

PBX  STATUS  ....................................................................................................................................  268

 

TRUNKS  ....................................................................................................................................  268

 

EXTENSIONS  ............................................................................................................................  269

 

QUEUES  ....................................................................................................................................  270

 

CONFERENCE  ROOMS  ...........................................................................................................  271

 

INTERFACES  STATUS  ..............................................................................................................  272

 

PARKING  LOT  ...........................................................................................................................  273

 

SYSTEM  STATUS  ............................................................................................................................  274

 

GENERAL  ..................................................................................................................................  274

 

NETWORK  .................................................................................................................................  274

 

STORAGE  USAGE  ....................................................................................................................  275

 

RESOURCE  USAGE  .................................................................................................................  275

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  6  of  304    

 

SYSTEM  EVENTS  ............................................................................................................................  276

 

ALERT  EVENTS  LIST  ................................................................................................................  276

 

ALERT  LOG  ...............................................................................................................................  278

 

ALERT  CONTACT  .....................................................................................................................  280

 

CDR  ..................................................................................................................................................  280

 

DOWNLOADED  CDR  FILE  ........................................................................................................  283

 

STATISTICS  ...............................................................................................................................  284

 

RECORDING  FILES  ..................................................................................................................  285

 

API  CONFIGURATION  ..............................................................................................................  286

 

UPGRADING  AND  MAINTENANCE  .......................................................  288

 

UPGRADING  ....................................................................................................................................  288

 

UPGRADING  VIA  NETWORK  ...................................................................................................  288

 

UPGRADING  VIA  LOCAL  UPLOAD  ..........................................................................................  289

 

NO  LOCAL  FIRMWARE  SERVERS  ..........................................................................................  291

 

BACKUP  ...........................................................................................................................................  291

 

BACKUP/RESTORE  ..................................................................................................................  291

 

DATA  SYNC  ...............................................................................................................................  293

 

RESTORE  CONFIGURATION  FROM  BACKUP  FILE  ...............................................................  294

 

CLEANER  .........................................................................................................................................  295

 

RESET  AND  REBOOT  .....................................................................................................................  297

 

SYSLOG  ...........................................................................................................................................  297

 

TROUBLESHOOTING  ......................................................................................................................  298

 

ETHERNET  CAPTURE  ..............................................................................................................  298

 

IP  PING  ......................................................................................................................................  299

 

TRACEROUTE  ..........................................................................................................................  299

 

ANALOG  RECORD  TRACE  ......................................................................................................  300

 

SERVICE  CHECK  ......................................................................................................................  301

 

REMOTE  ACCESS  ...........................................................................................................................  301

 

SSH  ACCESS  ............................................................................................................................  301

 

EXPERIENCING  THE  UCM6100  SERIES  IP  PBX  ..................................  304

 

 

 

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  7  of  304    

 

Table  of  Tables  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual

 

 

Table  1:  Technical  Specifications  ................................................................................................................  28

 

Table  2:  UCM6102/UCM6104  Equipment  Packaging  ................................................................................  31

 

Table  3:  LCD  Menu  Options  .......................................................................................................................  38

 

Table  4:  UCM6102/UCM6104  LED  INDICATORS  ......................................................................................  39

 

Table  5:  UCM6108/UCM6116  LED  INDICATORS  ......................................................................................  40

 

Table  6:  User  Management  -­  Create  New  User  .........................................................................................  47

 

Table  7:  Operation  Log  Column  Header  .....................................................................................................  50

 

Table  8:  Change  Binding  Email  option  .......................................................................................................  51

 

Table  9:  UCM6102  Network  Settings-­>Basic  Settings  ...............................................................................  52

 

Table  10:  UCM6104  Network  Settings-­>Basic  Settings  .............................................................................  54

 

Table  11:  UCM6108/UCM6116  Network  Settings-­>Basic  Settings  .............................................................  55

 

Table  12:  UCM6100  Network  Settings-­>802.1X  .........................................................................................  60

 

Table  13:  UCM6100  Network  Settings-­>Static  Routes  ...............................................................................  61

 

Table  14:  UCM6102  Network  Settings-­>Port  Forwarding  ...........................................................................  63

 

Table  15:  UCM6100  Firewall-­>Static  Defense-­>Current  Service  ...............................................................  67

 

Table  16:  Typical  Firewall  Settings  .............................................................................................................  67

 

Table  17:  Firewall  Rule  Settings  .................................................................................................................  68

 

Table  18:  UCM6100  Firewall  Dynamic  Defense  .........................................................................................  69

 

Table  19:  Fail2Ban  Settings  ........................................................................................................................  70

 

Table  20:  HTTP  Server  Settings  .................................................................................................................  79

 

Table  21:  Email  Settings  .............................................................................................................................  79

 

Table  22:  Time  Auto  Updating  ....................................................................................................................  81

 

Table  23:  Create  New  Office  Time  ..............................................................................................................  83

 

Table  24:  Create  New  Holiday  ....................................................................................................................  85

 

Table  25:  Auto  Provision  Settings  ...............................................................................................................  94

 

Table  26:  Global  Policy  Parameters:  Localization  ......................................................................................  97

 

Table  27:  Global  Policy  Parameters:  Phone  Settings  .................................................................................  97

 

Table  28:  Global  Policy  Parameters:  Contact  List  ......................................................................................  98

 

Table  29:  Global  Policy  Parameters:  Maintenance  ...................................................................................  100

 

Table  30:  Global  Policy  Parameters:  Network  Settings  ............................................................................  102

 

Table  31:  Global  Policy  Parameters:  Customization  ................................................................................  102

 

Table  32:  Create  New  Template  ...............................................................................................................  104

 

Table  33:  Create  New  Model  Template  .....................................................................................................  106

 

Table  34:  SIP  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Basic  Settings  .......................................................  121

 

Table  35:  SIP  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Media  ....................................................................  123

 

Table  36:  SIP  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Features  ................................................................  124

 

Table  37:  SIP  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Specific  Time  .........................................................  127

 

Table  38:  IAX  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Basic  Settings  .......................................................  127

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  8  of  304    

 

Table  39:  IAX  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Media  ....................................................................  128

 

Table  40:  IAX  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Features  ................................................................  129

 

Table  41:  IAX  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Specific  Time  .........................................................  131

 

Table  42:  FXS  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Basic  Settings  ......................................................  132

 

Table  43:  FXS  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Media  ...................................................................  133

 

Table  44:  FXS  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Features  ...............................................................  134

 

Table  45:  FXS  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Specific  Time  .......................................................  136

 

Table  46:  Batch  Add  SIP  Extension  Parameters  ......................................................................................  136

 

Table  47:  Batch  Add  IAX  Extension  Parameters  ......................................................................................  139

 

Table  48:  Analog  Trunk  Configuration  Parameters  ...................................................................................  147

 

Table  49:  PSTN  Detection  for  Analog  Trunk  .............................................................................................  153

 

Table  50:  Create  New  SIP  Trunk  ..............................................................................................................  154

 

Table  51:  SIP  Register  Trunk  Configuration  Parameters  ..........................................................................  155

 

Table  52:  SIP  Peer  Trunk  Configuration  Parameters  ................................................................................  158

 

Table  53:  Create  New  IAX  Trunk  ..............................................................................................................  161

 

Table  54:  IAX  Register  Trunk  Configuration  Parameters  ..........................................................................  161

 

Table  55:  IAX  Peer  Trunk  Configuration  Parameters  ...............................................................................  162

 

Table  56:  SLA  Station  Configuration  Parameters  .....................................................................................  166

 

Table  57:  Outbound  Route  Configuration  Parameters  .............................................................................  170

 

Table  58:  Inbound  Rule  Configuration  Parameters  ..................................................................................  173

 

Table  59:  Conference  Bridge  Configuration  Parameters  ..........................................................................  178

 

Table  60:  Conference  Caller  IVR  Menu  ....................................................................................................  181

 

Table  61:  IVR  Configuration  Parameters  ..................................................................................................  184

 

Table  62:  Voicemail  Settings  ....................................................................................................................  190

 

Table  63:  Voicemail  IVR  Menu  .................................................................................................................  191

 

Table  64:  Voicemail  Email  Settings  ..........................................................................................................  192

 

Table  65:  Voicemail  Group  Settings  .........................................................................................................  194

 

Table  66:  Ring  Group  Parameters  ............................................................................................................  196

 

Table  67:  Paging/Intercom  Group  Configuration  Parameters  ...................................................................  202

 

Table  68:  Call  Queue  Configuration  Parameters  ......................................................................................  204

 

Table  69:  FAX/T.38  Settings  .....................................................................................................................  214

 

Table  70:  Follow  Me  Settings  ...................................................................................................................  223

 

Table  71:  Follow  Me  Options  ....................................................................................................................  223

 

Table  72:  DISA  Settings  ............................................................................................................................  226

 

Table  73:  Callback  Configuration  Parameters  ..........................................................................................  228

 

Table  74:  Event  List  Settings  ....................................................................................................................  230

 

Table  75:  UCM6100  Feature  Codes  .........................................................................................................  242

 

Table  76:  Internal  Options/General  ...........................................................................................................  250

 

Table  77:  Internal  Options/Jitter  Buffer  .....................................................................................................  252

 

Table  78:  Internal  Options/RTP  Settings  ..................................................................................................  252

 

Table  79:  Internal  Options/Ports  Config  ....................................................................................................  253

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  9  of  304    

 

 

 

 

 

Table  80:  Internal  Options/STUN  Monitor  .................................................................................................  254

 

Table  81:  Internal  Options/Payload  ..........................................................................................................  255

 

Table  82:  IAX  Settings/General  ................................................................................................................  256

 

Table  83:  IAX  Settings/Registration  ..........................................................................................................  256

 

Table  84:  IAX  Settings/Static  Defense  ......................................................................................................  257

 

Table  85:  SIP  Settings/General  ................................................................................................................  258

 

Table  86:  SIP  Settings/Misc  ......................................................................................................................  259

 

Table  87:  SIP  Settings/Session  Timer  ......................................................................................................  259

 

Table  88:  SIP  Settings/TCP  and  TLS  .......................................................................................................  260

 

Table  89:  SIP  Settings/NAT  ......................................................................................................................  261

 

Table  90:  SIP  Settings/ToS  .......................................................................................................................  261

 

Table  91:  Announcements  Center  Settings  ..............................................................................................  265

 

Table  92:  Group  Settings  ..........................................................................................................................  266

 

Table  93:  Trunk  Status  ..............................................................................................................................  268

 

Table  94:  Extension  Status  .......................................................................................................................  270

 

Table  95:  Agent  Status  .............................................................................................................................  271

 

Table  96:  Interface  Status  Indicators  ........................................................................................................  272

 

Table  97:  Parking  Lot  Status  ....................................................................................................................  273

 

Table  98:  System  Status-­>General  ...........................................................................................................  274

 

Table  99:  System  Status-­>Network  ..........................................................................................................  274

 

Table  100:  CDR  Filter  Criteria  ..................................................................................................................  280

 

Table  101:  CDR  Statistics  Filter  Criteria  ...................................................................................................  285

 

Table  102:  API  Configuration  Files  ...........................................................................................................  286

 

Table  103:  Network  Upgrade  Configuration  .............................................................................................  288

 

Table  104:  Data  Sync  Configuration  .........................................................................................................  293

 

Table  105:  Cleaner  Configuration  .............................................................................................................  296

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  10  of  304    

 

Table  of  Figures  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual

 

 

Figure  1:  UCM6102/UCM6104/UCM6108/UCM6116  .................................................................................  27

 

Figure  2:  UCM6102  Front  View  ..................................................................................................................  31

 

Figure  3:  UCM6102  Back  View  ..................................................................................................................  32

 

Figure  4:  UCM6104  Front  View  ..................................................................................................................  32

 

Figure  5:  UCM6104  Back  View  ..................................................................................................................  33

 

Figure  6:  UCM6108  Front  View  ..................................................................................................................  34

 

Figure  7:  UCM6108  Back  View  ..................................................................................................................  34

 

Figure  8:  UCM6116  Front  View  ..................................................................................................................  34

 

Figure  9:  UCM6116  Back  View  ...................................................................................................................  34

 

Figure  10:  UCM6116  Web  GUI  Login  Page  ...............................................................................................  40

 

Figure  11:  UCM6100  Web  GUI  Language  ..................................................................................................  42

 

Figure  12:  User  Management  Page  Display  ..............................................................................................  45

 

Figure  13:  Create  New  User  .......................................................................................................................  47

 

Figure  14:  User  Management  –  New  Users  ...............................................................................................  47

 

Figure  15:  Edit  User  Information  by  Super  Admin  ......................................................................................  48

 

Figure  16:  User  Portal  Login  ......................................................................................................................  48

 

Figure  17:  User  Portal  Layout  ....................................................................................................................  49

 

Figure  18:  Multiple  User  Operation  Error  Prompt  .......................................................................................  49

 

Figure  19:  Operation  Logs  ..........................................................................................................................  50

 

Figure  20:  Operation  Logs  Filter  .................................................................................................................  51

 

Figure  21:  Change  Binding  Email  ...............................................................................................................  51

 

Figure  22:  UCM6102  Network  Interface  Method:  Route  ............................................................................  57

 

Figure  23:  UCM6102  Network  Interface  Method:  Switch  ...........................................................................  58

 

Figure  24:  UCM6102  Network  Interface  Method:  Dual  ..............................................................................  59

 

Figure  25:  UCM6100  Using  802.1X  as  Client  ............................................................................................  59

 

Figure  26:  UCM6100  Using  802.1X  EAP-­MD5  ..........................................................................................  60

 

Figure  27:  UCM6104  Static  Route  Sample  ................................................................................................  62

 

Figure  28:  UCM6104  Static  Route  Configuration  .......................................................................................  62

 

Figure  29:  UCM6102  Port  Forwarding  Configuration  .................................................................................  64

 

Figure  30:  GXP2160  Web  Access  Using  UCM6102  Port  Forwarding  ........................................................  64

 

Figure  31:  Register  Domain  Name  on  noip.com  ........................................................................................  65

 

Figure  32:  UCM6100  DDNS  Setting  ...........................................................................................................  66

 

Figure  33:  Using  Domain  Name  to  Connect  to  UCM6100  .........................................................................  66

 

Figure  34:  Create  New  Firewall  Rule  .........................................................................................................  68

 

Figure  35:  Configure  Dynamic  Defense  .....................................................................................................  70

 

Figure  36:  LDAP  Server  Configurations  .....................................................................................................  72

 

Figure  37:  Default  LDAP  Phonebook  DN  ...................................................................................................  73

 

Figure  38:  Default  LDAP  Phonebook  Attributes  .........................................................................................  73

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  11  of  304    

 

Figure  39:  LDAP  Server:  LDAP  Phonebook  ...............................................................................................  74

 

Figure  40:  Add  LDAP  Phonebook  ...............................................................................................................  74

 

Figure  41:  Edit  LDAP  Phonebook  ...............................................................................................................  75

 

Figure  42:  Import  Phonebook  .....................................................................................................................  75

 

Figure  43:  Phonebook  CSV  File  Format  ....................................................................................................  76

 

Figure  44:  LDAP  Phonebook  After  Import  ..................................................................................................  76

 

Figure  45:  Export  Selected  LDAP  Phonebook  ...........................................................................................  77

 

Figure  46:  LDAP  Client  Configurations  .......................................................................................................  77

 

Figure  47:  GXP2200  LDAP  Phonebook  Configuration  ...............................................................................  78

 

Figure  48:  UCM6100  Email  Settings  ..........................................................................................................  80

 

Figure  49:  Set  Time  Manually  .....................................................................................................................  82

 

Figure  50:  Create  New  Office  Time  ............................................................................................................  83

 

Figure  51:  Settings-­>Time  Settings-­>Office  Time  .......................................................................................  84

 

Figure  52:  Create  New  Holiday  ..................................................................................................................  85

 

Figure  53:  Settings-­>Time  Settings-­>Holiday  .............................................................................................  86

 

Figure  54:  Settings-­>Recordings  Storage  ..................................................................................................  87

 

Figure  55:  Recordings  Storage  Prompt  Information  ...................................................................................  88

 

Figure  56:  Recording  Storage  Category  .....................................................................................................  88

 

Figure  57:  Login  Timeout  Settings  ..............................................................................................................  89

 

Figure  58:  Zero  Config  Configuration  Architecture  for  End  Point  Device  ...................................................  92

 

Figure  59:  UCM6100  Zero  Config  ..............................................................................................................  93

 

Figure  60:  Auto  Provision  Settings  .............................................................................................................  94

 

Figure  61:  Auto  Discover  ............................................................................................................................  95

 

Figure  62:  Discovered  Devices  ..................................................................................................................  96

 

Figure  63:  Global  Policy  Categories  ...........................................................................................................  97

 

Figure  64:  Edit  Global  Template  ...............................................................................................................  105

 

Figure  65:  Edit  Model  Template  ................................................................................................................  107

 

Figure  66:  Template  Management  ............................................................................................................  108

 

Figure  67:  Upload  Model  Template  Manually  ...........................................................................................  109

 

Figure  68:  Create  New  Device  .................................................................................................................  110

 

Figure  69:  Manage  Devices  .....................................................................................................................  110

 

Figure  70:  Edit  Device  ..............................................................................................................................  111

 

Figure  71:  Edit  Customize  Device  Settings  ..............................................................................................  112

 

Figure  72:  Add  P  Value  in  Customize  Device  Settings  .............................................................................  113

 

Figure  73:  Modify  Selected  Devices  -­  Same  Model  .................................................................................  114

 

Figure  74:  Modify  Selected  Devices  -­  Different  Models  ............................................................................  115

 

Figure  75:  Device  List  in  Zero  Config  .......................................................................................................  116

 

Figure  76:  Zero  Config  Sample  -­  Global  Policy  ........................................................................................  117

 

Figure  77:  Zero  Config  Sample  -­  Device  Preview  1  .................................................................................  118

 

Figure  78:  Zero  Config  Sample  -­  Device  Preview  2  .................................................................................  119

 

Figure  79:  Zero  Config  Sample  -­  Device  Preview  3  .................................................................................  120

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  12  of  304    

 

Figure  80:  Create  New  Device  .................................................................................................................  121

 

Figure  81:  Manage  Extensions  .................................................................................................................  142

 

Figure  82:  Export  Extensions  ...................................................................................................................  143

 

Figure  83:  Import  Extensions  ...................................................................................................................  143

 

Figure  84:  Email  To  User  -­  Prompt  Information  ........................................................................................  144

 

Figure  85:  Account  Registration  Information  and  QR  Code  .....................................................................  145

 

Figure  86:  LDAP  Client  Information  and  QR  Code  ...................................................................................  145

 

Figure  87:  UCM6100  FXO  Tone  Settings  .................................................................................................  151

 

Figure  88:  UCM6100  PSTN  Detection  .....................................................................................................  151

 

Figure  89:  UCM6100  PSTN  Detection:  Auto  Detect  .................................................................................  152

 

Figure  90:  UCM6100  PSTN  Detection:  Semi-­Auto  Detect  .......................................................................  152

 

Figure  91:  DOD  extension  selection  .........................................................................................................  165

 

Figure  92:  Edit  DOD  .................................................................................................................................  165

 

Figure  93:  SLA  Station  .............................................................................................................................  166

 

Figure  94:  Enable  SLA  Mode  for  Analog  Trunk  ........................................................................................  168

 

Figure  95:  Analog  Trunk  with  SLA  Mode  Enabled  ....................................................................................  168

 

Figure  96:  SLA  Example  -­  SLA  Station  .....................................................................................................  168

 

Figure  97:  SLA  Example  -­  MPK  Configuration  .........................................................................................  169

 

Figure  98:  Inbound  Route  feature:  Prepend  .............................................................................................  175

 

Figure  99:  Blacklist  Configuration  Parameters  .........................................................................................  176

 

Figure  100:  Blacklist  csv  File  ....................................................................................................................  176

 

Figure  101:  Conference  Invitation  From  Web  GUI  ...................................................................................  180

 

Figure  102:  Conference  Recording  ..........................................................................................................  183

 

Figure  103:  Click  on  Prompt  to  Create  IVR  Prompt  .................................................................................  186

 

Figure  104:  Record  New  Custom  Prompt  ................................................................................................  186

 

Figure  105:  Upload  Custom  Prompt  .........................................................................................................  187

 

Figure  106:  Language  Settings  for  Voice  Prompt  .....................................................................................  188

 

Figure  107:  Voice  Prompt  Package  List  ...................................................................................................  189

 

Figure  108:  New  Voice  Prompt  Language  Added  ....................................................................................  189

 

Figure  109:  Voicemail  Email  Settings  .......................................................................................................  193

 

Figure  110:  Voicemail  Group  ....................................................................................................................  194

 

Figure  111:  Ring  Group  ............................................................................................................................  196

 

Figure  112:  Ring  Group  Configuration  ......................................................................................................  198

 

Figure  113:  Sync  LDAP  Server  option  ......................................................................................................  199

 

Figure  114:  Manually  Sync  LDAP  Server  .................................................................................................  199

 

Figure  115:  Ring  Group  Remote  Extension  ..............................................................................................  200

 

Figure  116:  Paging/Intercom  Group  .........................................................................................................  202

 

Figure  117:  Page/Intercom  Group  Settings  ..............................................................................................  203

 

Figure  118:  Call  Queue  .............................................................................................................................  204

 

Figure  119:  Agent  Login  Settings  ..............................................................................................................  207

 

Figure  120:  Edit  Extension  Group  ............................................................................................................  208

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  13  of  304    

 

Figure  121:  Select  Extension  Group  in  Outbound  Route  .........................................................................  209

 

Figure  122:  Edit  Pickup  Group  .................................................................................................................  210

 

Figure  123:  Edit  Pickup  Feature  Code  .....................................................................................................  211

 

Figure  124:  Music  On  Hold  Default  Class  ................................................................................................  212

 

Figure  125:  Configure  Analog  Trunk  without  Fax  Detection  .....................................................................  215

 

Figure  126:  Configure  Extension  for  Fax  Machine  ...................................................................................  216

 

Figure  127:  Configure  Inbound  Rule  for  Fax  ............................................................................................  216

 

Figure  128:  Create  Fax  Extension  ............................................................................................................  217

 

Figure  129:  Inbound  Route  to  Fax  Extension  ...........................................................................................  217

 

Figure  130:  Create  Follow  Me  ..................................................................................................................  222

 

Figure  131:  Edit  Follow  Me  .......................................................................................................................  222

 

Figure  132:  Configure  One-­Key  Dial  ........................................................................................................  224

 

Figure  133:  One-­Key  Dial  Destinations  ....................................................................................................  225

 

Figure  134:  Create  New  DISA  ..................................................................................................................  226

 

Figure  135:  Create  New  Event  List  ..........................................................................................................  231

 

Figure  136:  Create  Dial  By  Name  Group  .................................................................................................  234

 

Figure  137:  Dial  By  Name  Group  In  IVR  Key  Pressing  Events  ................................................................  235

 

Figure  138:  Dial  By  Name  Group  In  Inbound  Rule  ...................................................................................  236

 

Figure  139:  Configure  Extension  First  Name  and  Last  Name  ..................................................................  237

 

Figure  140:  Status-­>PBX  Status-­>Active  Calls  -­  Ringing  .........................................................................  238

 

Figure  141:  Status-­>PBX  Status-­>Active  Calls  –  Call  Established  ..........................................................  238

 

Figure  142:  Configure  to  Monitor  an  Active  Call  .......................................................................................  239

 

Figure  143:  Download  Recording  File  from  CDR  Page  ............................................................................  246

 

Figure  144:  Download  Recording  File  from  Recording  Files  Page  ..........................................................  247

 

Figure  145:  FXS  Ports  Signaling  Preference  ...........................................................................................  253

 

Figure  146:  FXO  Ports  ACIM  Settings  ......................................................................................................  253

 

Figure  147:  Fax  Sending  in  Web  UI  .........................................................................................................  264

 

Figure  148:  Announcements  Center  .........................................................................................................  265

 

Figure  149:  Announcements  Center  Group  Configuration  .......................................................................  266

 

Figure  150:  Announcements  Center  Code  Configuration  .........................................................................  267

 

Figure  151:  Announcements  Center  Example  ..........................................................................................  267

 

Figure  152:  Status-­>PBX  Status  ..............................................................................................................  268

 

Figure  153:  Trunk  Status  ..........................................................................................................................  268

 

Figure  154:  Extension  Status  ...................................................................................................................  269

 

Figure  155:  Queue  Status  ........................................................................................................................  271

 

Figure  156:  Conference  Room  Status  ......................................................................................................  271

 

Figure  157:  UCM6116  Interfaces  Status  ..................................................................................................  272

 

Figure  158:  Parking  Lot  Status  .................................................................................................................  273

 

Figure  159:  System  Status-­>Storage  Usage  ............................................................................................  275

 

Figure  160:  System  Status-­>Resource  Usage  .........................................................................................  276

 

Figure  161:  System  Events-­>Alert  Events  Lists:  Disk  Usage  ...................................................................  277

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  14  of  304    

 

Figure  162:  System  Events-­>Alert  Events  Lists:  Memory  Usage  .............................................................  277

 

Figure  163:  System  Events-­>Alert  Events  Lists:  System  Reboot  .............................................................  278

 

Figure  164:  System  Events-­>Alert  Events  Lists:  System  Crash  ...............................................................  278

 

Figure  165:  System  Events-­>Alert  Log  .....................................................................................................  279

 

Figure  166:  Filter  for  Alert  Log  ..................................................................................................................  279

 

Figure  167:  CDR  Filter  .............................................................................................................................  280

 

Figure  168:  Call  Report  ............................................................................................................................  281

 

Figure  169:  Call  Report  Entry  with  Audio  Recording  File  .........................................................................  282

 

Figure  170:  Automatic  Download  Settings  ...............................................................................................  282

 

Figure  171:  Downloaded  CDR  File  Sample  -­  Call  To  Shows  "s"  ..............................................................  283

 

Figure  172:  Downloaded  CDR  File  Sample  -­  Source  Channel  and  Dest  Channel  1  ................................  283

 

Figure  173:  Downloaded  CDR  File  Sample  -­  Source  Channel  and  Dest  Channel  2  ................................  284

 

Figure  174:  Downloaded  CDR  File  Sample  -­  Source  Channel  and  Dest  Channel  3  ................................  284

 

Figure  175:  CDR  Statistics  .......................................................................................................................  285

 

Figure  176:  CDR-­>Recording  Files  ..........................................................................................................  286

 

Figure  177:  Network  Upgrade  ..................................................................................................................  288

 

Figure  178:  Local  Upgrade  .......................................................................................................................  289

 

Figure  179:  Upgrading  Firmware  Files  .....................................................................................................  290

 

Figure  180:  Reboot  UCM6100  .................................................................................................................  290

 

Figure  181:  Create  New  Backup  ..............................................................................................................  292

 

Figure  182:  Backup  /  Restore  ...................................................................................................................  292

 

Figure  183:  Local  Backup  .........................................................................................................................  293

 

Figure  184:  Data  Sync  ..............................................................................................................................  293

 

Figure  185:  Restore  UCM6100  from  Backup  File  ....................................................................................  295

 

Figure  186:  Cleaner  ..................................................................................................................................  296

 

Figure  187:  Reset  and  Reboot  .................................................................................................................  297

 

Figure  188:  Ethernet  Capture  ...................................................................................................................  298

 

Figure  189:  PING  .....................................................................................................................................  299

 

Figure  190:  Traceroute  .............................................................................................................................  300

 

Figure  191:  Troubleshooting  Analog  Trunks  .............................................................................................  301

 

Figure  192:  Service  Check  .......................................................................................................................  301

 

Figure  193:  SSH  Access  ..........................................................................................................................  302

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  15  of  304    

 

GNU  GPL  INFORMATION  

 

UCM6100  firmware  contains  third-­party  software  licensed  under  the  GNU  General  Public  License  (GPL).  

Grandstream   uses   software   under   the   specific   terms   of   the   GPL.   Please   see   the   GNU   General   Public  

License  (GPL)  for  the  exact  terms  and  conditions  of  the  license.  

 

Grandstream  GNU  GPL  related  source  code  can  be  downloaded  from  Grandstream  web  site  from:   http://www.grandstream.com/support/faq/gnu_gpl  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  16  of  304    

 

 

CHANGE  LOG  

 

 

This  section  documents  significant  changes  from  previous  versions  of  the  UCM6100  user  manuals.  Only   major  new  features  or  major  document  updates  are  listed  here.  Minor  updates  for  corrections  or  editing  are   not  documented  here.  

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.9.26  

 

•  

Added  Announcements  Center  [ANNOUNCEMENTS  CENTER]  

 

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.9.25  

•  

Added  UCM  Zero  Config  model  templates  for  provisioning  GXP2200EXT  coupled  with  GXV3240.  

[MODEL  TEMPLATES]  

•  

Added   ability   to   select   the   voicemail   storage   (Support   Email   +   WAV).   [VOICEMAIL   EMAIL  

SETTINGS]  

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.9.23  

 

•  

Added  SSH  enable/disable  option  in  LCD  or  WEB  [SSH  ACCESS]  

•  

Added  remote  peer  extensions  in  Ring  Group  [REMOTE  EXTENSION  IN  RING  GROUP]  

•  

Added   ability   to   prepend   digits   in   inbound   routes   [Table   58:   Inbound   Rule   Configuration  

Parameters]  

•  

Added  ability  to  search  extensions  on  Extension  page.  [SEARCH  AND  EDIT  EXTENSION]  

•  

Added  user  portal  for  users  to  log  in  with  extension  number,  access  user  information,  extension   configuration  and  CDR.  [USER  PORTAL]  

•  

Added  support  to  send  Fax  via  web  UI.  [FAX  SENDING]  

•  

Added  "Enable  LDAP"  option  to  skip  the  extension  from  UCM  default  LDAP  phonebook.  [Table  34:  

SIP  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Basic  Settings]  

•  

Added  DDNS  Support.  [DDNS  SETTINGS]  

•  

Added  support  for  Call  Barging  using  feature  codes.  [ENABLE  SPY]  

•  

Added  ability  to  search  the  CDR  by  called  number.  [Table  100:  CDR  Filter  Criteria]  

•  

Added  ability  to  select  the  file  types  for  automatic  backup.  [BACKUP/RESTORE]  

•  

Added  automatic  backup  support  on  SD  Card  or  USB  storage.  [BACKUP/RESTORE]  

•  

Added   support   to   skip   trunk   authentication   by   time   condition.   [Table   36:   SIP   Extension  

Configuration  Parameters  -­  Features]  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  17  of  304    

 

•  

Added  option  to  send  P-­Asserted-­Identity  header  in  SIP  Register  Trunk.  [Table  51:  SIP  Register  

Trunk  Configuration  Parameters]  

•  

Added  ability  to  specify  trunks  in  CDR  filters.  [CDR]  

•  

Added  ability  to  use  Pattern  in  Caller  Number  to  filter  CDR.  [CDR]  

•  

Added  support  to  send  UNREGISTER  when  VoIP  trunk  is  disabled.  [Table  51:  SIP  Register  Trunk  

Configuration  Parameters]  

•  

Added  LDAP  Client  support  [LDAP  CLIENT  CONFIGURATIONS]  

•  

Added  option  to  specify  the  chronological  order  of  voice  mails.  [Table  62:  Voicemail  Settings]  

•  

Added  option  to  configure  whether  to  skip  pressing  1/2  to  accept  or  reject  calls  from  Follow  Me.  

[Table  70:  Follow  Me  Settings]  

•  

Added  option  to  specify  port  range  in  Port  Forwarding  configuration.  [Table  14:  UCM6102  Network  

Settings-­>Port  Forwarding]  

•  

Added  ability  to  go  back  to  IVR  menu  from  Dial  By  Name  by  pressing  the  star  key.  [DIAL  BY  NAME  

CONFIGURATION]  

•  

Added  support  to  upgrade  SIP  end  device  via  SD  card  in  Zero  Config.  [Table  29:  Global  Policy  

Parameters:  Maintenance]  

•  

Added  ability  to  filter  alert  logs.  [ALERT  LOG]  

•  

Added  ability  to  delete  alert  logs.  [ALERT  LOG]  

•  

Added  NAT  option  for  peer  trunk.  [Table  52:  SIP  Peer  Trunk  Configuration  Parameters]  

•  

Improved  Automatic  Download  CDR  result  format.  [CDR]  

 

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.8.12  

•  

Added  recording  files  store  management.  [RECORDINGS  STORAGE]  

•  

Added  AMI  access  (restricted).  [ASTERISK  MANAGER  INTERFACE  (RESTRICTED  ACCESS)]  

•  

Added  LDAP  Phonebook  Import/Export  support.  [LDAP  PHONEBOOK]  

•  

Added  Callback  feature.  [CALLBACK  FEATURE]  

•  

Added  Busy  Camp-­on  (Call  Completion)  feature.  [BUSY  CAMP-­ON]  

•  

Added  external  number  calling  via  extension.  [Table  36:  SIP  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  

Features]  

•  

Added   end   point   firmware   management   support   to   allow   end   point   device   to   upgrade   via  

UCM6100  local  storage  or  USB  media.  [Table  29:  Global  Policy  Parameters:  Maintenance]  

•  

Added  link  to  access  phone  web  GUI  in  Zero  Config.  [MANAGE  DEVICES]  

•  

Added  model  update  support  to  download  model  templates  for  surveillance  and  GSwave.  [MODEL  

UPDATE]  

•  

Added  filter  for  searching  in  Alert  Log.  [ALERT  LOG]  

•  

Added  DAHDI  Out  Line  Selection.  [Table  48:  Analog  Trunk  Configuration  Parameters]  

•  

Added  automatic  CDR  download.  [CDR]  

•  

Added  multi-­user  management  and  concurrent  user  login  support.  [USER  MANAGEMENT]  

•  

Added  operation  log.  [OPERATION  LOG]  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  18  of  304    

 

•  

Added  option  to  specify  web  access  session  timer.  [LOGIN  TIMEOUT  SETTINGS]  

•  

Added  call  monitor/barge-­in  support.  [ACTIVE  CALLS  AND  MONITOR]  

•  

Added  GSwave  QR  code  support.  [EMAIL  TO  USER]  

•  

Added  ability  to  add  customized  Pvalue  on  Model  Template.  [MODEL  TEMPLATES]  

•  

Updated  maximum  length  of  web  UI  login  password  to  30  characters.  [CHANGE  PASSWORD]  

•  

Added   Fax   gateway   support   for   Fax   mode   on   FXS   and   FXO   port.   [Table   43:   FXS   Extension  

Configuration  Parameters  -­  Media]  [Table  48:  Analog  Trunk  Configuration  Parameters]  

•  

Added  “NAT”  option  and  “Send  PPI  Header”  option  in  SIP  register  trunk  configuration.  [Table  51:  

SIP  Register  Trunk  Configuration  Parameters]  

•  

Added  REC  API  (access  for  call  recording  files).  [API  CONFIGURATION]  

•  

Added  “Synchronize  All  Data”  option  in  Data  Sync.  [DATA  SYNC]  

•  

Added  “Delect  Selected  Sound  Files”  option  for  Music  On  Hold  files.  [MUSIC  ON  HOLD]  

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.7.11  

 

•  

Added  office  time  and  holiday  setting.  [OFFICE  TIME]  [HOLIDAY]  

•  

Added  new  architecture  for  auto  provisioning  via  Zero  Config.  [

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  19  of  304    

 

PROVISIONING]  

•  

Added   Alert-­info   configuration   for   distinctive   ringing   on   inbound   route.   [Table   58:   Inbound   Rule  

Configuration  Parameters]  

•  

Added  SLA  support  to  monitor  FXO  trunk.  [SLA  STATION]  

•  

Added  Follow  Me  support.  [FOLLOW  ME]  

•  

Added  One-­Key  Dial  support.  [ONE-­KEY  DIAL]  

•  

Added  FXO  Dial  Delay  option  for  analog  trunk.  [Table  48:  Analog  Trunk  Configuration  Parameters]  

•  

Added  Music  On  Hold  selection  per  extension.  [EXTENSIONS]  

•  

Added  Call  Forward  Time  Condition  per  extension.  [EXTENSIONS]  

•  

Added  custom  prompt  support  for  ring  group  announcement.  [Table  66:  Ring  Group  Parameters]  

•  

Added   custom   prompt   support   for   paging/intercom   group   announcement.   [Table   67:  

Paging/Intercom  Group  Configuration  Parameters]  

•  

Added  options  to  delete  voicemail  and  Fax  files  via  cleaner.  [CLEANER]  

•  

Added  DTMF  configuration  per  trunk.  [VOIP  TRUNKS]  

•  

Added  call  queue  Music  On  Hold  customization.  [Table  68:  Call  Queue  Configuration  Parameters]  

•  

Added  call  queue  destination  support.  [Table  68:  Call  Queue  Configuration  Parameters]  

•  

Added  batch  add  blacklist  file  support.  [BLACKLIST  CONFIGURATIONS]  

 

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.6.11  

 

•  

Added   service   check   options   under   web   UI-­>Maintenance-­>Troubleshooting-­>Service   Check   page  to  regularly  check  Asterisk  service.    

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.6.10  

 

•  

Added  static  routes  function.  [STATIC  ROUTES]  

•  

Added  option  to  provision  end  devices’  date  format,  time  format  and  time  zone  in  zero  config.  

•  

Added  option  to  disable  extension/trunk.  

•  

Added  TEL  URL  support  for  extension/trunk.  

•  

Added  option  to  dial  trunk  password  per  extensions.  

•  

Added   export   extension   and   import   extension   function.   [EXPORT   EXTENSIONS]   [IMPORT  

EXTENSIONS]  

•  

Added  option  "Need  Registration"  for  SIP  register  trunk.  

•  

Added  option  "The  Maximum  Number  of  Call  Line"  for  trunk.  

•  

Added  Dial  By  Name.  [DIAL  BY  NAME]  

•  

Added  voicemail  password  and  Email  address  for  voicemail  group  extension.  

•  

Added  auto  record  support  for  ring  group  and  call  queue.  

•  

Added  VFax  file  display,  download  and  delete  interface  in  web  UI.  

•  

Changed  web  page  name  from  "Hardware  Config"  to  "Ports  Config".  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  20  of  304    

 

•  

Added  payload  configuration  for  audio/video  codecs.  [INTERNAL  OPTIONS/PAYLOAD]  

•  

Added  activity  calls  status  on  web  UI  status  page.  

•  

Added  CDR  API  support.  [API  CONFIGURATION]  

•  

Added  more  alert  events  support  such  as  Register  SIP  Failed,  Register  SIP  Trunk  Failed,  Restore  

Config,   User   Login   Success,   User   Login   Failed,   SIP   Internal   Call   Failure   and   etc.   [ALERT  

EVENTS  LIST]  

 

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.5.19  

 

•  

Added   built-­in   data   migration   tool   to   support   upgrading   from   1.0.4.7   to   1.0.5.19   without   factory   reset.  

•  

Added  "Direct  Dial  Voicemail  Prefix"  feature  code  back.  [Table  75:  UCM6100  Feature  Codes]  

•  

Changed   valid   range   for   option   "Current   Disconnect   Threshold".   [Table   48:   Analog   Trunk  

Configuration  Parameters]  

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.5.14  

 

•  

New   backend   data   structure   and   web   UI   performance   improvement.   1.0.5.14   is   not   compatible   with   previous   firmware   versions.   Once   upgraded   to   1.0.5.14,   the   device   needs   to   be   FULLY  

RESET  and  RE-­CONFIGURED  MANUALLY.  

•  

Added  traditional  Chinese  language  for  web  UI.  [WEB  GUI  LANGUAGES]  

•  

Updated  LDAP  configuration  example.  [LDAP  SERVER]  

•  

Added  "Enable  Filter  Source  Caller  ID"  and  "Custom  Dynamic  Route"  options  for  outbound  route   settings.  [Table  57:  Outbound  Route  Configuration  Parameters]  

•  

Added  more  language  support  for  voice  prompt.  [LANGUAGE  SETTINGS  FOR  VOICE  PROMPT]  

•  

Added  "Ring  Group  Destination"  for  ring  group  configuration.  [Table  66:  Ring  Group  Parameters]  

•  

Added  "Extension  Groups"  section  in  web  UI.  [EXTENSION  GROUPS]  

•  

Added  "Pickup  Groups"  section  in  web  UI.  [PICKUP  GROUPS]  

•  

Added  BLF  function  description.  [BLF  AND  EVENT  LIST]  

•  

Updated  default  extension  range.  [Table  76:  Internal  Options/General]  

•  

Added  sample  descriptions  for  downloaded  CDR  file.  [DOWNLOADED  CDR  FILE]  

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.4.7  

 

•  

Asterisk  updated  to  version  1.8.23.1.  

•  

Added  DID  routing  support  for  incoming  calls.  [Table  50:  Create  New  SIP  Trunk]  

•  

Added  DOD  routing  support.  [DIRECT  OUTWARD  DIALING  (DOD)]  

•  

Added  GXP  one-­button  Voicemail  access.  [Table  34:  SIP  Extension  Configuration  Parameters]  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  21  of  304    

 

•  

Added  option  "Skip  voicemail  password  verification"  on  extension  edit  page.  [Table  34:  SIP  

Extension  Configuration  Parameters]  

•  

Added  Hot-­Desking  Support.  [Table  34:  SIP  Extension  Configuration  Parameters]  

•  

Added  one-­button  on-­demand  call  recording  for  GXP  

•  

Add  new  option  to  enable  or  disable  "FXS  TISS  Override"  on  Hardware  Config  page.  [Table  79:  

Internal  Options/Ports  Config]  

•  

Added  more  modes  for  FXS  Two-­Wire  Impedance  Synthesis  

•  

Added  LDAP  Sync  manual  trigger  function  and  synced  date  displaying.  [VOIP  TRUNKS]  

•  

Improved  LDAP  Sync  function,  added  retrying,  file  verifying  and  progress  displaying  function  

•  

Added  option  "Pick  Extension  Period"  on  auto-­provision  settings  page  of  Zero  Config  

•  

Added  multiple  extension  assignment  support  on  device  edit  page  of  Zero  Config  

•  

Added  "Reset  All  Extensions"  button  at  the  Zero  Config  page  to  recycle  all  assigned  extensions.  

[AUTO  PROVISIONING]  

•  

Added  system  crash  alarm,  core  dump  detection  and  allow  users  to  download  core  dump  file.  

[Figure  164:  System  Events-­>Alert  Events  Lists:  System  Crash]  

•  

Add  "Keep  Trunk  CID"  option  for  VoIP  trunks,  and  keep  the  priorities:  DOD-­>Extension  

CallerID-­>Trunk  CallerID-­>Global  CallerID.  [Table  50:  Create  New  SIP  Trunk]  

 

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.3.13  

 

•  

Added  Fail2Ban  support  for  SIP  authentication.  [FAIL2BAN]  

•  

Added  voice  prompt  "Language"  selection  and  "Auto  Record"  option  for  extension.  [Table  34:  SIP  

Extension  Configuration  Parameters]  [Table  46:  Batch  Add  SIP  Extension  Parameters]  

•  

Added  "Auto  Record"  option  for  trunk.  

•  

Added   "Digit   Timeout"   option   and   voice   prompt   "Language"   selection   for   IVR.   [Table   61:   IVR  

Configuration  Parameters]  

•  

Added   "Direct   Dial   Voicemail   Prefix"   feature   code   to   directly   dial   or   transfer   to   extension's   voicemail.  [Table  75:  UCM6100  Feature  Codes]  

•  

Added  "Enforce  Strong  Passwords"  option.  [Table  76:  Internal  Options/General]  

•  

Added  FXS  MWI  Mode.  [Table  79:  Internal  Options/Ports  Config]  

•  

Added  system  events  with  alert  and  Email  notification  support.  [SYSTEM  EVENTS]  

•  

Added  new  web  page  for  recording  files.  [RECORDING  FILES]    

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.2.21  

 

•  

Added  weight  information.  [Table  1:  Technical  Specifications]  

•  

Added  NTP  server  support.  [NTP  SERVER]  

•  

Added  Czech  language  for  web  GUI  display.  [WEB  GUI  LANGUAGES]  

•  

Added  VLAN  support.  "Layer  2  QoS  802.1Q/VLAN  tag"  and  "Layer  2  QoS  802.1p  priority  value"  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  22  of  304    

 

options  for  network  port  settings  are  added.  [NETWORK  SETTINGS]  

•  

Updated  LDAP  client  configurations  information.  

•  

Added  sample  Email  settings.  [EMAIL  SETTINGS]  

•  

Added  manual  time  settings.  [TIME  SETTINGS]  

•  

Added  "Enable  Pick  Extension"  and  "Extension  Segment"  options  for  auto  provisioning  settings.  

•  

Changed   one   of   the   discovery   method   from   "SIP   MESSAGE   (OPTIONS)"   to   "SIP   MESSAGE  

(NOTIFY)"  in  zero-­config  feature.  

•  

Added  pickup  group  feature.  [Table  75:  UCM6100  Feature  Codes]  

•  

Added   PSTN   detection   instructions   for   "Auto   Detect"   and   "Semi-­auto   Detect".   [PSTN  

DETECTION]  

•  

Added  "Auth  ID"  option  for  SIP  register  trunk  configuration.  [Table  50:  Create  New  SIP  Trunk]  

•  

Added  LDAP  sync  options  for  peer  SIP  trunk.  [Table  50:  Create  New  SIP  Trunk]  

•  

Changed  the  default  setting  of  outbound  route  "Privilege  Level"  from  "Internal"  to  "International"  to   avoid  potential  misconfiguration  and  security  risk.  

•  

Added  DISA  and  Fax  to  IVR  key  press  event  options.  [Table  61:  IVR  Configuration  Parameters]  

•  

Added  "Min  Message  Time"  option  in  voicemail  settings.  [Table  62:  Voicemail  Settings]  

•  

Added  Fax  setting  samples.  [FAX/T.38]  

•  

Added  DISA  support  for  inbound  route  and  IVR.  

•  

Added  Event  List  support  to  monitor  local  extensions  and  remote  extensions.  [BLF  AND  EVENT  

LIST]  

•  

Added  feature  code  *0  for  "Disconnect".  [Table  75:  UCM6100  Feature  Codes]  

•  

Added   feature   code   *8   for   "Pickup   Extension"   in   pickup   group   feature.   [Table   75:   UCM6100  

Feature  Codes]  

•  

Added  "Record  Prompt"  and  "Custom  Name  of  Pickup  Group"  options  in  internal  options.  [Table  

76:  Internal  Options/General]  

•  

Added  warning  information  for  "Allow  Guest  Call"  option  to  avoid  potential  security  risk  caused  by   misconfiguration.  [Table  82:  IAX  Settings/General]  

•  

Changed  reset  mode  to  two  mode  "User  Data"  and  "All".  [RESET  AND  REBOOT]  

 

FIRMWARE  VERSION  1.0.1.22  

 

•  

This  is  the  initial  version.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  23  of  304    

 

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  24  of  304    

 

WELCOME  

 

Thank  you  for  purchasing  Grandstream  UCM6100  series  IP  PBX  appliance.  The  UCM6100  series  IP  PBX   is   an   innovative   IP   PBX   appliance   designed   for   small   to   medium   business.   Powered   by   an   advanced   hardware   platform   with   robust   system   resources,   the   UCM6100   offers   a   highly   versatile   state-­of-­the-­art  

 

 

Unified   Communication   (UC)   solution   for   converged   voice,   video,   data,   fax   and   video   surveillance   application   needs.   Incorporating   industry-­leading   features   and   performance,   the   UCM6100   offers   quick   setup,  deployment  with  ease  and  unrivaled  reliability  all  at  an  unprecedented  price  point.  

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­

 

  Caution:

 

 

Changes   or   modifications   to   this   product   not   expressly   approved   by   Grandstream,   or   operation   of   this   product  in  any  way  other  than  as  detailed  by  this  User  Manual,  could  void  your  manufacturer  warranty.  

 

Warning:

   

 

 

Please  do  not  use  a  different  power  adaptor  with  the  UCM6100  as  it  may  cause  damage  to  the  products   and  void  the  manufacturer  warranty.  

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

This   document   is   subject   to   change   without   notice.   The   latest   electronic   version   of   this   user   manual   is   available  for  download  here:  

  http://www.grandstream.com/support  

 

Reproduction  or  transmittal  of  the  entire  or  any  part,  in  any  form  or  by  any  means,  electronic  or  print,  for   any  purpose  without  the  express  written  permission  of  Grandstream  Networks,  Inc.  is  not  permitted.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  25  of  304    

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  26  of  304    

 

PRODUCT  OVERVIEW  

FEATURE  HIGHTLIGHTS  

 

•  

1GHz  ARM  Cortex  A8  application  processor,  large  memory  (512MB  DDR  RAM,  4GB  NAND  Flash),   and  dedicated  high  performance  multi-­core  DSP  array  for  advanced  voice  processing.  

•  

Integrated  2/4/8/16  PSTN  trunk  FXO  ports,  2  analog  telephone  FXS  ports  with  lifeline*  capability  in   case  of  power  outage,  and  up  to  50  SIP  trunk  options.  

•  

Gigabit   network   port(s)   with   integrated   PoE,   USB,   SD;;   integrated   NAT   router   with   advanced   QoS   support  (UCM6102  only).  

•  

Supports  a  wide  range  of  popular  voice  codes  (including  G.711  A-­law/U-­law,  G.722,  G.723.1,  G.726,  

G.729A/B,  iLBC  (30ms  only),  GSM),  video  codec  (including  H.264,  H.263,  H.263+),  and  Fax  (T.38).  

•  

Hardware  DSP  based  128ms-­tail-­length  carrier-­grade  line  echo  cancellation  (LEC).  

•  

Supports   up   to   500   SIP   endpoint   registration,   up   to   60   concurrent   calls   and   up   to   32   conference   attendees.  

•  

Flexible  dial  plan,  call  routing,  site  peering,  call  recording.  

•  

Automated  detection  and  provisioning  of  IP  phones,  video  phones,  ATA  and  other  endpoints  for  easy   deployment.  

•  

Hardware   encryption   accelerator   to   ensure   strongest   security   protection   using   SRTP,   TLS,   and  

HTTPS.  

 

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  1:  UCM6102/UCM6104/UCM6108/UCM6116  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  27  of  304    

 

 

TECHNICAL  SPECIFICATIONS  

Voice-­over-­Packet  

Capabilities  

Voice  and  Fax  Codecs  

Video  Codecs  

QoS  

Signaling  and  Control

 

DTMF  Methods  

 

Table  1:  Technical  Specifications

 

Interfaces

 

Analog  Telephone  FXS  Ports   2  ports  (both  with  lifeline  capability  in  case  of  power  outage)  

PSTN  Line  FXO  Ports  

Network  Interfaces  

NAT  Router  

Peripheral  Ports  

LED  Indicators  

LCD  Display  

Reset  Switch  

•  

UCM6102:  2  ports  

•  

UCM6104:  4  ports  

•  

UCM6108:  8  ports  

•  

UCM6116:  16  ports  

•  

UCM6102/6104:   Dual   10M/100M/1000M   RJ45   Ethernet   ports   with   integrated  PoE  Plug  (IEEE  802.3at-­2009)  

•  

UCM6108/6116:   Single   10M/100M/1000M   RJ45   Ethernet   port   with   integrated  PoE  Plug  (IEEE  802.3at-­2009)  

Yes,  UCM6102  only  

USB,  SD/SDHC  (VFAT)  

Power/Ready,  Network,  PSTN  Line,  USB,  SD  

128x32  graphic  LCD  with  DOWN  and  OK  button  

Yes  

Voice/Video  Capabilities

 

LEC   with   NLP   Packetized   Voice   Protocol   Unit,   128ms-­tail-­length   carrier   grade   Line   Echo   Cancellation,   Dynamic   Jitter   Buffer,   Modem   detection   and  auto-­switch  to  G.711  

G.711   A-­law/U-­law,   G.722,   G.723.1   5.3K/6.3K,   G.726,   G.729A/B,   iLBC  

(30ms  only),  GSM;;  T.38  

H.264,  H.263,  H.263+  

Layer  3  QoS  

Provisioning  Protocol  and    

Plug-­and-­Play  

Network  Protocols  

Disconnect  Methods  

In  Audio,  RFC2833,  and  SIP  INFO  

TFTP/HTTP/HTTPS,   auto-­discovery   and   auto-­provisioning   of    

Grandstream  IP  endpoints  via  ZeroConfig  (DHCP  Option  66/multicast  SIP  

SUBSCRIBE/mDNS)  

TCP/UDP/IP,   RTP/RTCP,   ICMP,   ARP,   DNS,   DDNS,   DHCP,   NTP,   TFTP,  

SSH,  HTTP/HTTPS,  PPPoE,  SIP  (RFC3261),  STUN,  SRTP,  TLS  

Call  Progress  Tone,  Polarity  Reversal,  Hook  Flash  Timing,  Loop  Current  

Disconnect,  Busy  Tone  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  28  of  304    

 

 

Security

 

Media   SRTP,  TLS,  HTTPS,  SSH  

Physical

 

Universal  Power  Supply  

Environmental  

Dimensions  

Weight  

Mounting  

•  

Output:  12VDC,  1.5A  

•  

Input:  100-­240VAC,  50-­60Hz  

•  

Operating:  32  -­  104 o

F  /  0  -­  40 o

C,  10-­90%  (non-­condensing)  

•  

Storage:  14  -­  140 o

F  /  -­10  -­  60 o

C  

•  

UCM6102/6104:  226mm  (L)  x  155mm  (W)  x  34.5mm  (H)  

•  

UCM6108/6116:  440mm  (L)  x  185mm  (W)  x  44mm  (H)  

•  

UCM6102:  Unit  weight  0.51kg,  Package  weight  0.94kg  

•  

UCM6104:  Unit  weight  0.51kg,  Package  weight  0.94kg  

•  

UCM6108:  Unit  weight  2.23kg,  Package  weight  3.09kg  

•  

UCM6116:  Unit  weight  2.27kg,  Package  weight  3.14kg  

•  

UCM6102/6104:  Wall  mount  and  Desktop  

•  

UCM6108/6116:  Rack  mount  and  Desktop  

Additional  Features

 

Multi-­language  Support  

Caller  ID  

Polarity  Reversal/  Wink  

Yes,   English/Chinese/Spanish/French/German/Russian/Italian   for   Web  

GUI;;  Customizable  IVR  to  support  any  language  

Bellcore/Telcordia,  ETSI-­FSK,  ETSI-­DTMF,  SIN  227  -­  BT,  NTT  Japan  

Yes,  with  enable/disable  option  upon  call  establishment  and  termination  

Call  Center  

Multiple   configurable   call   queues,   automatic   call   distribution   (ACD)   based  on  agent  skills/availability  busy  level,  in-­queue  announcement  

Customizable  Auto  Attendant   Up  to  5  layers  of  IVR  (Interactive  Voice  Response)  

Concurrent  Calls  

Conference  Bridges  

Call  Features  

Compliance  

•  

UCM6102:  Up  to  30  simultaneous  calls  

•  

UCM6104:  Up  to  45  simultaneous  calls  

•  

UCM6108/6116:  Up  to  60  simultaneous  calls  

•  

UCM6102/6104:   Up   to   3   password-­protected   conference   bridges   allowing  up  to  25  simultaneous  PSTN  or  IP  participants  

•  

UCM6108/6116:   Up   to   6   password-­protected   conference   bridges   allowing  up  to  32  simultaneous  PSTN  or  IP  participants  

Call   park,   call   forward,   call   transfer,   DND,   ring/hunt   group,   paging/intercom  and  etc  

•  

FCC:  Part  15  (CFR  47)  Class  B,  Part  68  

•  

CE:   EN55022   Class   B,   EN55024,   EN61000-­3-­2,   EN61000-­3-­3,  

EN60950-­1,  TBR21,  RoHS  

•  

A-­TICK:   AS/NZS   CISPR   22   Class   B,   AS/NZS   CISPR   24,   AS/NZS  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  29  of  304    

 

60950,  AS/ACIF  S002  and  ITU-­T  K.21  (Basic  Level)  

•  

UL  60950  (power  adapter)  

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­

 

 

Note:    

•  

UCM6100  FXS  ports  lifeline  functionality:  

The   UCM6100   FXS   interfaces   are   metallic   through   to   the   FXO   interfaces.   If   there   is   power   outage,  

FXS1  port  will  fail  over  to  FXO  1  port,  FXS  2  port  will  fail  over  to  FXO  2  port.  The  user  can  still  access   the  PSTN  connected  with  the  FXO  interfaces  from  FXS  interfaces.  

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  30  of  304    

 

INSTALLATION  

 

Before  deploying  and  configuring  the  UCM6100  series,  the  device  needs  to  be  properly  powered  up  and  

  connected  to  network.  This  section  describes  detailed  information  on  installation,  connection  and  warranty   policy  of  the  UCM6100  series.  

EQUIPMENT  PACKAGING  

 

Table  2:  UCM6102/UCM6104  Equipment  Packaging  

Main  Case  

Power  Adaptor  

Ethernet  Cable  

Quick  Installation  Guide  

GPL  License  

Yes  (1)  

Yes  (1)  

Yes  (1)  

Yes  (1)  

Yes  (1)  

 

CONNECT  YOUR  UCM6100  

CONNECT  THE  UCM6102  

 

 

 

Figure  2:  UCM6102  Front  View  

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  31  of  304    

 

 

Figure  3:  UCM6102  Back  View  

 

 

 

To  set  up  the  UCM6102,  follow  the  steps  below:  

1.   Connect  one  end  of  an  RJ-­45  Ethernet  cable  into  the  WAN  port  of  the  UCM6102.  

2.   Connect  the  other  end  of  the  Ethernet  cable  into  the  uplink  port  of  an  Ethernet  switch/hub.  

3.   Connect  the  12V  DC  power  adapter  into  the  12V  DC  power  jack  on  the  back  of  the  UCM6102.  Insert   the  main  plug  of  the  power  adapter  into  a  surge-­protected  power  outlet.  

4.   Wait   for   the   UCM6102   to   boot   up.   The   LCD   in   the   front   will   show   the   device   hardware   information   when  the  boot  process  is  done.  

5.   Once  the  UCM6102  is  successfully  connected  to  network,  the  LED  indicator  for  WAN  in  the  front  will  

  be  in  solid  green  and  the  LCD  shows  up  the  IP  address.  

6.   (Optional)  Connect  PSTN  lines  from  the  wall  jack  to  the  FXO  ports;;  connect  analog  lines  (phone  and  

Fax)  to  the  FXS  ports.  

 

CONNECT  THE  UCM6104  

 

Figure  4:  UCM6104  Front  View

 

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  32  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  5:  UCM6104  Back  View  

 

 

 

To  set  up  the  UCM6104,  follow  the  steps  below:  

1.   Connect  one  end  of  an  RJ-­45  Ethernet  cable  into  the  LAN  1  port  of  the  UCM6104.  

2.   Connect  the  other  end  of  the  Ethernet  cable  into  the  uplink  port  of  an  Ethernet  switch/hub.  

3.   Connect  the  12V  DC  power  adapter  into  the  12V  DC  power  jack  on  the  back  of  the  UCM6104.  Insert   the  main  plug  of  the  power  adapter  into  a  surge-­protected  power  outlet.  

4.   Wait   for   the   UCM6104   to   boot   up.   The   LCD   in   the   front   will   show   the   device   hardware   information   when  the  boot  process  is  done.  

5.   Once  the  UCM6104  is  successfully  connected  to  network,  the  LED  indicator  for  LAN  1  in  the  front  will  

 

  be  in  solid  green  and  the  LCD  shows  up  the  IP  address.  

6.   (Optional)  Connect  PSTN  lines  from  the  wall  jack  to  the  FXO  ports;;  connect  analog  lines  (phone  and  

Fax)  to  the  FXS  ports.  

CONNECT  THE  UCM6108  

 

 

To  set  up  the  UCM6108,  follow  the  steps  below:  

1.   Connect  one  end  of  an  RJ-­45  Ethernet  cable  into  the  LAN  port  of  the  UCM6108.  

2.   Connect  the  other  end  of  the  Ethernet  cable  into  the  uplink  port  of  an  Ethernet  switch/hub.  

3.   Connect  the  12V  DC  power  adapter  into  the  12V  DC  power  jack  on  the  back  of  the  UCM6108.  Insert   the  main  plug  of  the  power  adapter  into  a  surge-­protected  power  outlet.  

4.   Wait   for   the   UCM6108   to   boot   up.   The   LCD   in   the   front   will   show   the   device   hardware   information   when  the  boot  process  is  done.  

5.   Once  the  UCM6108  is  successfully  connected  to  network,  the  LED  indicator  for  NETWORK  in  the  front   will  be  in  solid  green  and  the  LCD  shows  up  the  IP  address.  

6.   (Optional)  Connect  PSTN  lines  from  the  wall  jack  to  the  FXO  ports;;  connect  analog  lines  (phone  and  

Fax)  to  the  FXS  ports.  

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  33  of  304    

 

 

 

 

Figure  6:  UCM6108  Front  View  

 

 

 

 

CONNECT  THE  UCM6116  

Figure  7:  UCM6108  Back  View  

 

 

 

Figure  8:  UCM6116  Front  View

 

 

 

Figure  9:  UCM6116  Back  View  

 

 

To  set  up  the  UCM6116,  follow  the  steps  below:  

1.   Connect  one  end  of  an  RJ-­45  Ethernet  cable  into  the  LAN  port  of  the  UCM6116.  

2.   Connect  the  other  end  of  the  Ethernet  cable  into  the  uplink  port  of  an  Ethernet  switch/hub.  

3.   Connect  the  12V  DC  power  adapter  into  the  12V  DC  power  jack  on  the  back  of  the  UCM6116.  Insert   the  main  plug  of  the  power  adapter  into  a  surge-­protected  power  outlet.  

4.   Wait   for   the   UCM6116   to   boot   up.   The   LCD   in   the   front   will   show   the   device   hardware   information   when  the  boot  process  is  done.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  34  of  304    

 

 

5.   Once  the  UCM6116  is  successfully  connected  to  network,  the  LED  indicator  for  NETWORK  in  the  front   will  be  in  solid  green  and  the  LCD  shows  up  the  IP  address.  

6.   (Optional)  Connect  PSTN  lines  from  the  wall  jack  to  the  FXO  ports;;  connect  analog  lines  (phone  and  

Fax)  to  the  FXS  ports.  

SAFETY  COMPLIANCES  

 

The  UCM6100  series  IP  PBX  complies  with  FCC/CE  and  various  safety  standards.  The  UCM6100  power   adapter  is  compliant  with  the  UL  standard.  Use  the  universal  power  adapter  provided  with  the  UCM6100  

  package  only.  The  manufacturer’s  warranty  does  not  cover  damages  to  the  device  caused  by  unsupported   power  adapters.  

WARRANTY

 

 

If   the   UCM6100   series   IP   PBX   was   purchased   from   a   reseller,   please   contact   the   company   where   the   device   was   purchased   for   replacement,   repair   or   refund.   If   the   device   was   purchased   directly   from  

Grandstream,   contact   our   Technical   Support   Team   for   a   RMA   (Return   Materials   Authorization)   number   before   the   product   is   returned.   Grandstream   reserves   the   right   to   remedy   warranty   policy   without   prior   notification.

 

 

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

  Warning:

   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Use  the  power  adapter  provided  with  the  UCM6100  series  IP  PBX.  Do  not  use  a  different  power  adapter  as   this  may  damage  the  device.  This  type  of  damage  is  not  covered  under  warranty.  

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  35  of  304    

 

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  36  of  304    

 

 

GETTING  STARTED  

 

The  UCM6100  series  provides  LCD  interface,  LED  indication  and  web  GUI  configuration  interface.  

 

•  

The  LCD  displays  hardware,  software  and  network  information.  Users  could  also  navigate  in  the  LCD   menu  for  device  information  and  basic  network  configuration.  

 

•  

The  LED  indication  at  the  front  of  the  device  provides  interface  connection  and  activity  status.  

•  

The  web  GUI  gives  users  access  to  all  the  configurations  and  options  for  UCM6100  series  setup.  

This  section  provides  step-­by-­step  instructions  on  how  to  use  the  LCD  menu,  LED  indicators  and  Web  GUI  

  of  the  UCM6100  series.  Once  the  basic  settings  are  done,  users  could  start  making  calls  from  UCM6100   extension  registered  on  a  SIP  phone  as  described  at  the  end  of  this  section.  

USE  THE  LCD  MENU  

 

•  

Default  LCD  Display  

When  the  device  is  powered  up,  the  LCD  will  show  device  model  (e.g.,  UCM6116),  hardware  version  

(e.g.,  V1.5A)  and  IP  address.  Press  "Down"  button  and  the  system  time  will  be  displayed  as  well.  

 

•  

Menu  Access  

Press  "OK"  button  to  start  browsing  menu  options.  Please  see  menu  options  in  [Table  3:  LCD  Menu  

•  

Menu  Navigation  

Press   the   "Down"   arrow   key   to   browser   different   menu   options.   Press   the   "OK"   button   to   select   an   entry.  

 

 

Options].  

•  

Exit  

If  "Back"  option  is  available  in  the  menu,  select  it  to  go  back  to  the  previous  menu.  For  "Device  Info"  

"Network  Info"  and  "Web  Info"  which  do  not  have  "Back"  option,  simply  press  the  "OK"  button  to  go   back  to  the  previous  menu.  Also,  the  LCD  will  display  default  idle  screen  after  staying  in  menu  option  

  for  15  seconds.  

•  

LCD  Backlight    

The  LCD  backlight  will  be  on  upon  key  pressing.  The  backlight  will  go  off  after  the  LCD  stays  in  idle  for  

 

 

30  seconds.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  37  of  304    

 

View  Events  

Device  Info  

Network  Info  

Network  Menu  

Factory  Menu  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Table  3:  LCD  Menu  Options  

•  

Critical  Events  

•  

Other  Events  

•  

Hardware:  Hardware  version  number  

•  

Software:  Software  version  number  

•  

P/N:  Part  number  

•  

WAN  MAC:  WAN  side  MAC  address  (UCM6102  only)  

•  

LAN  MAC:  LAN  side  MAC  address  

•  

Uptime:  System  up  time  

For  UCM6104/UCM6108/UCM6116:  

•  

LAN  Mode:  DHCP,  Static  IP,  or  PPPoE  

•  

LAN  IP:  IP  address  

•  

LAN  Subnet  Mask  

For  UCM6102:  

•  

WAN  Mode:  DHCP,  Static  IP,  or  PPPoE  

•  

WAN  IP:  IP  address  

•  

WAN  Subnet  Mask  

•  

LAN  IP:  IP  address  

•  

LAN  Subnet  Mask  

For  UCM6104/UCM6108/UCM6116:  

•  

LAN  Mode:  Select  LAN  mode  as  DHCP,  Static  IP  or  PPPoE  

•  

Static  Route  Reset:  Click  to  reset  the  static  route  setting  

For  UCM6102:  

•  

WAN  Mode:  Select  WAN  mode  as  DHCP,  Static  IP  or  PPPoE  

•  

Static  Route  Reset:  Click  to  reset  the  static  route  setting  

•  

Reboot  

•  

Factory  Reset  

•  

LCD  Test  Patterns  

Press   "OK"   to   start.   Then   press   "Down"   button   to   test   different   LCD   patterns.  When  done,  press  "OK"  button  to  exit.  

•  

Fan  Mode  

Select  "Auto"  or  "On".  

•  

LED  Test  Patterns  

 

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  38  of  304    

 

Web  Info  

SSH  Switch  

Select  "All  On"  "All  Off"  or  "Blinking"  and  check  LED  status.  

•  

RTC  Test  Patterns  

Select   "2022-­02-­22   22:22"   or   "2011-­01-­11   11:11"   to   start   the   RTC  

(Real-­Time  Clock)  test  pattern.  Then  check  the  system  time  from  LCD  idle   screen   by   pressing   "DOWN"   button,   or   from   web   GUI-­>System  

Status-­>General  page.  Reboot  the  device  manually  after  the  RTC  test  is   done.  

•  

Hardware  Testing  

Select   "Test   SVIP"   to   perform   SVIP   test   on   the   device.   This   is   mainly   for   factory   testing   purpose   which   verifies   the   hardware   connection   inside   the   device.  The  diagnostic  result  will  display  in  the  LCD  after  the  test  is  done.  

•  

Protocol:  Web  access  protocol.  HTTP  or  HTTPS.  By  default  it's  HTTPS  

•  

Port:  Web  access  port  number.  By  default  it's  8089  

•  

Enable  SSH:  Enable  SSH  access.  

•  

Disable  SSH:  Disable  SSH  access.  

By  default  the  SSH  access  is  disabled.  

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

USE  THE  LED  INDICATORS  

 

The  UCM6100  has  LED  indicators  in  the  front  to  display  connection  status.  The  following  table  shows  the  

  status  definitions.  

Table  4:  UCM6102/UCM6104  LED  INDICATORS  

LED  Indicator  

LAN  

WAN  

USB  

SD  

FXS  (Phone/Fax)  

FXO  (Telco  Line)  

 

LED  Status  

                  Solid:  Connected  

                  Flashing:  Data  Transferring  

                  OFF:  Not  Connected  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  39  of  304    

 

LED  

 

NETWORK  

Table  5:  UCM6108/UCM6116  LED  INDICATORS  

 

LED  Status  

                  Solid:  Connected  

                  OFF:  Not  Connected  

ACT  

USB  

SD  

Phone  (FXS)  

Line  (FXO)  

 

                  Solid:  Connected  

                  Flashing:  Data  Transferring  

                  OFF:  Not  Connected  

 

USE  THE  WEB  GUI  

ACCESS  WEB  GUI  

 

The  UCM6100  embedded  Web  server  responds  to  HTTP/HTTPS  GET/POST  requests.  Embedded  HTML   pages  allow  users  to  configure  the  device  through  a  Web  browser  such  as  Microsoft  IE,  Mozilla  Firefox,  

Google  Chrome  and  etc.  

 

 

 

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  10:  UCM6116  Web  GUI  Login  Page  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  40  of  304    

 

 

 

To  access  the  Web  GUI:  

1.   Connect  the  computer  to  the  same  network  as  the  UCM6100.  

2.   Ensure  the  device  is  properly  powered  up  and  shows  its  IP  address  on  the  LCD.  

3.   Open  a  Web  browser  on  the  computer  and  enter  the  web  GUI  URL  in  the  following  format:  

http(s)://IP-­Address:Port     where  the  IP-­Address  is  the  IP  address  displayed  on  the  UCM6100  LCD.  

By  default,  the  protocol  is  HTTPS  and  the  Port  number  is  8089.  

For  example,  if  the  LCD  shows  192.168.40.167,  please  enter  the  following  in  your  web  browser:  

https://192.168.40.167:8089  

4.   Enter   the   administrator’s   login   and   password   to   access   the   Web   Configuration   Menu.   The   default   administrator's  username  and  password  is  "admin"  and  "admin".  It  is  highly  recommended  to  change   the  default  password  after  login  for  the  first  time.  

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

Note:  

By  default,  the  UCM6100  has  "Redirect  From  Port  80"  enabled.  Therefore,  if  users  type  in  the  UCM6100  IP   address  in  the  web  browser,  the  web  page  will  be  automatically  redirected  to  the  page  using  HTTPS  and   port   8089.   For   example,   if   the   LCD   shows   192.168.40.167,   please   enter   192.168.40.167   in   your   web  

  browser  and  the  web  page  will  be  redirected  to:  

  https://192.168.40.167:8089  

The  option  "Redirect  From  Port  80"  can  be  configured  under  the  UCM6100  web  GUI-­>Settings-­>HTTP  

 

 

Server.  

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

WEB  GUI  CONFIGURATIONS  

 

There  are  four  main  sections  in  the  Web  GUI  for  users  to  view  the  PBX  status,  configure  and  manage  the  

PBX.  

 

•  

Status:  Displays  PBX  status,  System  Status,  System  Events  and  CDR.  

•  

PBX:   To   configure   extensions,   trunks,   call   routes,   zero   config   for   auto   provisioning,   call   features,   internal  options,  IAX  settings  and  SIP  settings.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  41  of  304    

 

 

•  

Settings:   To   configure   user   management,   network   settings,   firewall   settings,   change   password,  

LDAP  Server,  HTTP  Server,  Email  Settings,  Time  Settings,  NTP  server,  recording  storage  and  login   timeout.  

•  

Maintenance:   To   perform   firmware   upgrade,   backup   configurations,   cleaner   setup,   reset/reboot,   syslog  setup  and  troubleshooting.  

 

WEB  GUI  LANGUAGES  

 

Currently   the   UCM6100   series   web   GUI   supports   English,   Simplified   Chinese,   Traditional   Chinese,  

 

Spanish,  French,  Portuguese,  Russian,  Italian,  Polish,  German  and  etc.  

 

Users  can  select  the  displayed  language  in  web  GUI  login  page,  or  at  the  upper  right  of  the  web  GUI  after   logging  in.  

   

Figure  11:  UCM6100  Web  GUI  Language

 

 

 

SAVE  AND  APPLY  CHANGES  

 

Click  on  "Save"  button  after  configuring  the  web  GUI  options  in  one  page.  After  saving  all  the  changes,  

 

 

  make  sure  click  on  "Apply  Changes"  button  on  the  upper  right  of  the  web  page  to  submit  all  the  changes.  If   the  change  requires  reboot  to  take  effect,  a  prompted  message  will  pop  up  for  you  to  reboot  the  device.

 

 

MAKE  YOUR  FIRST  CALL  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  42  of  304    

 

Power  up  the  UCM6100  and  your  SIP  end  point  phone.  Connect  both  devices  to  the  network.  Then  follow   the  steps  below  to  make  your  first  call.  

 

1.   Log  in  the  UCM6100  web  GUI,  go  to  PBX-­>Basic/Call  Routes-­>Extensions.  

2.   Click  on  "Create  New  SIP  Extension"  to  create  a  new  extension.  You  will  need  User  ID,  Password  and  

Voicemail  Password  information  to  register  and  use  the  extension  later.  

3.   Register  the  extension  on  your  phone  with  the  SIP  User  ID,  SIP  server  and  SIP  Password  information.  

The  SIP  server  address  is  the  UCM6100  IP  address.  

4.   When   your   phone   is   registered   with   the   extension,   dial   *97   to   access   the   voicemail   box.   Enter   the  

Voicemail  Password  once  you  hear  "Password"  voice  prompt.  

5.   Once  successfully  logged  in  to  the  voicemail,  you  will  be  prompted  with  the  Voice  Mail  Main  menu.  

6.   You  are  successfully  connected  to  the  PBX  system  now.  

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  43  of  304    

 

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  44  of  304    

 

SYSTEM  SETTINGS  

 

This  section  explains  configurations  for  system-­wide  parameters  on  the  UCM6100.  System  settings  are   under  “Settings”  tag  on  UCM6100  web  GUI.  System  settings  include  User  Management,  Network  Settings,  

Firewall,   Change   Password,   LDAP   server,   HTTP   server,   Email   settings,   Time   Settings,   NTP   Server,  

 

Recordings  Storage  and  Login  Timeout  settings.  

USER  MANAGEMENT  

 

User   management   is   on   web   GUI-­>Settings-­>User   Management   page.   User   could   create   multiple   accounts   for   different   administrators   to   log   in   the   UCM6100   web   GUI.   Additionally   the   system   will   automatically  create  user  accounts  along  with  creating  new  extensions  for  extension  users  to  login  to  the   web   UI   using   their   extension   number   and   password.   All   existing   user   accounts   for   web   UI   login   will   be  

  displayed  on  User  Management  page  as  shown  in  the  following  figure.  

 

 

Figure  12:  User  Management  Page  Display

 

 

USER  PRIVILEGES  

 

 

Three  privilege  levels  are  supported:  

•  

Super  Admin  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  45  of  304    

 

-­   This  is  the  highest  privilege.  Super  Admin  can  access  all  pages  on  UCM6100  web  GUI,  change   configuration  for  all  options  and  execute  all  the  operations.  

-­   Super  Admin  can  create,  edit  and  delete  one  or  more  users  with  “Admin”  privilege  

-­   Super  Admin  can  edit  and  delete  one  or  more  users  with  “Consumer”  privilege  

-­   Super  Admin  can  view  operation  logs  generated  by  all  users.  

-­   By  default,  the  user  account  “admin”  is  configured  with  “Super  Admin”  privilege  and  it’s  the  only   user   with   “Super   Admin”   privilege.   The   User   Name   and   Privilege   level   cannot   be   changed   or   deleted.  

-­   Super   Admin   could   change   its   own   login   password   on   web   UI-­>Settings-­>Change   Password   page.  

-­   Super   Admin   could   view   operations   done   by   all   the   users   in   web   UI-­>Settings-­>User  

Management-­>Operation  Log.  

 

•  

Admin  

 

-­   Users  with  “Admin”  privilege  can  only  be  created  by  “Super  Admin”  user.  

-­   “Admin”  privilege  users  are  not  allowed  to  access  the  following  pages:  

Maintenance-­>Upgrade  

Maintenance-­>Backup  

 

Maintenance-­>Cleaner  

Maintenance-­>Reset/Reboot  

Settings-­>User  Management-­>Operation  Log  

-­   “Admin”  privilege  users  cannot  create  new  users  for  login.    

 

 

•  

Consumer  

-­   A  user  account  for  web  UI  login  is  created  automatically  by  the  system  when  a  new  extension  is   created.  

-­   The   user   could   log   in   the   web   UI   with   the   extension   number   and   password   to   access   user   information,  extension  configuration  and  CDR  of  that  extension.  

 

CREATE  NEW  WEB  UI  USER  

When  logged  in  as  Super  Admin,  click  on     to  create  a  new  account  for  web  UI  user.  The   following  dialog  will  prompt.  Configure  the  parameters  as  shown  in  below  table.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  46  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  13:  Create  New  User

 

 

User  Name  

User  Password  

Table  6:  User  Management  -­  Create  New  User  

Configure  a  username  to  identify  the  user  which  will  be  required  in  web  UI  login.  

Letters,  digits  and  underscore  are  allowed  in  the  user  name.  

Configure  a  password  for  this  user  which  will  be  required  in  web  UI  login.  Letters,   digits  and  underscore  are  allowed.  

This   is   the   role   of   the   web   UI   user.   Currently   only   “Admin”   is   supported   when  

Super  Admin  creates  a  new  user.  

Privilege  

Department  

Fax  

Email  Address  

First  Name  

Last  Name  

Home  Number  

Phone  Number  

 

 

Enter  the  necessary  information  to  keep  a  record  for  this  user.  

Once  created,  the  Super  Admin  can  edit  the  users  by  clicking  on     or  delete  the  user  by  clicking  on   .  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  14:  User  Management  –  New  Users  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  47  of  304    

 

USER  PORTAL  

 

The   user   could   log   in   web   UI   user   portal   using   the   extension   number   and   password.   When   there   is   an   extension   created   in   the   UCM6100,   the   corresponding   user   account   for   the   extension   is   automatically   created.  The  user  portal  allows  limited  access  including  user  information,  extension  configuration  and  CDR   information  of  the  extension.  The  login  username  is  the  extension  number  and  the  password  is  configured  

  by  Super  Admin.  The  following  figure  shows  the  dialog  of  editing  the  account  information  by  Super  Admin.  

The  User  Name  must  be  the  extension  number  and  it’s  not  configurable.  

 

Figure  15:  Edit  User  Information  by  Super  Admin  

 

 

The  following  figure  shows  an  example  of  login  page  using  extension  number  1000  as  the  username.  

 

 

Figure  16:  User  Portal  Login  

 

After  login,  the  web  UI  displays  is  shown  as  below.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  48  of  304    

 

 

Figure  17:  User  Portal  Layout  

 

 

For   the   configuration   parameter   information   in   each   page,   please   refer   to  

[Table   6:   User   Management   -­  

Create  New  User]

 for  options  in  User  Portal-­>Basic  Information-­>User  Information  page;;  please  refer  to  

[EXTENSIONS]

 for  options  in  User  Portal-­>Basic  Information-­>Extension  page;;  please  refer  to  

[CDR]

 for  

User  Portal-­>Basic  Information-­>CDR  page.  

 

CONCURRENT  MULTI-­‐‑USER  LOGIN  

 

When  there  are  multiple  web  UI  users  created,  concurrent  multi-­user  login  is  supported  on  the  UCM6100.  

Multiple  users  could  edit  options  and  have  configurations  take  effect  simultaneously.  However,  if  different   users   are   editing   the   same   option   or   making   the   same   operation   (by   clicking   on   “Apply   Changes”),   a   prompt  will  pop  up  as  shown  in  the  following  figure.  

Figure  18:  Multiple  User  Operation  Error  Prompt

 

 

 

OPERATION  LOG  

 

Super   Admin   has   the   authority   to   view   operation   logs   on   UCM6100   web   GUI-­>Settings-­>User  

Management-­>Operation   Log   page.   Operation   logs   list   operations   done   by   all   the   web   UI   users,   for   example,  web  UI  login,  creating  trunk,  creating  outbound  rule  and  etc.  There  are  6  columns  to  record  the  

  operation  details  “Date”,  “User  Name”,  “IP  Address”,  “Results”,  “Page  Operation”  and  “Specific  Operation”.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  49  of  304    

 

 

Figure  19:  Operation  Logs

 

 

The  operation  log  can  be  sorted  and  filtered  for  easy  access.  Click  on  the  header  of  each  column  to  sort.  

 

For  example,  clicking  on  "Date"  will  sort  the  logs  according  to  operation  date  and  time.  Clicking  on  "Date"   again  will  reverse  the  order.  

Table  7:  Operation  Log  Column  Header  

 

Date  

User  Name  

IP  Address  

Results  

Page  Operation  

The  date  and  time  when  the  operation  is  executed.  

The  username  of  the  user  who  performed  the  operation.  

The  IP  address  from  which  the  operation  is  made.  

The  result  of  the  operation.  

The  page  where  the  operation  is  made.  For  example,  login,  logout,  delete  user,   create  trunk  and  etc.  

Specific  Operation  

Click  on     to  view  the  options  and  values  configured  by  this  operation.  

 

 

User  could  also  filter  the  operation  logs  by  time  condition,  IP  address  and/or  username.  Configure  these   conditions  and  then  click  on   .  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  50  of  304    

 

 

Figure  20:  Operation  Logs  Filter  

 

 

The   above   figure   shows   an   example   that   operations   made   by   user   “support”   on   device   with   IP  

192.168.40.173  from  2014-­11-­01  00:00  to  2014-­11-­06  15:38  are  filtered  out  and  displayed.  

 

To  delete  operation  logs,  users  can  perform  filtering  first  and  then  click  on     to   delete   the   filtered   result   of   operation   logs.   Or   users   can   click   on  

  operation  logs  at  once.  

  to   delete   all  

CHANGE  BINDNG  EMAIL  

 

UCM6100  allows  user  to  configure  binding  email  in  case  login  password  is  lost.  UCM6100  login  credential  

  will   be   sent   to   the   designated   email   address.   The   feature   can   be   found   under   web   UI-­>Settings-­>User  

Management-­>Change  Binding  Email.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  21:  Change  Binding  Email    

Table  8:  Change  Binding  Email  option  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  51  of  304    

 

 

Enter  the  password  of   the  account  

Enter  the  current  login  user  credential  for  UCM6100  

Email  Address  

 

 

Email  Address  is  used  to  retrieve  password  when  password  is  lost  

NETWORK  SETTINGS  

 

After  successfully  connecting  the  UCM6100  to  the  network  for  the  first  time,  users  could  login  the  Web  GUI  

  and  go  to  Settings-­>Network  Settings  to  configure  the  network  parameters  for  the  device.  

 

The   network   setting   options   are   similar   for   UCM6108   and   UCM6116.   Additional   network   functions   and   settings  are  available  for  UCM6102  and  UCM6104:  

 

•  

UCM6102  supports  Route/Switch/Dual  mode  functions.  

•  

UCM6104  supports  Switch/Dual  mode  functions.  

In  this  section,  all  the  available  network  setting  options  are  listed  for  each  model.  Select  each  tab  in  web  

GUI-­>Settings-­>Network   Settings   page   to   configure   LAN   settings,   WAN   settings   (UCM6102   only),  

 

802.1X  and  Port  Forwarding  (UCM6102  only).  

BASIC  SETTINGS  

 

 

Please  refer  to  the  following  tables  for  basic  network  configuration  parameters  on  UCM6102,  UCM6104,   and  UCM6108/UCM6116  respectively.  

Table  9:  UCM6102  Network  Settings-­>Basic  Settings  

Method  

Select   "Route",   "Switch"   or   "Dual"   mode   on   the   network   interface   of   UCM6102.  

The  default  setting  is  "Route".  

•  

Route  

WAN  port  interface  will  be  used  for  uplink  connection.  LAN  port  interface  will   be  used  to  serve  as  router.  

•  

Switch  

WAN  port  interface  will  be  used  for  uplink  connection.  LAN  port  interface  will   be  used  as  bridge  for  PC  connection.  

•  

Dual  

Both  ports  can  be  used  for  uplink  connection.  Users  will  need  assign  LAN  1  or  

LAN   2   as   the   default   interface   in   option   "Default   Interface"   and   configure  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  52  of  304    

 

 

Preferred  DNS  Server  

"Gateway  IP"  for  this  interface.  

Enter  the  preferred  DNS  server  address.  If  Preferred  DNS  is  used,  UCM  will  try  to   use  it  as  Primary  DNS  server.  

WAN  (when  "Method"  is  set  to  "Route")

 

IP  Method  

IP  Address  

Subnet  Mask  

Gateway  IP  

DNS  Server  1  

DNS  Server  2  

User  Name  

Select  DHCP,  Static  IP,  or  PPPoE.  The  default  setting  is  DHCP.  

Enter  the  IP  address  for  static  IP  settings.  The  default  setting  is  192.168.0.160.  

Enter   the   subnet   mask   address   for   static   IP   settings.   The   default   setting   is  

255.255.0.0.  

Enter  the  gateway  IP  address  for  static  IP  settings.  The  default  setting  is  0.0.0.0.  

Enter   the   DNS   server   1   address   for   static   IP   settings.   The   default   setting   is  

0.0.0.0.  

Enter  the  DNS  server  2  address  for  static  IP  settings.  

Enter  the  user  name  to  connect  via  PPPoE.  

Password  

Layer  2  QoS  

802.1Q/VLAN  Tag  

Layer  2  QoS  802.1p  

Priority  Value  

Enter  the  password  to  connect  via  PPPoE.  

Assign  the  VLAN  tag  of  the  layer  2  QoS  packets  for  WAN  port.  The  default  value   is  0.  

Assign   the   priority   value   of   the   layer   2   QoS   packets   for   WAN   port.   The   default   value  is  0.  

LAN  (when  Method  is  set  to  "Route")

 

IP  Address   Enter  the  IP  address  assigned  to  LAN  port.  The  default  setting  is  192.168.2.1.  

Subnet  Mask   Enter  the  subnet  mask.  The  default  setting  is  255.255.255.0.  

DHCP  Server  Enable   Enable  or  disable  DHCP  server  capability.  The  default  setting  is  "Yes".  

DNS  Server  1  

DNS  Server  2  

Enter  DNS  server  address  1.  The  default  setting  is  8.8.8.8.  

Enter  DNS  server  address  2.  The  default  setting  is  208.67.222.222.  

Allow  IP  Address  From   Enter  the  DHCP  IP  Pool  starting  address.  The  default  setting  is  192.168.2.100.  

Allow  IP  Address  To   Enter  the  DHCP  IP  Pool  ending  address.  The  default  setting  is  192.168.2.254.  

Default  IP  Lease  Time   Enter  the  IP  lease  time  (in  seconds).  The  default  setting  is  43200.  

LAN  (when  Method  is  set  to  "Switch")

 

IP  Method   Select  DHCP,  Static  IP,  or  PPPoE.  The  default  setting  is  DHCP.  

IP  Address  

Subnet  Mask  

Gateway  IP  

Enter  the  IP  address  for  static  IP  settings.  The  default  setting  is  192.168.0.160.  

Enter   the   subnet   mask   address   for   static   IP   settings.   The   default   setting   is  

255.255.0.0.  

Enter  the  gateway  IP  address  for  static  IP  settings.  The  default  setting  is  0.0.0.0.  

DNS  Server  1  

DNS  Server  2  

Enter   the   DNS   server   1   address   for   static   IP   settings.   The   default   setting   is  

0.0.0.0.  

Enter  the  DNS  server  2  address  for  static  IP  settings.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  53  of  304    

 

 

User  Name  

Password  

Layer  2  QoS  

802.1Q/VLAN  Tag  

Layer  2  QoS  802.1p  

Priority  Value  

Assign   the   priority   value   of   the   layer   2   QoS   packets   for   LAN   port.   The   default   value  is  0.  

LAN  1  /  LAN  2  (when  Method  is  set  to  "Dual")

 

Default  Interface  

If  "Dual"  is  selected  as  "Method",  users  will  need  assign  the  default  interface  to  be  

LAN   1   (mapped   to   UCM6102   WAN   port)   or   LAN   2   (mapped   to   UCM6102   LAN   port)  and  then  configure  network  settings  for  LAN  1/LAN  2.  The  default  interface  is  

LAN  2.  

IP  Method  

IP  Address  

Enter  the  user  name  to  connect  via  PPPoE.  

Enter  the  password  to  connect  via  PPPoE.  

Assign  the  VLAN  tag  of  the  layer  2  QoS  packets  for  LAN  port.  The  default  value  is  

0.  

Subnet  Mask  

Gateway  IP  

DNS  Server  1  

DNS  Server  2  

User  Name  

Password  

Layer  2  QoS  

802.1Q/VLAN  Tag  

Select  DHCP,  Static  IP,  or  PPPoE.  The  default  setting  is  DHCP.  

Enter  the  IP  address  for  static  IP  settings.  The  default  setting  is  192.168.0.160.  

Enter   the   subnet   mask   address   for   static   IP   settings.   The   default   setting   is  

255.255.0.0.  

Enter  the  gateway  IP  address  for  static  IP  settings  when  the  port  is  assigned  as   default  interface.  The  default  setting  is  0.0.0.0.  

Enter   the   DNS   server   1   address   for   static   IP   settings.   The   default   setting   is  

0.0.0.0.  

Enter  the  DNS  server  2  address  for  static  IP  settings.  

Enter  the  user  name  to  connect  via  PPPoE.  

Enter  the  password  to  connect  via  PPPoE.  

Assign  the  VLAN  tag  of  the  layer  2  QoS  packets  for  LAN  port.  The  default  value  is  

0.  

Layer  2  QoS  802.1p  

Priority  Value  

Assign   the   priority   value   of   the   layer   2   QoS   packets   for   LAN   port.   The   default   value  is  0.  

Method  

 

Table  10:  UCM6104  Network  Settings-­>Basic  Settings  

Select  "Switch"  or  "Dual"  mode  on  the  network  interface  of  UCM6104.  The  default   setting  is  "Switch".  

•  

Switch  

LAN  1  port  interface  will  be  used  for  uplink  connection.  LAN  2  port  interface   will  be  used  as  bridge  for  PC  connection.  

•  

Dual  

Both   ports   can   be   used   for   uplink   connection.   Users   will   need   assign   the   default  interface  in  option  "Default  Interface".  Users  will  need  assign  LAN  1  or  

LAN   2   as   the   default   interface   in   option   "Default   Interface"   and   configure  

"Gateway  IP"  for  this  interface.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  54  of  304    

 

 

Preferred  DNS  Server  

Enter  the  preferred  DNS  server  address.  If  Preferred  DNS  is  used,  UCM  will  try  to   use  it  as  Primary  DNS  server.  

LAN  (when  Method  is  set  to  "Switch")

 

IP  Method   Select  DHCP,  Static  IP,  or  PPPoE.  The  default  setting  is  DHCP.  

IP  Address  

Subnet  Mask  

Gateway  IP  

DNS  Server  1  

DNS  Server  2  

User  Name  

Password  

Enter  the  IP  address  for  static  IP  settings.  The  default  setting  is  192.168.0.160.  

Enter   the   subnet   mask   address   for   static   IP   settings.   The   default   setting   is  

255.255.0.0.  

Enter  the  gateway  IP  address  for  static  IP  settings.  The  default  setting  is  0.0.0.0.  

Enter   the   DNS   server   1   address   for   static   IP   settings.   The   default   setting   is  

0.0.0.0.  

Enter  the  DNS  server  2  address  for  static  IP  settings.  

Enter  the  user  name  to  connect  via  PPPoE.  

Enter  the  password  to  connect  via  PPPoE.  

Layer  2  QoS  

802.1Q/VLAN  Tag  

Layer  2  QoS  802.1p  

Priority  Value  

Assign  the  VLAN  tag  of  the  layer  2  QoS  packets  for  LAN  port.  The  default  value  is  

0.  

Assign   the   priority   value   of   the   layer   2   QoS   packets   for   LAN   port.   The   default   value  is  0.  

LAN  1  /  LAN  2  (when  Method  is  set  to  "Dual")

 

Default  Interface  

IP  Method  

IP  Address  

Subnet  Mask  

Gateway  IP  

DNS  Server  1  

DNS  Server  2  

User  Name  

Password  

Layer  2  QoS  

802.1Q/VLAN  Tag  

Layer  2  QoS  802.1p  

Priority  Value  

If  "Dual"  is  selected  as  "Method",  users  will  need  assign  the  default  interface  to  be  

LAN  1  or  LAN  2.  The  default  interface  is  LAN  2.  

Select  DHCP,  Static  IP,  or  PPPoE.  The  default  setting  is  DHCP.  

Enter  the  IP  address  for  static  IP  settings.  The  default  setting  is  192.168.0.160.  

Enter   the   subnet   mask   address   for   static   IP   settings.   The   default   setting   is  

255.255.0.0.  

Enter  the  gateway  IP  address  for  static  IP  settings.  The  default  setting  is  0.0.0.0.  

Enter   the   DNS   server   1   address   for   static   IP   settings.   The   default   setting   is  

0.0.0.0.  

Enter  the  DNS  server  2  address  for  static  IP  settings.  

Enter  the  user  name  to  connect  via  PPPoE.  

Enter  the  password  to  connect  via  PPPoE.  

Assign  the  VLAN  tag  of  the  layer  2  QoS  packets  for  LAN  port.  The  default  value  is  

0.  

Assign   the   priority   value   of   the   layer   2   QoS   packets   for   LAN   port.   The   default   value  is  0.  

 

Table  11:  UCM6108/UCM6116  Network  Settings-­>Basic  Settings  

Preferred  DNS  Server   Enter  the  preferred  DNS  server  address.  If  Preferred  DNS  is  used,  UCM  will  try  to  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  55  of  304    

 

 

IP  Method  

IP  Address  

Subnet  Mask  

Gateway  IP  

DNS  Server  1  

DNS  Server  2  

User  Name  

Password  

Layer  2  QoS  

802.1Q/VLAN  Tag   use  it  as  Primary  DNS  server.  

Select  DHCP,  Static  IP,  or  PPPoE.  The  default  setting  is  DHCP.  

Enter  the  IP  address  for  static  IP  settings.  

Enter  the  subnet  mask  address  for  static  IP  settings.  

Enter  the  gateway  IP  address  for  static  IP  settings.  

Enter  the  DNS  server  1  address  for  static  IP  settings.  

Enter  the  DNS  server  2  address  for  static  IP  settings.  

Enter  the  user  name  to  connect  via  PPPoE.  

Enter  the  password  to  connect  via  PPPoE.  

Assign  the  VLAN  tag  of  the  layer  2  QoS  packets  for  LAN  port.  The  default  value  is  

0.  

Layer  2  QoS  802.1p  

Priority  Value  

Assign   the   priority   value   of   the   layer   2   QoS   packets   for   LAN   port.   The   default   value  is  0.  

 

 

•  

Method:  Route  

 

 

When   the   UCM6102   has   method   set   to   Route   in   network   settings,   WAN   port   interface   is   used   for   uplink  connection  and  LAN  port  interface  is  used  as  a  router.  Please  see  a  sample  diagram  below.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  56  of  304    

 

 

Figure  22:  UCM6102  Network  Interface  Method:  Route  

 

 

•  

Method:  Switch  

 

For  UCM6102,  WAN  port  interface  is  used  for  uplink  connection;;  LAN  port  interface  is  used  as  bridge   for  PC  connection.  For  UCM6104,  LAN  1  port  interface  is  used  for  connection;;  LAN  2  port  interface  is   used  as  bridge  for  PC  connection.  

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  57  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  23:  UCM6102  Network  Interface  Method:  Switch  

 

 

 

 

•  

Method:  Dual  

 

For  UCM6102,  both  WAN  port  and  LAN  port  are  used  for  uplink  connection.  For  UCM6104,  WAN  port   will  be  mapped  to  LAN  1  interface;;  LAN  port  will  be  mapped  to  LAN  2  interface.  Users  will  need  assign  

LAN   1   or   LAN   2   as   the   default   interface   in   option   "Default   Interface"   and   configure   "Gateway   IP"   if   static  IP  is  used  for  this  interface.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  58  of  304    

 

 

Figure  24:  UCM6102  Network  Interface  Method:  Dual  

 

802.1X  

 

IEEE   802.1X   is   an   IEEE   standard   for   port-­based   network   access   control.   It   provides   an   authentication   mechanism   to   device   before   the   device   is   allowed   to   access   Internet   or   other   LAN   resources.   The  

 

UCM6100  supports  802.1X  as  a  supplicant/client  to  be  authenticated.  The  following  diagram  and  figure   show  UCM6100  uses  802.1X  mode  “EAP-­MD5”  on  WAN  port  as  client  in  the  network  to  access  Internet.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  25:  UCM6100  Using  802.1X  as  Client  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  59  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  26:  UCM6100  Using  802.1X  EAP-­MD5  

 

The   following   table   shows   the   configuration   parameters   for   802.1X   on   UCM6100.   Identity   and   MD5   password  are  required  for  authentication,  which  should  be  provided  by  the  network  administrator  obtained  

  from  the  RADIUS  server.  If  “EAP-­TLS”  or  “EAP-­PEAPv0/MSCHAPv2”  is  used  as  the  802.1X  mode,  users   will  also  need  upload  802.1X  CA  Certificate  and  802.1X  Client  Certificate,  which  should  be  also  generated   from  the  RADIUS  server.  

Table  12:  UCM6100  Network  Settings-­>802.1X  

802.1X  Mode  

Identity  

MD5  Password  

802.1X  Certificate  

802.1X  Client  

Certificate  

 

Select   802.1X   mode.   The   default   setting   is   "Disable".   The   supported   802.1X   mode  are:  

•  

EAP-­MD5  

•  

EAP-­TLS  

•  

EAP-­PEAPv0/MSCHAPv2  

Enter  802.1X  mode  identity  information.  

Enter  802.1X  mode  MD5  password  information.  

Select  802.1X  certificate  from  local  PC  and  then  upload.  

Select  802.1X  client  certificate  from  local  PC  and  then  upload.  

STATIC  ROUTES  

 

The  UCM6100  provides  users  static  routing  capability  that  allows  the  device  to  use  manually  configured   routes,   rather   than   information   only   from   dynamic   routing   or   gateway   configured   in   the   UCM6100   web  

 

GUI-­>Network  Settings-­>Basic  Settings  to  forward  traffic.  It  can  be  used  to  define  a  route  when  no  other   routes  are  available  or  necessary,  or  used  in  complementary  with  existing  routing  on  the  UCM6100  as  a   failover  backup,  and  etc.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  60  of  304    

 

 

•  

Click  on   in  the  table  below.  

  to  create  a  new  static  route.  The  configuration  parameters  are  listed  

•  

Once  added,  users  can  select     to  edit  the  static  route.  

 

•  

Select     to  delete  the  static  route.  

Table  13:  UCM6100  Network  Settings-­>Static  Routes  

Destination  

 

Configure   the   destination   IP   address   or   the   destination   IP   subnet   for   the  

UCM6100  to  reach  using  the  static  route.  

Example:  

IP  address  -­  192.168.66.4  

IP  subnet  -­  192.168.66.0  

Netmask  

Configure   the   subnet   mask   for   the   above   destination   address.   If   left   blank,   the   default  value  is  255.255.255.255.  

 

Example:  

255.255.255.0  

Gateway  

Configure  the  gateway  address  so  that  the  UCM6100  can  reach  the  destination   via  this  gateway.  Gateway  address  is  optional.    

 

Example:  

192.168.40.5  

Interface  

Specify  the  network  interface  on  the  UCM6100  to  reach  the  destination  using  the  

  static  route.  

For  UCM6102,  LAN  interface  is  eth0;;  WAN  interface  is  eth1.  

For  UCM6104,  LAN1  interface  is  eth0;;  WAN  interface  is  eth1.  

For  UCM6108/UCM6116,  only  LAN  interface  is  available.  

 

 

 

Static  routes  configuration  can  be  reset  from  LCD  menu-­>Network  Menu.  

 

The  following  diagram  shows  a  sample  application  of  static  route  usage  on  UCM6104.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  61  of  304    

 

 

Figure  27:  UCM6104  Static  Route  Sample  

 

 

The  network  topology  of  the  above  diagram  is  as  below:  

•  

Network  192.168.69.0  has  IP  phones  registered  to  UCM6104  LAN  1  address  

•  

Network  192.168.40.0  has  IP  phones  registered  to  UCM6104  LAN  2  address  

•  

Network  192.168.66.0  has  IP  phones  registered  to  UCM6104  via  VPN  

•  

Network  192.168.40.0  has  VPN  connection  established  with  network  192.168.66.0  

 

In  this  network,  by  default  the  IP  phones  in  network  192.168.69.0  are  unable  to  call  IP  phones  in  network  

192.168.66.0   when   registered   on   different   interfaces   on   the  UCM6104.   Therefore,   we   need   configure   a   static  route  on  the  UCM6104  so  that  the  phones  in  isolated  networks  can  make  calls  between  each  other.  

 

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  28:  UCM6104  Static  Route  Configuration  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  62  of  304    

 

PORT  FORWORDING  (UCM6102  ONLY)  

 

The  UCM  network  interface  supports  router  function  which  provides  users  the  ability  to  do  port  forwarding.  

If   the   UCM6102   LAN   mode   is   set   to   "Route"   under   web   GUI-­>Settings-­>Network   Settings-­>Basic  

 

Settings  page,  port  forwarding  is  available  for  configuration.  

 

The   port   forwarding   configuration   is   under   web   GUI-­>Settings-­>Network   Settings-­>Port   Forwarding   page.  Please  see  related  settings  in  the  table  below.  

Table  14:  UCM6102  Network  Settings-­>Port  Forwarding  

WAN  Port  

Specify   the   WAN   port   number   or   a   range   of   WAN   ports.   Up   to   8   ports   can   be  

  configured.  

Note:  

When   it   is   set   to   a   range,   WAN   port   and   LAN   port   must   be   configured   with   the   same  range,  such  as  WAN  port:  1000-­1005  and  LAN  port:  1000-­1005,  and  access   from  WAN  port  will  be  forwarded  to  the  LAN  port  with  the  same  port  number,  for   example,  WAN  port  1000  will  be  port  forwarding  to  LAN  port  1000.  

LAN  IP   Specify  the  LAN  IP  address.  

LAN  Port  

Specify  the  LAN  port  number  or  a  range  of  LAN  ports.  

 

Note:  

When   it   is   set   to   a   range,   WAN   port   and   LAN   port   must   be   configured   with   the   same  range,  such  as  WAN  port:  1000-­1005  and  LAN  port:  1000-­1005,  and  access   from  WAN  port  will  be  forwarded  to  the  LAN  port  with  the  same  port  number,  for   example,  WAN  port  1000  will  be  port  forwarding  to  LAN  port  1000.  

Protocol  Type  

Select  protocol  type  "UDP  Only",  "TCP  Only"  or  "TCP/UDP"  for  the  forwarding  in   the  selected  port.  The  default  setting  is  "UDP  Only".  

 

The  following  figures  demonstrate  a  port  forwarding  example  to  provide  phone’s  web  UI  access  to  public  

  side.  

•  

The  UCM6102  network  mode  is  set  to  “Route”  

•  

The   UCM6102   WAN   port   is   connected   to   uplink   switch,   with   a   public   IP   address   configured,   e.g.  

1.1.1.1.  

•  

The   UCM6102   LAN   port   provides   DHCP   pool   that   connects   to   multiple   phone   devices   in   the   LAN   network  192.168.2.x.  The  UCM6102  is  used  as  a  router,  with  gateway  address  192.168.2.1  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  63  of  304    

 

•  

There   is   a   GXP2160   connected   under   the   LAN   interface   network   of   the   UCM6102.   It   obtains   IP   address  192.168.2.100  from  UCM6102  DHCP  pool  

•  

On   the   UCM6102   web   UI-­>Settings-­>Network   Settings-­>Port   Forwarding,   configure   a   port   forwarding  entry  as  the  figure  shows  below.  

WAN  Port:  This  is  the  port  opened  up  on  the  WAN  side  for  access  purpose.  

LAN  IP:  This  is  the  GXP2160  IP  address,  under  the  LAN  interface  network  of  the  UCM6102.  

Protocol  Type:  We  select  TCP  here  for  web  UI  access  using  HTTP.  

 

 

Figure  29:  UCM6102  Port  Forwarding  Configuration  

 

This  will  allow  users  to  access  the  GXP2160  web  UI  from  public  side,  by  typing  in  address  “1.1.1.1:8088”.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  30:  GXP2160  Web  Access  Using  UCM6102  Port  Forwarding  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  64  of  304    

 

DDNS  SETTINGS  

 

DDNS  setting  allows  user  to  access  UCM6100  via  domain  name  instead  of  IP  address.    

The  UCM  supports  DDNS  service  from  the  following  DDNS  provider:  

 

•   dydns.org  

•   noip.com  

•   freedns.afraid.org  

•   zoneedit.com  

•   oray.net  

 

 

Here  is  an  example  of  using  noip.com  for  DDNS.  

1.   Register  domain  in  DDNS  service  provider.  Please  note  the  UCM6100  needs  to  have  public  IP  access.  

 

 

Figure  31:  Register  Domain  Name  on  noip.com  

 

2.   On   web   UI-­>Settings-­>Network   Settings-­>DDNS   Settings,   enable   DDNS   service   and   configure   username,  password  and  host  name.    

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  65  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  32:  UCM6100  DDNS  Setting  

 

3.   Now  you  can  use  domain  name  instead  of  IP  address  to  connect  to  the  UCM6100  web  UI.  

 

 

Figure  33:  Using  Domain  Name  to  Connect  to  UCM6100  

 

FIREWALL  

 

The  UCM6100  provides  users  firewall  configurations  to  prevent  certain  malicious  attack  to  the  UCM6100   system.  Users  could  configure  to  allow,  restrict  or  reject  specific  traffic  through  the  device  for  security  and  

  bandwidth   purpose.   The   UCM6100   also   provides   Fail2ban   feature   for   authentication   errors   in   SIP  

REGISTER,   INVITE   and   SUBSCRIBE.   To   configure   firewall   settings   in   the   UCM6100,   go   to   Web  

UI-­>Settings-­>Firewall  page.  

STATIC  DEFENSE  

 

 

Under  Web  GUI-­>Settings-­>Firewall-­>Static  Defense  page,  users  will  see  the  following  information:  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  66  of  304    

 

•  

Current  service  information  with  port,  process  and  type.  

•  

Typical  firewall  settings.  

 

•  

Custom  firewall  settings.  

The  following  table  shows  a  sample  current  service  status  running  on  the  UCM6100.  

 

Table  15:  UCM6100  Firewall-­>Static  Defense-­>Current  Service  

Port   Process   Type  

Protocol  or  Service  

7777  

389  

22  

80  

8089  

69  

9090  

Asterisk  

Slapd  

Dropbear  

Lighthttpd  

Lighthttpd  

Opentftpd  

Asterisk   tcp/IPv4   tcp/IPv4   tcp/IPv4   tcp/IPv4   tcp/IPv4   udp/IPv4   udp/IPv4  

SIP  

LDAP  

SSH  

HTTP  

HTTPS  

TFTP  

SIP  

6060  

5060  

4569  

5353   zero_config  

Asterisk  

Asterisk   zero_config   udp/IPv4   udp/IPv4   udp/IPv4   udp/IPv4  

UCM6100  zero_config  service  

SIP  

SIP  

UCM6100  zero_config  service  

37435   Syslogd   udp/IPv4   Syslog  

 

 

For  typical  firewall  settings,  users  could  configure  the  following  options  on  the  UCM6100.  

Table  16:  Typical  Firewall  Settings  

Ping  Defense  

Enable  

If   enabled,   ICMP   response   will   not   be   allowed   for   Ping   request.   The   default   setting  is  disabled.  To  enable  or  disable  it,  click  on  the  check  box  for  the  LAN  or  

WAN  (UCM6102  only)  interface.  

Ping-­of-­Death  

Defense  Enable  

Enable   to   prevent   Ping-­of-­Death   attack   to   the   device.   The   default   setting   is   disabled.  To  enable  or  disable  it,  click  on  the  check  box  for  the  LAN  or  WAN  

(UCM6102  only)  interface.  

 

Under   "Custom   Firewall   Settings",   users   could   create   new   rules   to   accept,   reject   or   drop   certain   traffic   going  through  the  UCM6100.  To  create  new  rule,  click  on  "Create  New  Rule"  button  and  a  new  window  will  

  pop  up  for  users  to  specify  rule  options.  

Right  next  to  "Create  New  Rule"  button,  there  is  a  checkbox  for  option  "Reject  Rules".  If  it’s  checked,  all   the  rules  will  be  rejected  except  the  firewall  rules  listed  below.  In  the  firewall  rules,  only  when  there  is  a  rule   that  meets  all  the  following  requirements,  the  option  "Reject  Rules"  will  be  allowed  to  check:  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  67  of  304    

 

 

•  

Action:  "Accept"  

•  

Type  "In"  

•  

Destination  port  is  set  to  the  system  login  port  (e.g.,  by  default  8089)  

 

•  

Protocol  is  not  UDP  

 

Rule  Name  

Action  

Type  

Service  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

 

Figure  34:  Create  New  Firewall  Rule  

Table  17:  Firewall  Rule  Settings  

Specify  the  Firewall  rule  name  to  identify  the  firewall  rule.  

Select  the  action  for  the  Firewall  to  perform.  

•  

ACCEPT  

•  

REJECT  

•  

DROP  

Select  the  traffic  type.  

•  

IN  

If  selected,  users  will  need  specify  the  network  interface  "LAN"  or  "WAN"  

(for  UCM6102  only)  for  the  incoming  traffic.  

•  

OUT  

Select  the  service  type.  

•  

FTP  

•  

SSH  

•  

Telnet  

•  

TFTP  

•  

HTTP  

•  

LDAP  

•  

Custom  

If   "Custom"   is   selected,   users   will   need   specify   Source   (IP   and   port),  

Destination  (IP  and  port)  and  Protocol  (TCP,  UDP  or  Both)  for  the  service.  

Please  note  if  the  source  or  the  destination  field  is  left  blank,  it  will  be  used   as  "Anywhere".  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  68  of  304    

 

Save   the   change   and   click   on   "Apply"   button.   Then   submit   the   configuration   by   clicking   on   "Apply  

Changes"  on  the  upper  right  of  the  web  page.  The  new  rule  will  be  listed  at  the  bottom  of  the  page  with   sequence  number,  rule  name,  action,  protocol,  type,  source,  destination  and  operation.  More  operations   below:  

•  

Click  on     to  edit  the  rule  

 

 

•  

Click  on     to  delete  the  rule  

DYNAMIC  DEFENSE  

 

Dynamic  defense  is  supported  on  the  UCM6100  series.  It  can  blacklist  hosts  dynamically  when  the  LAN   mode  is  set  to  "Route"  under  web  GUI-­>Settings-­>Network  Settings-­>Basic  Settings  page.  If  enabled,   the  traffic  coming  into  the  UCM6100  can  be  monitored,  which  helps  prevent  massive  connection  attempts   or  brute  force  attacks  to  the  device.  The  blacklist  can  be  created  and  updated  by  the  UCM6100  firewall,   which   will   then   be   displayed   in   the   web   page.   Please   refer   to   the   following   table   for   dynamic   defense  

  options  on  the  UCM6100.  

Table  18:  UCM6100  Firewall  Dynamic  Defense  

Dynamic  Defense  

Enable  

Enable  dynamic  defense.  The  default  setting  is  disabled.  

Periodical  Time  

Interval  

Blacklist  Update  

Interval  

Connection  

Threshold  

Configure   the   dynamic   defense   periodic   time   interval   (in   minutes).   If   the   number   of   TCP   connections   from   a   host   exceeds   the   connection   threshold   within   this   period,   this   host   will   be   added   into   Blacklist.   The   valid   value   is   between  1  and  59  when  dynamic  defense  is  turned  on.  The  default  setting  is  

59.  

Configure  the  blacklist  update  time  interval  (in  seconds).  The  default  setting  is  

120.  

Configure  the  connection  threshold.  Once  the  number  of  connections  from  the   same  host  reaches  the  threshold,  it  will  be  added  into  the  blacklist.  The  default   setting  is  100.  

Dynamic  Defense  

Whitelist  

 

Configure  the  dynamic  defense  whitelist.  

For  example,  

192.168.1.3  

192.168.1.4  

 

 

The  following  figure  shows  a  configuration  example  like  this:  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  69  of  304    

 

•  

If  a  host  at  IP  address  192.168.40.7  initiates  more  than  20  TCP  connections  to  the  UCM6100  within  1   minute,  it  will  be  added  into  UCM6100  blacklist.  

 

•  

This  host  192.168.40.7  will  be  blocked  by  the  UCM6100  for  300  seconds.  

•  

Since  IP  address  192.168.40.5  is  in  whitelist,  if  the  host  at  IP  address  192.168.40.5  initiates  more  than  

20  TCP  connections  to  the  UCM6100  within  1  minute,  it  will  not  be  added  into  UCM6100  blacklist.  It   can  still  establish  TCP  connection  with  the  UCM6100.  

 

 

Figure  35:  Configure  Dynamic  Defense  

 

FAIL2BAN  

 

 

Fail2Ban  feature  on  the  UCM6100  provides  intrusion  detection  and  prevention  for  authentication  errors  in  

SIP  REGISTER,  INVITE  and  SUBSCRIBE.  Once  the  entry  is  detected  within  "Max  Retry  Duration",  the  

UCM6100  will  take  action  to  forbid  the  host  for  certain  period  as  defined  in  "Banned  Duration".  This  feature   helps  prevent  SIP  brute  force  attacks  to  the  PBX  system.  

Table  19:  Fail2Ban  Settings  

Global  Settings

 

Enable  Fail2Ban  

Banned  Duration  

Max  Retry  Duration  

Enable  Fail2Ban.  The  default  setting  is  disabled.  Please  make  sure  both  "Enable  

Fail2Ban"  and  "Asterisk  Service"  are  turned  on  in  order  to  use  Fail2Ban  for  SIP   authentication  on  the  UCM6100.  

Configure   the   duration   (in   seconds)   for   the   detected   host   to   be   banned.   The   default  setting  is  300.  If  set  to  -­1,  the  host  will  be  always  banned.  

Within   this   duration   (in   seconds),   if   a   host   exceeds   the   max   times   of   retry   as   defined  in  "MaxRetry",  the  host  will  be  banned.  The  default  setting  is  5.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  70  of  304    

 

 

MaxRetry  

Fail2Ban  Whitelist  

Configure   the   number   of   authentication   failures   during   "Max   Retry   Duration"   before  the  host  is  banned.  The  default  setting  is  10.  

Configure  IP  address,  CIDR  mask  or  DNS  host  in  the  whiltelist.  Fail2Ban  will  not   ban  the  host  with  matching  address  in  this  list.  Up  to  5  addresses  can  be  added   into  the  list.  

Local  Settings

 

Asterisk  Service  

Protocol  

MaxRetry  

Enable  Asterisk  service  for  Fail2Ban.  The  default  setting  is  disabled.  Please  make   sure  both  "Enable  Fail2Ban"  and  "Asterisk  Service"  are  turned  on  in  order  to  use  

Fail2Ban  for  SIP  authentication  on  the  UCM6100.  

Configure  the  listening  port  number  for  the  service.  Currently  only  5060  (for  UDP)   is  supported.  

Configure   the   number   of   authentication   failures   during   "Max   Retry   Duration"   before  the  host  is  banned.  The  default  setting  is  10.  Please  make  sure  this  option   is   properly   configured   as   it   will   override   the   "MaxRetry"   value   under   "Global  

Settings".    

 

 

CHANGE  PASSWORD  

 

After  logging  in  the  UCM6100  web  UI  for  the  first  time,  it  is  highly  recommended  for  users  to  change  the  

  default  password  "admin"  to  a  more  complicated  password  for  security  purpose.  Follow  the  steps  below  to   change  the  Web  UI  access  password.  

1.   Go  to  Web  UI-­>Settings-­>Change  Password  page.  

2.   Enter  the  old  password  first.  

3.   Enter  the  new  password  and  re-­type  the  new  password  to  confirm.  The  new  password  has  to  be  at   least  4  characters.  The  maximum  length  of  the  password  is  30  characters.  

4.   Click  on  "Save"  and  the  user  will  be  automatically  logged  out.  

5.   Once  the  web  page  comes  back  to  the  login  page  again,  enter  the  username  "admin"  and  the  new   password  to  login.  

 

LDAP  SERVER  

 

The  UCM6100  has  an  embedded  LDAP  server  for  users  to  manage  corporate  phonebook  in  a  centralized  

  manner.  

•  

By   default,   the   LDAP   server   has   generated   the   first   phonebook   with   PBX   DN  

"ou=pbx,dc=pbx,dc=com"  based  on  the  UCM6100  user  extensions  already.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  71  of  304    

 

•  

Users   could   add   new   phonebook   with   a   different   Phonebook   DN   for   other   external   contacts.   For   example,  "ou=people,dc=pbx,dc=com".  

 

•  

All  the  phonebooks  in  the  UCM6100  LDAP  server  have  the  same  Base  DN  "dc=pbx,dc=com".  

Term  Explanation:    

cn=  Common  Name   ou=  Organization  Unit   dc=  Domain  Component  

These  are  all  parts  of  the  LDAP  data  Interchange  Format,  according  to  RFC  2849,  which  is  how  the  LDAP  

  tree  is  filtered.  

If  users  have  the  Grandstream  phone  provisioned  by  the  UCM6100,  the  LDAP  directory  will  be  set  up  on  

  the  phone  and  can  be  used  right  away  for  users  to  access  all  phonebooks.  

Additionally,   users   could   manually   configure   the   LDAP   client   settings   to   manipulate   the   built-­in   LDAP   server   on   the   UCM6100.   If   the   UCM6100   has   multiple   LDAP   phonebooks   created,   in   the   LDAP   client   configuration,   users   could   use   "dc=pbx,dc=com"   as   Base   DN   to   have   access   to   all   phonebooks   on   the  

UCM6100   LDAP   server,   or   use   a   specific   phonebook   DN,   for   example   "ou=people,dc=pbx,dc=com",   to   access  to  phonebook  with  Phonebook  DN  "ou=people,dc=pbx,dc=com  "  only.  

 

 

UCM  can  also  act  as  a  LDAP  client  to  download  phonebook  entries  from  other  LDAP  server.  

 

To  access  LDAP  server  and  client  settings,  go  to  Web  GUI-­>Settings-­>LDAP  Server.  

LDAP  SERVER  CONFIGURATIONS  

 

 

The  following  figure  shows  the  default  LDAP  server  configurations  on  the  UCM6100.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  36:  LDAP  Server  Configurations  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  72  of  304    

 

 

The  UCM6100  LDAP  server  supports  anonymous  access  (read-­only)  by  default.  Therefore  the  LDAP  client   doesn't  have  to  configure  username  and  password  to  access  the  phonebook  directory.  The  "Root  DN"  and  

"Root   Password"   here   are   for   LDAP   management   and   configuration   where   users   will   need   provide   for   authentication  purpose  before  modifying  the  LDAP  information.  

The  default  phonebook  list  in  this  LDAP  server  can  be  viewed  and  edited  by  clicking  on     for  the  first   phonebook  under  LDAP  Phonebook.  

 

Figure  37:  Default  LDAP  Phonebook  DN  

 

 

Figure  38:  Default  LDAP  Phonebook  Attributes  

 

LDAP  PHONEBOOK  

 

Users   could   use   the   default   phonebook,   edit   the   default   phonebook,   add   new   phonebook,   import   phonebook  on  the  LDAP  server  as  well  as  export  phonebook  from  the  LDAP  server.  The  first  phonebook   with  default  phonebook  dn  "ou=pbx,dc=pbx,dc=com"  displayed  on  the  LDAP  server  page  is  for  extensions   in  this  PBX.  Users  cannot  add  or  delete  contacts  directly.  The  contacts  information  will  need  to  be  modified   via   Web   GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call   Routes-­>Extensions   first.   The   default   LDAP   phonebook   will   then   be   updated  automatically.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  73  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  39:  LDAP  Server:  LDAP  Phonebook  

 

•  

Add  new  phonebook  

 

 

A   new   sibling   phonebook   of   the   default   PBX   phonebook   can   be   added   by   clicking   on   "Add"   under  

"LDAP  Phonebook"  section.  

 

 

Figure  40:  Add  LDAP  Phonebook  

 

 

Configure  the  "Phonebook  Prefix"  first.  The  "Phonebook  DN"  will  be  automatically  filled  in.  For  example,  if   configuring   "Phonebook   Prefix"   as   "people",   the   "Phonebook   DN"   will   be   filled   with  

"ou=people,dc=pbx,dc=com".  

Once  added,  users  can  select     to  edit  the  phonebook  attributes  and  contact  list  (see  figure  below),  or   select     to  delete  the  phonebook.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  74  of  304    

 

 

Figure  41:  Edit  LDAP  Phonebook  

 

•  

Import  phonebook  from  your  computer  to  LDAP  server  

 

Click  on  “Import  Phonebook”  and  a  dialog  will  prompt  as  shown  in  the  figure  below.  

 

 

 

Figure  42:  Import  Phonebook  

 

 

The  file  to  be  imported  must  be  a  CSV  file  with  UTF-­8  encoding.  Users  can  open  the  CSV  file  with  

Notepad  and  save  it  with  UTF-­8  encoding.  

Here  is  how  a  sample  file  looks  like.  Please  note  “Account  Number”  and  “Phonebook  DN”  fields  are   required.  Users  could  export  a  phonebook  file  from  the  UCM6100  LDAP  phonebook  section  first  and   use  it  as  a  sample  to  start  with.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  75  of  304    

 

Figure  43:  Phonebook  CSV  File  Format  

 

 

 

The  Phonebook  DN  field  is  the  same  “Phonebook  Prefix”  entry  as  when  the  user  clicks  on  “Add”  to   create   a   new   phonebook.   Therefore,   if   the   user   enters   “phonebook”   in   “Phonebook   DN”   field   in   the  

CSV  file,  the  actual  phonebook  DN  “ou=phonebook,dc=pbx,dc=com”  will  be  automatically  created  by   the  UCM6100  once  the  CSV  file  is  imported.  

In  the  CSV  file,  users  can  specify  different  phonebook  DN  fields  for  different  contacts.  If  the  phonebook  

DN  already  exists  on  the  UCM6100  LDAP  Phonebook,  the  contacts  in  the  CSV  file  will  be  added  into   the  existing  phonebook.  If  the  phonebook  DN  doesn’t  exist  on  the  UCM6100  LDAP  Phonebook,  a  new   phonebook  with  this  phonebook  DN  will  be  created.  

The  sample  phonebook  CSV  file  in  above  picture  will  result  in  the  following  LDAP  phonebook  in  the  

UCM6100.  

 

 

Figure  44:  LDAP  Phonebook  After  Import  

 

As   the   default   LDAP   phonebook   with   DN   “ou=pbx,dc=pbx,dc=com”   cannot   be   edited   or   deleted   in  

LDAP  phonebook  section,  users  cannot  import  contacts  with  Phonebook  DN  field  “pbx”  if  existed  in  the  

CSV  file.  

 

 

•  

Export  phonebook  to  your  computer  from  UCM6100  LDAP  server  

Select   the   checkbox   for   the   LDAP   phonebook   and   then   click   on   “Export   Selected   Phonebook”   to   export  the  selected  phonebook.  The  exported  phonebook  can  be  used  as  a  record  or  a  sample  CSV   file  for  the  users  to  add  more  contacts  in  it  and  import  to  the  UCM6100  again.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  76  of  304    

 

Figure  45:  Export  Selected  LDAP  Phonebook  

 

LDAP  CLIENT  CONFIGURATIONS  

 

 

The   configuration   on   LDAP   client   is   similar   when   you   use   other   LDAP   servers.   Here   we   provide   an   example  on  how  to  configure  the  LDAP  client  on  the  SIP  end  points  to  use  the  default  PBX  phonebook.  

Assuming   the   server   base   dn   is   "dc=pbx,dc=com",   configure   the   LDAP   clients   as   follows   (case   insensitive):  

Server  Address:  LDAP  server  IP  address  

Base  DN:  dc=pbx,dc=com  

User  Name:  cn=  “LDAP  server  login  name”,  dc=pbx,  dc=com  [matching  LDAP  server  format]  

Password:  “LDAP  server  login  password”  

Filter:  (|(CallerIDName=%)(AccountNumber=%))  

 

Port:  389  

The  following  figure  gives  a  sample  configurations  for  UCM6100  acting  as  a  LDAP  client.  

 

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  46:  LDAP  Client  Configurations  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  77  of  304    

 

 

To  configure  Grandstream  IP  phones  as  the  LDAP  client,  please  refer  to  the  following  example:  

Server  Address:  The  IP  address  or  domain  name  of  the  UCM6100  

Base  DN:  dc=pbx,dc=com  

User  Name:  Please  leave  this  field  empty  

Password:  Please  leave  this  field  empty  

LDAP  Name  Attribute:  CallerIDName  Email  Department  FirstName  LastName  

LDAP  Number  Attribute:  AccountNumber  MobileNumber  HomeNumber  Fax  

LDAP  Number  Filter:  (AccountNumber=%)  

LDAP  Name  Filter:  (CallerIDName=%)  

LDAP  Display  Name:  AccountNumber  CallerIDName  

LDAP  Version:  If  existed,  please  select  LDAP  Version  3  

 

Port:  389  

The  following  figure  shows  the  configuration  information  on  a  Grandstream  GXP2200  to  successfully  use   the  LDAP  server  as  configured  in  

Figure  36:  LDAP  Server  Configurations

.  

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  47:  GXP2200  LDAP  Phonebook  Configuration  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  78  of  304    

 

 

HTTP  SERVER  

 

The  UCM6100  embedded  web  server  responds  to  HTTP/HTTPS  GET/POST  requests.  Embedded  HTML   pages  allow  the  users  to  configure  the  PBX  through  a  Web  browser  such  as  Microsoft  IE,  Mozilla  Firefox   and   Google   Chrome.   By   default,   the   PBX   can   be   accessed   via   HTTPS   using   Port   8089   (e.g.,   https://192.168.40.50:8089).   Users   could   also   change   the   access   protocol   and   port   as   preferred   under  

 

Web  GUI-­>Settings-­>HTTP  Server.  

Table  20:  HTTP  Server  Settings  

Redirect  From  Port  80  

Protocol  Type  

Port  

Enable  or  disable  redirect  from  port  80.  On  the  PBX,  the  default  access   protocol  is  HTTPS  and  the  default  port  number  is  8089.  When  this  option   is   enabled,   the   access   using   HTTP   with   Port   80   will   be   redirected   to  

HTTPS  with  Port  8089.  The  default  setting  is  "Enable".  

Select  HTTP  or  HTTPS.  The  default  setting  is  "HTTPS".  This  is  also  the   protocol   used   for   zero   config   when   the   end   point   device   downloads   the   config  file  from  the  UCM6100.  

Specify  port  number  to  access  the  HTTP  server.  The  default  port  number   is  8089.  

 

 

Once  the  change  is  saved,  the  web  page  will  be  redirected  to  the  login  page  using  the  new  URL.  Enter  the   username  and  password  to  login  again.  

EMAIL  SETTINGS  

 

 

The  Email  application  on  the  UCM6100  can  be  used  to  send  out  alert  event  Emails,  Fax  (Fax-­To-­Email),  

Voicemail   (Voicemail-­To-­Email)   and   etc.   The   configuration   parameters   can   be   accessed   via   Web  

GUI-­>Settings-­>Email  Settings.  

Table  21:  Email  Settings  

TLS  Enable  

Type  

Domain  

Enable  or  disable  TLS  during  transferring/submitting  your  Email  to  other  

SMTP  server.  The  default  setting  is  "Yes".  

Select  Email  type.  

•  

MTA:  Mail  Transfer  Agent.  The  Email  will  be  sent  from  the  configured   domain.   When   MTA   is   selected,   there   is   no   need   to   set   up   SMTP   server   for   it   or   no   user   login   is   required.   However,   the   Emails   sent   from  MTA  might  be  considered  as  spam  by  the  target  SMTP  server.  

•  

Client:  Submit  Emails  to  the  SMTP  server.  A  SMTP  server  is  required   and  users  need  login  with  correct  credentials.  

Specify  the  domain  name  to  be  used  in  the  Email  when  using  type  "MTA".  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  79  of  304    

 

 

Server  

Username  

Password  

Specify  the  SMTP  server  when  using  type  "Client".  

Username   is   required   when   using   type   "Client".   Normally   it's   the   Email   address.  

Password   to   login   for   the   above   Username   (Email   address)   is   required   when  using  type  "Client".  

Display  Name  

Sender  

Specify  the  display  name  in  the  FROM  header  in  the  Email.  

Specify  the  sender's  Email  address.  

For  example,  [email protected]  

 

 

The   following   figure   shows   a   sample   Email   settings   on   the   UCM6100,   assuming   the   Email   is   using  

smtp.gmail.com  as  the  SMTP  server.  

 

Figure  48:  UCM6100  Email  Settings  

 

Once  the  configuration  is  finished,  click  on  "Test".  In  the  prompt,  fill  in  a  valid  Email  address  to  send  a  test  

 

Email  to  verify  the  Email  settings  on  the  UCM6100.  

TIME  SETTINGS  

AUTO  TIME  UPDATING  

 

 

The  current  system  time  on  the  UCM6100  is  displayed  on  the  upper  right  of  the  web  page.  It  can  also  be   found  under  Web  GUI-­>Status-­>System  Status-­>General.  

To   configure   the   UCM6100   to   update   time   automatically,   go   to   Web   GUI-­>Settings-­>Time  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  80  of  304    

 

 

 

Settings-­>Time  Auto  Updating.  

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

Note:  

The   configurations   under   Web   GUI-­>Settings-­>Time   Settings-­>Time   Auto   Updating   page   require   reboot  to  take  effect.  Please  consider  configuring  auto  time  updating  related  changes  when  setting  up  the  

UCM6100  for  the  first  time  to  avoid  service  interrupt  after  installation  and  deployment  in  production.  

 

 

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

Table  22:  Time  Auto  Updating  

Remote  NTP  Server  

Specify   the   URL   or   IP   address   of   the   NTP   server   for   the   UCM6100   to   synchronize   the   date   and   time.   The   default   NTP   server   is   ntp.ipvideotalk.com.  

Enable  DHCP  Option  2  

If  set  to  "Yes",  the  UCM6100  is  allowed  to  get  provisioned  for  Time  Zone   from  DHCP  Option  2  in  the  local  server  automatically.  The  default  setting   is  "Yes".  

Enable  DHCP  Option  42  

If  set  to  "Yes",  the  UCM6100  is  allowed  to  get  provisioned  for  NTP  Server   from  DHCP  Option  42  in  the  local  server  automatically.  This  will  override   the  manually  configured  NTP  Server.  The  default  setting  is  "Yes".  

Time  Zone  

Self-­Defined  Time  Zone  

Select  the  proper  time  zone  option  so  the  UCM6100  can  display  correct  

  time  accordingly.  

If   "Self-­Defined   Tome   Zone"   is   selected,   please   specify   the   time   zone   parameters   in   "Self-­Defined   Time   Zone"   field   as   described   in   below   option.  

If  "Self-­Defined  Time  Zone"  is  selected  in  "Time  Zone"  option,  users  will   need  define  their  own  time  zone  following  the  format  below.  

   

The  syntax  is:  std  offset  dst  [offset],  start  [/time],  end  [/time]    

 

Default  is  set  to:  MTZ+6MDT+5,M4.1.0,M11.1.0  

 

MTZ+6MDT+5  

This  indicates  a  time  zone  with  6  hours  offset  and  1  hour  ahead  for  DST,  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  81  of  304    

 

  which  is  U.S  central  time.  If  it  is  positive  (+),  the  local  time  zone  is  west  of   the   Prime   Meridian   (A.K.A:   International   or   Greenwich   Meridian);;   If   it   is   negative  (-­),  the  local  time  zone  is  east.    

 

M4.1.0,M11.1.0    

The  1st  number  indicates  Month:  1,2,3..,  12  (for  Jan,  Feb,  ..,  Dec).  

The  2nd  number  indicates  the  nth  iteration  of  the  weekday:  (1st  Sunday,    

3rd  Tuesday…).  Normally  1,  2,  3,  4  are  used.  If  5  is  used,  it  means  the   last  iteration  of  the  weekday.  

The  3rd  number  indicates  weekday:  0,1,2,..,6  (  for  Sun,  Mon,     Tues,  ...  

,Sat).  

Therefore,  this  example  is  the  DST  which  starts  from  the  First  Sunday  of    

April  to  the  1st  Sunday  of  November.  

 

 

SET  TIME  MANUALLY  

 

 

To   manually   set   the   time   on   the   UCM6100,   go   to   Web   UI-­>Settings-­>Time   Settings-­>Set   Time  

Manually.  The  format  is  YYYY-­MM-­DD  HH:MI:SS.  

 

Figure  49:  Set  Time  Manually  

 

 

 

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

Note:  

Manually  setup  time  will  take  effect  immediately  after  saving  and  applying  change  in  the  web  UI.  If  users   would  like  to  reboot  the  UCM6100  and  keep  the  manually  setup  time  setting,  please  make  sure  "Remote  

NTP   Server",   "Enable   DHCP   Option   2"   and   "Enable   DHCP   Option   42"   options   under   Web  

GUI-­>Settings-­>Time  Settings-­>Time  Auto  Updating  page  are  unchecked  or  set  to  empty.  Otherwise,   time  auto  updating  settings  in  this  page  will  take  effect  after  reboot.  

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  82  of  304    

 

 

 

OFFICE  TIME  

 

On  the  UCM6100,  the  system  administrator  can  define  "office  time",  which  can  be  used  to  configure  time   condition  for  extension  call  forwarding  schedule  and  inbound  rule  schedule.  To  configure  office  time,  go  to  

 

Web  UI-­>Settings-­>Time  Settings-­>Office  Time.  Click  on  "Create  New  Office  Time"  to  create  an  office   time.  

 

 

Figure  50:  Create  New  Office  Time  

 

 

Start  Time  

End  Time  

Week  

Show  Advanced  Options  

Month  

Day  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Table  23:  Create  New  Office  Time  

Configure  the  start  time  for  office  hour.  

Configure  the  end  time  for  office  hour  

Select  the  work  days  in  one  week.  

Check   this   options   to   show   advanced   options.   Once   selected,   please   specify  "Month"  and  "Day"  below.  

Select  the  months  for  office  time.  

Select  the  work  days  in  one  month.  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  83  of  304    

 

   

Select  "Start  Time",  "End  Time"  and  the  day  for  the  "Week"  for  the  office  time.  The  system  administrator   can  also  define  month  and  day  of  the  month  as  advanced  options.  Once  done,  click  on  "Save"  and  then  

"Apply  Change"  for  the  office  time  to  take  effect.  The  office  time  will  be  listed  in  the  web  page  as  the  figure   shows  below.  

 

Figure  51:  Settings-­>Time  Settings-­>Office  Time  

•  

Click  on     to  edit  the  office  time.  

•  

Click  on     to  delete  the  office  time.  

 

•  

Click  on  "Delete  Selected  Office  Times"  to  delete  multiple  selected  office  times  at  once.  

HOLIDAY  

 

On   the   UCM6100,   the   system   administrator   can   define   "holiday",   which   can   be   used   to   configure   time   condition   for   extension   call   forwarding   schedule   and   inbound   rule   schedule.   To   configure   holiday,   go   to  

 

Web  UI-­>Settings-­>Time  Settings-­>Holiday.  Click  on  "Create  New  Holiday"  to  create  holiday  time.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  84  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  52:  Create  New  Holiday  

 

Table  24:  Create  New  Holiday  

Name  

Holiday  Memo  

Month  

Specify  the  holiday  name  to  identify  this  holiday.  

Create  a  note  for  the  holiday.  

Select  the  month  for  the  holiday.  

Day  

Show  Advanced  Options  

Select  the  day  for  the  holiday.  

Check  this  option  to  show  advanced  options.  If  selected,  please  specify   the  days  as  holiday  in  one  week  below.  

Select  the  days  as  holiday  in  one  week.   Week    

 

Enter   holiday   "Name"   and   "Holiday   Memo"   for   the   new   holiday.   Then   select   "Month"   and   "Day".   The   system  administrator  can  also  define  days  in  one  week  as  advanced  options.  Once  done,  click  on  "Save"   and  then  "Apply  Change"  for  the  holiday  to  take  effect.  The  holiday  will  be  listed  in  the  web  page  as  the   figure  shows  below.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  85  of  304    

 

 

Figure  53:  Settings-­>Time  Settings-­>Holiday  

•  

Click  on     to  edit  the  holiday.  

•  

Click  on     to  delete  the  holiday.  

 

•  

Click  on  "Delete  Selected  Holidays"  to  delete  multiple  selected  holidays  at  once.  

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

Note:  

 

 

For  more  details  on  how  to  use  office  time  and  holiday,  please  refer  to  the  link  below:   http://www.grandstream.com/products/ucm_series/ucm61xx/documents/how_to_use_office_time_and_hol iday_ucm6100.pdf

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

NTP  SERVER  

 

The   UCM6100   can   be   used   as   a   NTP   server   for   the   NTP   clients   to   synchronize   their   time   with.   To   configure   the   UCM6100   as   the   NTP   server,   set   "Enable   NTP   server"   to   "Yes"   under   web  

GUI-­>Settings-­>NTP   Server.   On   the   client   side,   point   the   NTP   server   address   to   the   UCM6100   IP  

 

 

  address  or  host  name  to  use  the  UCM6100  as  the  NTP  server.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  86  of  304    

 

RECORDINGS  STORAGE  

 

The  UCM6100  supports  call  recordings  automatically  or  manually  and  the  recording  files  can  be  saved  in   external  storage  plugged  in  the  UCM6100  or  on  the  UCM6100  locally.  To  manage  the  recording  storage,  

  users  can  go  to  UCM6100  web  GUI-­>Settings-­>Recordings  Storage  page  and  select  whether  to  store   the  recording  files  in  USB  Disk,  SD  card  or  locally  on  the  UCM6100.  

 

Figure  54:  Settings-­>Recordings  Storage  

 

 

•  

If   “Enable   Auto   Change”   is   selected,   the   recording   files   will   be   automatically   saved   in   the   available  

USB  Disk  or  SD  card  plugged  into  the  UCM6100.  If  both  USB  Disk  and  SD  card  are  plugged  in,  the  

  recording  files  will  be  always  saved  in  the  USB  Disk.  

•  

If  “Local”  is  selected,  the  recordings  will  be  stored  in  UCM6100  internal  storage.  

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  87  of  304    

 

 

•  

If  “USB  Disk”  or  “SD  Card”  is  selected,  the  recordings  will  be  stored  in  the  corresponding  plugged  in   external  storage  device.  Please  note  the  options  “USB  Disk”  and  “SD  Card”  will  be  displayed  only  if  

  they  are  plugged  into  the  UCM6100.  

Once  “USB  Disk”  or  “SD  Card”  is  selected,  click  on  “OK”.  The  user  will  be  prompted  to  confirm  to  copy   the  local  files  to  the  external  storage  device.    

 

 

Figure  55:  Recordings  Storage  Prompt  Information  

 

Click  on  “OK”  to  continue.  The  users  will  be  prompted  a  new  dialog  to  select  the  categories  for  the  files   to  be  copied  over.  

 

Figure  56:  Recording  Storage  Category  

 

On  the  UCM6100,  recording  files  are  generated  and  exist  in  3  categories:  normal  call  recording  files,   conference  recording  files,  and  call  queue  recording  files.  Therefore  users  have  the  following  options   when  select  the  categories  to  copy  the  files  to  the  external  device:  

 

-­   Recording  Files:  Copy  the  normal  recording  files  to  the  external  device.  

-­   Conference:  Copy  the  conference  recording  files  to  the  external  device.  

-­   Queue:  Copy  the  call  queue  recording  files  to  the  external  device.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  88  of  304    

 

-­   All:  Copy  all  recording  files  to  the  external  device.  

 

LOGIN  TIMEOUT  SETTINGS  

 

After  the  user  logs  in  the  UCM6100  web  UI,  the  user  will  be  automatically  logged  out  after  certain  timeout.  

This  timeout  value  can  be  specified  under  UCM100  web  GUI-­>Settings-­>Login  Timeout  Settings  page.  

 

The  “User  Login  Timeout”  value  is  in  minute  and  the  default  setting  is  10  minutes.  If  the  user  doesn’t  make   any  operation  on  web  UI  within  the  timeout,  the  user  will  be  logged  out  automatically.  After  that,  the  web  UI  

  will  be  redirected  to  the  login  page  and  the  user  will  need  to  enter  username  and  password  to  log  in.  

 

If  set  to  0,  there  is  no  timeout  for  the  web  UI  login  session  and  the  user  will  not  be  automatically  logged  out.  

 

 

Figure  57:  Login  Timeout  Settings  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  89  of  304    

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  90  of  304    

 

PROVISIONING  

OVERVIEW  

 

Grandstream   SIP   Devices   can   be   configured   via   Web   interface   as   well   as   via   configuration   file   through  

TFTP/HTTP/HTTPS   download.   All   Grandstream   SIP   devices   support   a   proprietary   binary   format   configuration  file  and  XML  format  configuration  file.  The  UCM6100  provides  a  Plug  and  Play  mechanism  to   auto-­provision  the  Grandstream  SIP  devices  in  a  zero  configuration  manner  by  generating  XML  config  file   and  having  the  phone  to  download  it  within  LAN  area.  This  allows  users  to  finish  the  installation  with  ease  

  and  start  using  the  SIP  devices  in  a  managed  way.  

 

To  provision  a  phone,  three  steps  are  involved,  i.e.,  discovery,  configuration  and  provisioning.  This  section   explains  how  Zero  Config  works  on  the  UCM6100.  The  settings  for  this  feature  can  be  accessed  via  Web  

UI-­>PBX-­>Zero  Config.  

CONFIGURATION  ARCHITECTURE  FOR  END  POINT  DEVICE  

 

Started  from  firmware  version  1.0.7.10,  the  end  point  device  configuration  in  zero  config  is  divided  into  the   following  three  layers  with  priority  from  the  lowest  to  the  highest:  

 

 

•  

Global  

This   is   the   lowest   layer.   Users   can   configure   the   most   basic   options   that   could   apply   to   all  

Grandstream  SIP  devices  during  provisioning  via  Zero  config.  

 

•  

Model  

In  this  layer,  users  can  define  model-­specific  options  for  the  configuration  template.  

•  

Device    

This  is  the  highest  layer.  Users  can  configure  device-­specific  options  for  the  configuration  for  individual   device  here.  

 

Each  layer  also  has  its  own  structure  in  different  levels.  Please  see  figure  below.  The  details  for  each  layer   are   explained   in   sections  

[GLOBAL   CONFIGURATION]

,  

[MODEL   CONFIGURATION]

  and  

[DEVICE  

CONFIGURATION]

.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  91  of  304    

 

 

Figure  58:  Zero  Config  Configuration  Architecture  for  End  Point  Device  

 

The  configuration  options  in  model  layer  and  device  layer  have  all  the  option  in  global  layers  already,  i.e.,   the  options  in  global  layer  is  a  subset  of  the  options  in  model  layer  and  device  layer.  If  an  option  is  set  in  all   three   layers   with   different   values,   the   highest   layer   value   will   override   the   value   in   lower   layer.   For   example,   if   the   user   selects   English   for   Language   setting   in   Global   Policy   and   Spanish   for   Language   setting  in  Default  Model  Template,  the  language  setting  on  the  device  to  be  provisioned  will  use  Spanish  as   model  layer  has  higher  priority  than  global  layer.  To  sum  up,  configurations  in  higher  layer  will  always  

override   the   configurations   for   the   same   options/fields   in   the   lower   layer   when   presented   at   the  

 

same  time.  

After  understanding  the  zero  config  configuration  architecture,  users  could  configure  the  available  options   for   end   point   devices   to   be   provisioned   by   the   UCM6100   by   going   through   the   three   layers.   This   configuration  architecture  allows  users  to  set  up  and  manage  the  Grandstream  end  point  devices  in  the  

  same  LAN  area  in  a  centralized  way.  

AUTO  PROVISIONING  SETTINGS  

 

By  default,  the  Zero  Config  feature  is  enabled  on  the  UCM6100  for  auto  provisioning.  Three  methods  of   auto  provisioning  are  used.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  92  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  59:  UCM6100  Zero  Config  

 

 

•  

SIP  SUBSCRIBE  

 

When   the   phone   boots   up,   it   sends   out   SUBSCRIBE   to   a   multicast   IP   address   in   the   LAN.   The  

UCM6100  discovers  it  and  then  sends  a  NOTIFY  with  the  XML  config  file  URL  in  the  message  body.  

The  phone  will  then  use  the  path  to  download  the  config  file  generated  in  the  UCM6100  and  take  the   new  configuration.  

 

•  

DHCP  OPTION  66  

 

This  method  should  be  used  on  the  UCM6102  because  only  the  UCM6102  has  WAN  and  LAN  port  with  

LAN  port  supporting  the  router  function.  When  the  phone  restarts  (by  default  DHCP  Option  66  is  turned   on),  it  will  send  out  a  DHCP  DISCOVER  request.  The  UCM6102  receives  it  and  returns  DHCP  OFFER   with  the  config  server  path  URL  in  Option  66,  for  example,  https://192.168.2.1:8089/zccgi/.  The  phone  

  will  then  use  the  path  to  download  the  config  file  generated  in  the  UCM6100.  

•  

mDNS  

 

When  the  phone  boots  up,  it  sends  out  mDNS  query  to  get  the  TFTP  server  address.  The  UCM6100   will  respond  with  its  own  address.  The  phone  will  then  send  TFTP  request  to  download  the  XML  config   file  from  the  UCM6100.  

 

To  start  the  auto  provisioning  process,  under  Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Zero  Config-­>Zero  Config  Settings,  fill  in   the  auto  provision  information.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  93  of  304    

 

 

 

Enable  Zero  Config  

Enable  Automatic  

Configuration  Assignment  

Automatically  Assign  Extension  

Zero  Config  Extension  

Segment  

Enable  Pick  Extension  

Figure  60:  Auto  Provision  Settings  

 

Table  25:  Auto  Provision  Settings  

Enable  or  disable  the  zero  config  feature  on  the  PBX.  The  default  setting   is  enabled.  

By   default,   this   is   disabled.   If   disabled,   when   SIP   device   boots   up,   the  

UCM6100  will  not  send  the  SIP  device  the  URL  to  download  the  config  file  

  and  therefore  the  SIP  device  will  not  be  automatically  provisioned  by  the  

UCM6100.  

Note:  

When  disabled,  SIP  devices  can  still  be  provisioned  by  manually  sending  

NOTIFY  from  the  UCM6100  which  will  include  the  XML  config  file  URL  for   the  SIP  device  to  download.  

If   enabled,   when   the   device   is   discovered,   the   PBX   will   automatically   assign   an   extension   within   the   range   defined   in   "Zero   Config   Extension  

Segment"  to  the  device.  The  default  setting  is  disabled.  

Click   on   the   link   "Zero   Config   Extension   Segment"   to   specify   the   extension   range   to   be   assigned   if   "Automatically   Assign   Extension"   is   enabled.   The   default   range   is   5000-­6299.   Zero   Config   Extension  

Segment   range   can   be   defined   in   web   UI-­>PBX-­>Internal  

Options-­>General  page-­>Extension  Preference  section:  "Auto  Provision  

Extensions".  

If  enabled,  the  extension  list  will  be  sent  out  to  the  device  after  receiving  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  94  of  304    

 

  the   device's   request.   This   feature   is   for   the   GXP   series   phones   that   support   selecting   extension   to   be   provisioned   via   phone's   LCD.   The   default  setting  is  disabled.  

Pick  Extension  Segment  

Pick  Extension  Period  (hour):  

Click  on  the  link  "Pick  Extension  Segment"  to  specify  the  extension  list  to   be  sent  to  the  device.  The  default  range  is  4000  to  4999.  Pick  Extension  

Segment   range   can   be   defined   in   web   UI-­>PBX-­>Internal  

Options-­>General   page-­>Extension   Preference   section:   "Pick  

Extensions".  

Specify  the  number  of  minutes  to  allow  the  phones  being  provisioned  to   pick  extensions.  

 

Please  make  sure  an  extension  is  manually  assigned  to  the  phone  or  "Automatically  Assign  Extension"  is   enabled  during  provisioning.  After  the  configuration  on  the  UCM6100  web  GUI,  click  on  "Save"  and  "Apply  

Changes".   Once   the   phone   boots   up   and   picks   up   the   config   file   from   the   UCM6100,   it   will   take   the  

  configuration  right  away.  

DISCOVERY  

 

Users   could   manually   discover   the   device   by   specifying   the   IP   address   or   scanning   the   entire   LAN   network.  Three  methods  are  supported  to  scan  the  devices.  

•  

PING  

•  

ARP  

 

•  

SIP  Message  (NOTIFY)  

Click  on  "Auto  Discover"  under  web  UI-­>  PBX-­>  Zero  Config-­>Zero  Config,  fill  in  the  "Scan  Method"  and  

"Scan  IP".  The  IP  address  segment  will  be  automatically  filled  in  based  on  the  network  mask  detected  on   the  UCM6100.  If  users  need  scan  the  entire  network  segment,  enter  255  (for  example,  192.168.40.255)   instead   of   a   specific   IP   address.   Then   click   on   "Save"   to   start   discovering   the   devices   within   the   same   network.  To  successfully  discover  the  devices,  "Zero  Config"  needs  to  be  enabled  on  the  UCM6100  web  

GUI-­>PBX-­>Zero  Config-­>Auto  Provisioning  Settings.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  61:  Auto  Discover  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  95  of  304    

 

The   following   figure   shows   a   list   of   discovered   phones.   The   MAC   address,   IP   Address,   Extension   (if   assigned),   Version,   Vendor,   Model,   Connection   Status,   Create   Config,   Options   (Edit/Delete/Update)   are  

  displayed  in  the  list.  

 

Figure  62:  Discovered  Devices  

 

GLOBAL  CONFIGURATION  

GLOBAL  POLICY  

 

 

Global  configuration  will  apply  to  all  the  connected  Grandstream  SIP  end  point  devices  in  the  same  LAN   with  the  UCM6100  no  matter  what  the  Grandstream  device  model  it  is.  It  is  divided  into  two  levels:  

•  

Web  UI-­>PBX-­>Zero  Config-­>Global  Policy  

•  

Web  UI-­>PBX-­>Zero  Config-­>Global  Templates.  

 

•  

Global  Templates  configuration  has  higher  priority  to  Global  Policy  configuration.  

Global  Policy  can  be  accessed  in  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Zero  Config-­>Global  Policy  page.  On  the  top  of  the   configuration   table,   users   can   select   category   in   the   "Options"   dropdown   list   to   quickly   navigate   to   the   category.  The  categories  are:  

 

•  

Localization:  configure  display  language,  data  and  time.  

•  

Phone  Settings:  configure  dial  plan,  call  features,  NAT,  call  progress  tones  and  etc.  

•  

Contact  List:  configure  LDAP  and  XML  phonebook  download.  

•  

Maintenance:  configure  upgrading,  web  access,  Telnet/SSH  access  and  syslog.  

•  

Network  Settings:  configure  IP  address,  QoS  and  STUN  settings.  

 

•  

Customization:  customize  LCD  screen  wallpaper  for  the  supported  models.  

 

Select  the  checkbox  on  the  left  of  the  parameter  you  would  like  to  configure  to  active  the  dropdown  list  for   this  parameter.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  96  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  63:  Global  Policy  Categories  

 

 

The  following  tables  list  the  Global  Policy  configuration  parameters  for  the  SIP  end  device.  

Table  26:  Global  Policy  Parameters:  Localization  

Language  settings  

Language  

Date  and  Time  

Date  Format  

Select  the  LCD  display  language  on  the  SIP  end  device.  

Time  Format  

NTP  Server  

Time  Zone  

Configure  the  date  display  format  on  the  SIP  end  device’s  LCD.  

Configure  the  time  display  in  12-­hour  or  24-­hour  format  on  the  SIP  end   device’s  LCD.  

Configure  the  URL  or  IP  address  of  the  NTP  server.  The  SIP  end  device   may  obtain  the  date  and  time  from  the  server.  

Configure  the  time  zone  used  on  the  SIP  end  device.  

 

Table  27:  Global  Policy  Parameters:  Phone  Settings  

Default  Call  Settings  

Dial  Plan  

Enable  Call  Features  

Use  #  as  Dial  Key  

Auto  Answer  by  Call-­info  

Configure   the   default   dial   plan   rule.   For   syntax   and   examples,   please   refer  to  user  manual  of  the  SIP  devices  to  be  provisioned  for  more  details.  

When   enabled,   “Do   Not   Disturb”,   “Call   Forward”   and   other   call   features   can  be  used  via  the  local  feature  code  on  the  phone.  Otherwise,  the  ITSP   feature  code  will  be  used.  

If  set  to  “Yes”,  pressing  the  number  key  “#”  will  immediately  dial  out  the   input  digits.  

If  set  to  "Yes",  the  phone  will  automatically  turn  on  the  speaker  phone  to  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  97  of  304    

 

NAT  Traversal  

Use  Random  Port  

General  Settings  

Call  Progress  Tones  

HEADSET  Key  Mode  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

  answer  incoming  calls  after  a  short  reminding  beep,  based  on  the  SIP  

Call-­Info  header  sent  from  the  server/proxy.  

The  default  setting  is  enabled.  

Configure  which  NAT  traversal  mechanism  will  be  enabled  on  the   endpoint  device.    

If  set  to  "STUN"  and  STUN  server  is  configured,  the  phone  system  will   periodically  send  STUN  message  to  the  SUTN  server  to  get  the  public  IP   address  of  its  NAT  environment  and  keep  the  NAT  port  open.  STUN  will   not  work  if  the  NAT  is  symmetric  type.  

If  set  to  “Keep-­alive”,  the  phone  system  will  send  the  STUN  packets  to   maintain  the  connection  that  is  first  established  during  registration  of  the   phone.  The  “Keep-­alive”  packets  will  fool  the  NAT  device  into  keeping  the   connection  open  and  this  allows  the  host  server  to  send  SIP  requests   directly  to  the  registered  phone.  

If  it  needs  to  use  OpenVPN  to  connect  host  server,  it  needs  to  set  it  to  

“VPN”.  

If  the  firewall  and  the  SIP  device  behind  the  firewall  are  both  able  to  use    

UPNP,  it  can  be  set  to  “UPNP”.  The  both  parties  will  negotiate  to  use   which  port  to  allow  SIP  through.  

The  default  setting  is  "Keep-­alive".    

Configure  whether  to  allow  the  endpoint  device  to  use  random  ports  for   both  SIP  and  RTP  messages.  This  is  usually  necessary  when  multiple   phones  are  behind  the  same  full  cone  NAT.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

Note:  This  parameter  must  be  set  to  "No"  for  Direct  IP  Calling  to  work.  

Configure   call   progress   tones   including   ring   tone,   dial   tone,   second   dial   tone,  message  waiting  tone,  ring  back  tone,  call  waiting  tone,  busy  tone   and  reorder  tone  using  the  following  syntax:  

  f1=val,  f2=val[,  c=on1/  off1[-­  on2/  off2[-­  on3/  off3]]];;  

•  

Frequencies  are  in  Hz  and  cadence  on  and  off  are  in  10ms).    

•  

“on”  is  the  period  (in  ms)  of  ringing  while  “off”  is  the  period  of  silence.  

Up  to  three  cadences  are  supported.  

•  

Please  refer  to  user  manual  of  the  SIP  devices  to  be  provisioned  for   more  details  

Select  “Default  Mode”  or  “Toggle  Headset/Speaker”  for  the  Headset  key.  

Please  refer  to  user  manual  of  the  SIP  devices  to  be  provisioned  for  more   details.  

Table  28:  Global  Policy  Parameters:  Contact  List  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  98  of  304    

 

LDAP  Phonebook  

Source  

Address  

Port  

Base  DN  

User  Name  

Password  

Number  Filter  

Name  Filter  

Version  

Name  Attribute  

Number  Attribute  

Display  Name  

Max  Hits  

Search  Timeout  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

 

Select  "Manual"  or  "PBX"  as  the  LDAP  configuration  source.  

•  

If  "Manual"  is  selected,  the  LDAP  configuration  below  will  be  applied   to  the  SIP  end  device.  

•  

If   "PBX"   is   selected,   the   LDAP   configuration   built-­in   from   UCM6100   web  UI-­>Settings-­>LDAP  Server  will  be  applied.  

Configure  the  IP  address  or  DNS  name  of  the  LDAP  server.  

Configure  the  LDAP  server  port.  The  default  value  is  389.  

This   is   the   location   in   the   directory   where   the   search   is   requested   to   begin.  Example:  

•   dc=grandstream,  dc=com  

•   ou=Boston,  dc=grandstream,  dc=com  

Configure  the  bind  "Username"  for  querying  LDAP  servers.  The  field  can   be  left  blank  if  the  LDAP  server  allows  anonymous  binds.  

Configure  the  bind  "Password"  for  querying  LDAP  servers.  The  field  can   be  left  blank  if  the  LDAP  server  allows  anonymous  binds.  

Configure  the  filter  used  for  number  lookups.  Please  refer  to  user  manual   for  more  details.  

Configure  the  filter  used  for  name  lookups.  Please  refer  to  user  manual   for  more  details.  

Select  the  protocol  version  for  the  phone  to  send  the  bind  requests.  The   default  value  is  3.  

Specify   the   "name"   attributes   of   each   record   which   are   returned   in   the  

LDAP  search  result.  Example:  

•   gn  

•   cn  sn  description  

Specify  the  "number"  attributes  of  each  record  which  are  returned  in  the  

LDAP  search  result.  Example:  

•   telephoneNumber  

•   telephoneNumber  Mobile  

Configure   the   entry   information   to   be   shown   on   phone's   LCD.   Up   to   3   fields  can  be  displayed.  Example:  

•  

%cn  %sn  %telephoneNumber  

Specify   the   maximum   number   of   results   to   be   returned   by   the   LDAP   server.  Valid  range  is  1  to  3000.  The  default  value  is  50.  

Specify  the  interval  (in  seconds)  for  the  server  to  process  the  request  and   client  waits  for  server  to  return.  Valid  range  is  0  to  180.  The  default  value   is  30.  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  99  of  304    

 

 

Sort  Results  

Incoming  Calls  

Outgoing  Calls  

Lookup  Display  Name  

Specify  whether  the  searching  result  is  sorted  or  not.  The  default  setting   is  No.  

Configure   to   enable   LDAP   number   searching   when   receiving   calls.   The   default  setting  is  No.  

Configure   to   enable   LDAP   number   searching   when   making   calls.   The   default  setting  is  No.  

Configures  the  display  name  when  LDAP  looks  up  the  name  for  incoming   call  or  outgoing  call.  It  must  be  a  subset  of  the  LDAP  Name  Attributes.  

XML  Phonebook  

Phonebook  XML  Server  

Phonebook  Download  Interval  

Remove  manually-­edited   entries  on  download  

 

Select  the  source  of  the  phonebook  XML  server.  

•  

Disable  

Disable  phonebook  XML  downloading.  

•  

Manual  

Once   selected,   users   need   specify   downloading   protocol   HTTP,  

HTTPS   or   TFTP   and   the   server   path   to   download   the   phonebook  

XML  file.  The  server  path  could  be  IP  address  or  URL,  with  up  to  256   characters.  

•  

Local  UCM  Server  

Once  selected,  click  on  the  Server  Path  field  to  upload  the  phonebook  

XML  file.  Please  note:  after  uploading  the  phonebook  XML  file  to  the   server,  the  original  file  name  will  be  used  as  the  directory  name  and   the  file  will  be  renamed  as  phonebook.xml  under  that  directory.  

Configure   the   phonebook   download   interval   (in   Minute).   If   set   to   0,   automatic  download  will  be  disabled.  Valid  range  is  5  to  720.  

If  set  to  "Yes",  when  XML  phonebook  is  downloaded,  the  entries  added   manually  will  be  automatically  removed.  

Table  29:  Global  Policy  Parameters:  Maintenance  

Upgrade  and  Provision  

Firmware  Source  

Firmware   source   via   ZeroConfig   provisionoing   could   a   URL   for   external   server   address,   local   UCM   directory   or   USB   media   if   plugged   in   to   the  

 

UCM6100.  

Select  a  source  to  get  the  firmware  file:  

•  

URL  

If   select   to   use   URL   to   upgrade,   complete   the   configuration   for   the   following  four  parameters:  “Upgrade  Via”,  “Server  Path”,  “File  Prefix”   and  “File  Postfix”.  

•  

Local  UCM  Server  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  100  of  304    

 

Upgrade  via  

Server  Path  

File  Prefix  

File  Postfix  

Allow  DHCP  Option  43/66  

Automatic  Upgrade  

Firmware  Upgrade  Rule  

Web  Access  

 

Firmware   can   be   uploaded   to   the   UCM6100   internal   storage   for   firmware  upgrade.  If  selected,  click  on  “Manage  Storage”  icon  next  to  

“Directory”   option,   upload   firmware   file   and   select   directory   for   the   end  device  to  retrieve  the  firmware  file.    

•  

Local  USB  Media  

If   selected,   the   USB   storage   device   needs   to   be   plugged   into   the  

UCM6100   and   the   firmware   file   must   be   put   under   a   folder   named  

“ZC_firmware”  in  the  USB  storage  root  directory.  

•  

Local  SD  Card  Media  

If  selected,  an  SD  card  needs  to  be  plugged  into  the  UCM6100  and   the  firmware  file  must  be  put  under  a  folder  named  “ZC_firmware”  in   the  USB  storage  root  directory.  

When  URL  is  selected  as  firmware  source,  configure  upgrade  via  TFTP,  

HTTP  or  HTTPS.  

When   URL   is   selected   as   firmware   source,   configure   the   firmware   upgrading  server  path.  

When   URL   is   selected   as   firmware   source,   configure   the   firmware   file   prefix.  If  configured,  only  the  firmware  with  the  matching  encrypted  prefix   will   be   downloaded   and   flashed   into   the   phone,   if   URL   is   selected   as   firmware  source.  

When   URL   is   selected   as   firmware   source,   configure   the   firmware   file   postfix.   If   configured,   only   the   configuration   file   with   the   matching   encrypted  postfix  will  be  downloaded  and  flashed  into  the  phone.  

If  DHCP  option  43  or  66  is  enabled  on  the  LAN  side,  the  TFTP  server  can   be  redirected.  

If   enabled,   the   endpoint   device   will   automatically   upgrade   if   a   new   firmware   is   detected.   Users   can   select   automatic   upgrading   by   day,   by   week  or  by  minute.  

•  

By  week  

Once   selected,   specify   the   day   of   the   week   to   check   HTTP/TFTP   server  for  firmware  upgrades  or  configuration  files  changes.  

•  

By  day  

Once  selected,  specify  the  hour  of  the  day  to  check  the  HTTP/TFTP   server  for  firmware  upgrades  or  configuration  files  changes.  

•  

By  minute  

Once   selected,   specify   the   interval   X   that   the   SIP   end   device   will   request  for  new  firmware  every  X  minutes.  

Specify  how  firmware  upgrading  and  provisioning  request  to  be  sent.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  101  of  304    

 

 

Admin  Password  

End-­User  Password  

Web  Access  Mode  

Web  Server  Port  

Security  

Configure  the  administrator  password  for  admin  level  login.  

Configure  the  end-­user  password  for  the  end  user  level  login.  

Select  HTTP  or  HTTPS  as  the  web  access  protocol.  

Configure  the  port  for  web  access.  The  valid  range  is  1  to  65535.  

Disable  Telnet/SSH    

Enable  Telnet/SSH  access  for  the  SIP  end  device.  If  the  SIP  end  device   supports   Telnet   access,   this   option   controls   the   Telnet   access   of   the   device;;  if  the  SIP  end  device  supports  SSH  access,  this  option  controls   the  SSH  access  of  the  device.    

Syslog    

Syslog  Server  

Syslog  Level  

Send  SIP  Log  

 

Basic  Settings  

Configure  the  URL/IP  address  for  the  syslog  server.  

Select  the  level  of  logging  for  syslog.  

Configure  whether  the  SIP  log  will  be  included  in  the  syslog  message.  

Table  30:  Global  Policy  Parameters:  Network  Settings  

IP  Address  

Configure  how  the  SIP  end  device  shall  obtain  the  IP  address.  DHCP  or  

PPPoE  can  be  selected.    

•  

DHCP  

Once  selected,  users  can  specify  the  Host   Name   (option   12)  of  the  

SIP   end   device   as   DHCP   client,   and   Vendor   Class   ID   (option   60)   used   by   the   client   and   server   to   exchange   vendor   class   ID   information.  

•  

PPPoE  

Once   selected,   users   need   specify   the   Account   ID,   Password   and  

Service  Name  for  PPPoE.  

Advanced  Setting  

Layer  3  QoS  

Layer  2  QoS  Tag  

Layer  2  QoS  Priority  Value  

STUN  Server  

Keep  Alive  Interval  

 

Define  the  Layer  3  QoS  parameter.  This  value  is  used  for  IP  Precedence,  

Diff-­Serv  or  MPLS.  Valid  range  is  0-­63.  

Assign  the  VLAN  Tag  of  the  Layer  2  QoS  packets.  Valid  range  is  0  -­4095.  

Assign  the  priority  value  of  the  Layer  2  QoS  packets.  Valid  range  is  0-­7.  

Configure   the   IP   address   or   Domain   name   of   the   STUN   server.   Only   non-­symmetric  NAT  routers  work  with  STUN.  

Specify   how   often   the   phone   will   send   a   blank   UDP   packet   to   the   SIP   server  in  order  to  keep  the  "ping  hole"  on  the  NAT  router  to  open.  Valid   range  is  10-­160.  

Table  31:  Global  Policy  Parameters:  Customization  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  102  of  304    

 

 

Wallpaper  

Screen  Resolution  1024  x  600  

Screen  Resolution  800  x  400  

Screen  Resolution  480  x  272  

Screen  Resolution  320  x  240  

Check  this  option  if  the  SIP  end  device  shall  use  1024  x  600  resolution  for   the  LCD  screen  wallpaper.    

•  

Source  

Configure  the  location  where  wallpapers  are  stored.  

•  

File  

If  "URL"  is  selected  as  source,  specify  the  URL  of  the  wallpaper  file.  If  

"Local  UCM  Server"  is  selected  as  source,  click  to  upload  wallpaper   file  to  the  UCM6100.  

Check  this  option  if  the  SIP  end  device  shall  use  800  x  400  resolution  for   the  LCD  screen  wallpaper.    

•  

Source  

Configure  the  location  where  wallpapers  are  stored.  

•  

File  

If  "URL"  is  selected  as  source,  specify  the  URL  of  the  wallpaper  file.  If  

"Local  UCM  Server"  is  selected  as  source,  click  to  upload  wallpaper   file  to  the  UCM6100.  

Check  this  option  if  the  SIP  end  device  shall  use  480  x  272  resolution  for   the  LCD  screen  wallpaper.    

•  

Source  

Configure  the  location  where  wallpapers  are  stored.  

•  

File  

If  "URL"  is  selected  as  source,  specify  the  URL  of  the  wallpaper  file.  If  

"Local  UCM  Server"  is  selected  as  source,  click  to  upload  wallpaper   file  to  the  UCM6100.  

Check  this  option  if  the  SIP  end  device  supports  320  x  240  resolution  for   the  LCD  screen  wallpaper.    

•  

Source  

Configure  the  location  where  wallpapers  are  stored.  

•  

File  

If  "URL"  is  selected  as  source,  specify  the  URL  of  the  wallpaper  file.  If  

"Local  UCM  Server"  is  selected  as  source,  click  to  upload  wallpaper   file  to  the  UCM6100.  

 

 

 

GLOBAL  TEMPLATES  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  103  of  304    

 

Global   Templates   can   be   accessed   in   web   GUI-­>PBX-­>Zero   Config-­>Global   Templates.   Users   can   create   multiple   global   templates   with   different   sets   of   configurations   and   save   the   templates.   Later   on,   when  the  user  configures  the  device  in  Edit  Device  dialog-­>Advanced  Settings,  the  user  can  select  to  use   one  of  the  global  template  for  the  device.  Please  refer  to  section  

[MANAGE  DEVICES]

 for  more  details  on  

  using  the  global  templates.  

When  creating  global  template,  users  can  select  the  categories  and  the  parameters  under  each  categories   to  be  used  in  the  template.  The  global  policy  and  the  selected  global  template  will  both  take  effect  when   generating   the   config   file.   However,   the   selected   global   template   has   higher   priority   to   the   global   policy   when  it  comes  to  the  same  setting  option/field.  If  the  same  option/field  has  different  value  configured  in  the   global  policy  and  the  selected  global  template,  the  value  for  this  option/field  in  the  selected  global  template   will  override  the  value  in  global  policy.  

 

 

Click  on  "Create  New  Template"  to  add  a  global  template.  Users  will  see  the  following  configurations.  

Table  32:  Create  New  Template  

Template  Name  

Description    

Active  

 

Create  a  name  to  identify  this  global  template.  

Provide  a  description  for  the  global  template.  This  is  optional.  

Check  this  option  to  enable  the  global  template.    

•  

Click  on     to  edit  the  global  template.    

The   window   for   editing   global   template   is   shown   in   the   following   figure.   In   the   “Options”   field,   after   entering  the  option  name  key  word,  the  options  containing  the  key  word  will  be  listed.  Users  could  then   select  the  options  to  be  modified  and  click  on  “Add  Option”  to  add  it  into  the  global  template.    

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  104  of  304    

 

 

Figure  64:  Edit  Global  Template  

 

The  added  options  will  show  in  the  list.  Users  can  then  enter  or  select  value  for  each  option  to  be  used  

  in  the  global  template.  On  the  left  side  of  each  added  option,  users  can  click  on     to  remove  this  

  option  from  the  template.  On  the  right  side  of  each  option,  users  can  click  on     to  reset  the  option   value  to  the  default  value.  

 

Click  on  “Save”  to  save  this  global  template.  

•  

The  created  global  templates  will  show  in  the  web  UI-­>PBX-­>Zero  Config-­>Global  Templates  page.  

Users  can  click  on     to  delete  the  global  template  or  click  on  “Delete  Selected  Templates”  to  delete  

  multiple  selected  templates  at  once.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  105  of  304    

 

 

•  

Click  on  “Toggle  Selected  Template(s)”  to  toggle  the  status  between  enabled/disabled  for  the  selected   templates.  

 

MODEL  CONFIGURATION  

Active  

 

MODEL  TEMPLATES  

 

Model  layer  configuration  allows  users  to  apply  model-­specific  configurations  to  different  devices.  Users   could   create/edit/delete   a   model   template   by   accessing   web   GUI,   page   PBX-­>Zero   Config-­>Model  

Templates.  If  multiple  model  templates  are  created  and  enabled,  when  the  user  configures  the  device  in  

Edit   Device   dialog-­>Advanced   Settings,   the   user   can   select   to   use   one   of   the   model   template   for   the   device.  Please  refer  to  section  

[MANAGE  DEVICES]

 for  more  details  on  using  the  model  template.  

 

For  each  created  model  template,  users  can  assign  it  as  default  model  template.  If  assigned  as  default   model  template,  the  values  in  this  model  template  will  be  applied  to  all  the  devices  of  this  model.  There  is  

  always  only  one  default  model  template  that  can  be  assigned  at  one  time  on  the  UCM6100.  

The   selected   model   template   and   the   default   model   template   will   both   take   effect   when   generating   the   config  file  for  the  device.  However  the  model  template  has  higher  priority  to  default  model  template  when  it   comes  to  the  same  setting  option/field.  If  the  same  option/field  has  different  value  configured  in  the  default   model   template   and   the   selected   model   template,   the   value   for   this   option/field   in   the   selected   model   template  will  override  the  value  in  default  model  template.  

 

 

•  

Click  on  “Create  New  Template”  to  add  a  model  template.  

Table  33:  Create  New  Model  Template  

Model  

Template  Name  

Description  

Default  Model  Template  

Select   a   model   to   apply   this   template.   The   supported   Grandstream   models  are  listed  in  the  dropdown  list  for  selection.  

Create  a  name  for  the  model  template.  

Enter  a  description  for  the  model  template.  This  is  optional.  

Select  to  assign  this  model  template  as  the  default  model  template.  The   value   of   the   option   in   default   model   template   will   be   overridden   if   other   selected  model  template  has  a  different  value  for  the  same  option.  

Check  this  option  to  enable  the  model  template.  

•  

Click  on     to  edit  the  model  template.    

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  106  of  304    

 

The  editing  window  for  model  template  is  shown  in  the  following  figure.  In  the  “Options”  field,  enter  the   option  name  key  word,  the  option  that  contains  the  key  word  will  be  listed.  User  could  then  select  the   option  and  click  on  “Add  Option”  to  add  it  into  the  model  template.    

Once  added,  the  option  will  be  shown  in  the  list  below.  On  the  left  side  of  each  option,  users  can  click   on     to  remove  this  option  from  the  model  template.  On  the  right  side  of  each  option,  users  can  click  

  on     to  reset  the  option  to  the  default  value.  

User  could  also  click  on  “Add  New  Field”  to  add  a  P  value  number  and  the  value  to  the  configuration.  

The  following  figure  shows  setting  P  value  “P1362”  to  “en”,  which  means  the  display  language  on  the  

 

LCD   is   set   to   English.   For   P   value   information   of   different   models,   please   refer   to   configuration   template  here   http://www.grandstream.com/support/tools .  

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  65:  Edit  Model  Template  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  107  of  304    

 

•  

Click   on   Save   when   done.   The   model   template   will   be   displayed   on   web   UI-­>PBX-­>Zero  

Config-­>Model  Templates  page.  

•  

Click  on     to  delete  the  model  template  or  click  on  “Delete  Selected  Templates”  to  delete  multiple  

  selected  templates  at  once.  

•  

Click  on  “Toggle  Selected  Template(s)”  to  toggle  the  status  between  enabled/disabled  for  the  selected   model  templates.  

MODEL  UPDATE  

 

UCM6100   zero   config   feature   supports   provisioning   all   models   of   Grandstream   SIP   end   devices.  

Templates  for  most  of  the  Grandstream  models  are  built  in  with  the  UCM6100  already.  Templates  for  GS  

Wave   and   Grandstream   surveillance   products   require   users   to   download   and   install   under   web  

UI-­>PBX-­>Zero  Config-­>Model  Update  first  before  they  are  available  in  the  UCM6100  for  selection.  After   downloading   and   installing   the   model   template   to   the   UCM6100,   it   will   show   in   the   dropdown   list   for  

“Model”  selection  when  editing  the  model  template.  

•  

Click  on     to  download  the  template.  

•  

Click  on     to  upgrade  the  model  template.  Users  will  see  this  icon  available  if  the  device  model  has  

  template  updated  in  the  UCM6100.  

 

Figure  66:  Template  Management  

 

In  case  the  UCM6100  is  placed  in  the  private  network  and  Internet  access  is  restricted,  users  will  not  be   able  to  get  packages  by  downloading  and  installing  from  the  remote  server.  Model  template  package  can   be  manually  uploaded  from  local  device  through  web  UI.  Please  contact  Grandstream  customer  support  if  

  the  model  package  is  needed  for  manual  uploading.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  108  of  304    

 

 

Figure  67:  Upload  Model  Template  Manually  

 

DEVICE  CONFIGURATION  

 

 

On   web   GUI,   page   PBX-­>Zero   Config-­>Zero   Config,   users   could   create   new   device,   delete   existing   device(s),  make  special  configuration  for  a  single  device,  or  send  NOTIFY  to  existing  device(s).    

CREATE  NEW  DEVICE  

 

Besides  configuring  the  device  after  the  device  is  discovered,  users  could  also  directly  create  a  new  device   and  configure  basic  settings  before  the  device  is  discovered  by  the  UCM6100.  Once  the  device  is  plugged   in,  it  can  then  be  discovered  and  provisioned.  This  gives  the  system  administrator  adequate  time  to  set  up  

  each  device  beforehand.  

 

Click   on   "Create   New   Device"   and   the   following   dialog   will   show.   Follow   the   steps   below   to   create   the   configurations  for  the  new  device.  

1.   Firstly  select  a  model  for  the  device  to  be  created  and  enter  its  MAC  address,  IP  address  and  firmware   version  (optional)  in  the  corresponding  field.  

2.   Basic  settings  will  show  a  list  of  settings  based  on  the  model  selected  in  step  1.  Users  could  assign   extensions  to  accounts,  assign  functions  to  Line  Keys  and  Multiple-­Purposed  Keys  if  supported  on  the   selected  model.  

3.   Click  on  “Create  New  Device”  to  save  the  configuration  for  this  device.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  109  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  68:  Create  New  Device  

 

MANAGE  DEVICES  

 

The  device  manually  created  or  discovered  from  Auto  Discover  will  be  listed  in  the  web  UI-­>PBX-­>Zero  

Config-­>Zero   Config   page.   Users   can   see   the   devices   with   their   MAC   address,   IP   address,   vendor,  

  model  and  etc.  

Figure  69:  Manage  Devices  

  to  access  the  web  UI  of  the  phone.  

•  

Click  on  

•  

Click  on     to  edit  the  device  configuration.  

A   new   dialog   will   be   displayed   for   the   users   to   configure   “Basic”   settings   and   “Advanced”   settings.  

“Basic”  settings  have  the  same  configurations  as  displayed  when  manually  creating  a  new  device,  i.e.,   account,   line   key   and   MPK   settings;;   “Advanced”   settings   allow   users   to   configure   more   details   in   a   five-­level  structure.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  110  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  70:  Edit  Device  

 

A  preview  of  the  “Advanced”  settings  is  shown  in  the  above  figure.  There  are  five  levels  configurations   as  described  in  (1)  (2)  (3)  (4)  (5)  below,  with  priority  from  the  lowest  to  the  highest.  The  configurations   in   all   levels   will   take   effect   for   the   device.   If   there   are   same   options   existing   in   different   level   configurations  with  different  value  configured,  the  higher  level  configuration  will  override  the  lower  level   configuration.  

 

(1)   Global  Policy  

This   is   the   lowest   level   configuration.   The   global   policy   configured   in   web   UI-­>PBX-­>Zero  

Config-­>Global  Policy  will  be  applied  here.  Clicking  on  “Modify  Global  Policy”  to  redirect  to  page  

PBX-­>Zero  Config-­>Global  Policy.  

 

(2)   Global  Templates  

Select   a   global   template   to   be   used   for   the   device   and   click   on     to   add.   Multiple   global   templates  can  be  selected  and  users  can  arrange  the  priority  by  adjusting  orders  via   and   .  

All   the   selected   global   templates   will   take   effect.   If   the   same   option   exists   on   multiple   selected   global  templates,  the  value  in  the  template  with  higher  priority  will  override  the  one  in  the  template   with  lower  priority.  Click  on   to  remove  the  global  template  from  the  selected  list.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  111  of  304    

 

 

 

(3)   Default  Model  Template  

Default  Model  Template  will  be  applied  to  the  devices  of  this  model.  Default  model  template  can  be   configured   in   model   template   under   web   UI-­>PBX-­>Zero   Config-­>Model   Templates   page.  

 

Please  see  default  model  template  option  in  

[Table  33:  Create  New  Model  Template].

     

(4)   Model  Templates  

Select   a   model   template   to   be   used   for   the   device   and   click   on     to   add.   Multiple   global   templates  can  be  selected  and  users  can  arrange  the  priority  by  adjusting  orders  via     and   .  

All   the   selected   model   templates   will   take   effect.   If   the   same   option   exists   on   multiple   selected   model  templates,  the  value  in  the  template  with  higher  priority  will  override  the  one  in  the  template   with  lower  priority.  Click  on   to  remove  the  model  template  from  the  selected  list.  

 

(5)   Customize  Device  Settings  

This  is  the  highest  level  configuration  for  the  device.  Click  on  “Modify  Customize  Device  Settings”   and  following  dialog  will  show.  

 

 

Figure  71:  Edit  Customize  Device  Settings  

Scroll  down  in  the  dialog  to  view  and  edit  the  device-­specific  options.  If  the  users  would  like  to   add  more  options  which  are  not  in  the  pre-­defined  list,  click  on  “Add  New  Field”  to  add  a  P  value   number  and  the  value  to  the  configuration.  The  following  figure  shows  setting  P  value  “P1362”  to  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  112  of  304    

 

“en”,  which  means  the  display  language  on  the  LCD  is  set  to  English.  The  warning  information  on   right  tells  that  the  option  matching  the  P  value  number  exists  and  clicking  on  it  will  lead  to  the   matching   option.   For   P   value   information   of   different   models,   please   refer   to   configuration   template  here   http://www.grandstream.com/support/tools .    

 

 

 

Figure  72:  Add  P  Value  in  Customize  Device  Settings  

 

 

•  

Select  multiple  devices  that  need  to  be  modified  and  then  click  on     to  

  batch  modify  devices.  

If   selected   devices   are   of   the   same   model,   the   configuration   dialog   is   like   the   following   figure.  

Configurations  in  five  levels  are  all  available  for  users  to  modify.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  113  of  304    

 

 

 

 

Figure  73:  Modify  Selected  Devices  -­  Same  Model  

 

If     selected  devices  are  of  different  models,  the  configuration  dialog  is  like  the  following  figure.  Click   on     to  view  more  devices  of  other  models.  Users  are  only  allowed  to  make  modifications  in  Global  

Templates  and  Global  Policy  level.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  114  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  74:  Modify  Selected  Devices  -­  Different  Models  

 

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

Note:  

Performing  batch  operation  will  override  all  the  existing  device  configuration  on  the  page.    

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

 

After   the   above   configurations,   save   the   changes   and   go   back   to   web   UI-­>PBX-­>Zero   Config-­>Zero  

Config  page.  Users  could  then  click  on     to  send  NOTIFY  to  the  SIP  end  point  device  and  trigger  the  

  provisioning   process.   The   device   will   start   downloading   the   generated   configuration   file   from   the   URL   contained  in  the  NOTIFY  message.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  115  of  304    

 

Figure  75:  Device  List  in  Zero  Config  

 

 

In  this  web  page,  users  can  also  click  on  “Reset  All  Extensions”  to  reset  the  extensions  of  all  the  devices.  

 

SAMPLE  APPLICATION  

 

Assuming  in  a  small  business  office  where  there  are  8  GXP2140  phones  used  by  customer  support  and  1  

GXV3275   phone   used   by   customer   support   supervisor.   3   of   the   8   customer   support   members   speak  

Spanish  and  the  rest  speak  English.  We  could  deploy  the  following  configurations  to  provisioning  the  office   phones  for  the  customer  support  team.  

 

1.   Go  to  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Zero  Config-­>Zero  Config  Settings,  select  “Enable  Zero  Config”.    

 

 

2.   Go   to   web   GUI-­>PBX-­>Zero   Config-­>Global   Policy,   configure   Date   Format,   Time   Format   and  

Firmware  Source  as  follows.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  116  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  76:  Zero  Config  Sample  -­  Global  Policy  

 

3.   Go   to   web   GUI-­>PBX-­>Zero   Config-­>Model   Templates,   create   a   new   model   template   “English  

 

Support  Template”  for  GXP2140.  Add  option  “Language”  and  set  it  to  “English”.  Then  select  the  option  

“Default  Model  Template”  to  make  it  the  default  model  template.  

4.   Go   to   web   GUI-­>PBX-­>Zero   Config-­>Model   Templates,   create   another   model   template   “Spanish  

Support  Template”  for  GXP2140.  Add  option  “Language”  and  set  it  to  “Español”.  

 

5.   After  9  devices  are  powered  up  and  connected  to  the  LAN  network,  use  “Auto  Discover”  function  or  

“Create   New   Device”   function   to   add   the   devices   to   the   device   list   on   web   UI-­>PBX-­>Zero  

Config-­>Zero  Config.  

 

6.   On  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Zero  Config-­>Zero  Config  page,  users  could  identify  the  devices  by  their  MAC   addresses  or  IP  addresses  displayed  on  the  list.  Click  on     to  edit  the  device  settings.  

 

7.   For  each  of  the  5  phones  used  by  English  speaking  customer  support,  in  “Basic”  settings  select  an   available  extension  for  account  1  and  click  on  “Save”.  Then  click  on  “Advanced”  settings  tab  to  bring  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  117  of  304    

 

up  the  following  dialog.  Users  will  see  the  English  support  template  is  applied  since  this  is  the  default   model  template.  A  preview  of  the  device  settings  will  be  listed  on  the  right  side.  

 

 

 

Figure  77:  Zero  Config  Sample  -­  Device  Preview  1  

 

8.   For   the   3   phones   used   by   Spanish   support,   in   “Basic”   settings   select   an   available   extension   for  

  account  1  and  click  on  “Save”.  Then  click  on  “Advanced”  settings  tab  to  bring  up  the  following  dialog.    

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  118  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  78:  Zero  Config  Sample  -­  Device  Preview  2  

 

Select   “Spanish   Support   Template”   in  

  “

Model   Template”.   The   preview   of   the   device   settings   is   displayed  on  the  right  side  and  we  can  see  the  language  is  set  to  “Español”  since  Model  Template  has  

  the   higher   priority   for   the   option   “Language”,   which   overrides   the   value   configured   in   default   model   template.  

 

9.   For  the  GXV3275  used  by  the  customer  support  supervisor,  select  an  available  extension  for  account  

1   on   “Basic”   settings   and   click   on   “Save”.   Users   can   see   the   preview   of   the   device   configuration   in  

“Advanced”  settings.  There  is  no  model  template  configured  for  GXV3275.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  119  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  79:  Zero  Config  Sample  -­  Device  Preview  3  

 

10.   Click  on  “Apply  Changes”  to  apply  saved  changes.  

11.   On  the  web  UI-­>PBX-­>Zero  Config-­>Zero  Config  page,  click  on     to  send  NOTIFY  to  trigger  the   device  to  download  config  file  from  UCM6100.  

 

 

Now   all   the   9   phones   in   the   network   will   be   provisioned   with   an   unique   extension   registered   on   the  

 

UCM6100.   3   of   the   phones   will   be   provisioned   to   display   Spanish   on   LCD   and   the   other   5   will   be   provisioned  to  display  English  on  LCD.  The  GXV3275  used  by  the  supervisor  will  be  provisioned  to  use  the   default  language  on  LCD  display  since  it’s  not  specified  in  the  global  policy.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  120  of  304    

 

EXTENSIONS  

CREATE  NEW  USER  

CREATE  NEW  SIP  EXTENSION  

 

To   manually   create   new   SIP   user,   go   to   Web   GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call   Routes-­>Extensions.   Click   on  

"Create  New  User"-­>"Create  New  SIP  Extension"  and  a  new  dialog  window  will  show  for  users  to  fill  in  the   extension  information.  

 

 

Figure  80:  Create  New  Device  

 

SIP  extension  options  are  divided  into  four  categories:  

•  

Basic  Settings  

•  

Media  

 

•  

Features  

•  

Specific  Time  

Click  on  the  tag  to  view  or  edit  options  belonging  to  that  category.  

 

The  configuration  parameters  are  as  follows.  

Table  34:  SIP  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Basic  Settings  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  121  of  304    

 

 

General

 

Extension  

CallerID  Number  

Permission  

SIP/IAX  Password  

Support  Hot-­Desking  Mode  

Auth  ID  

Enable  Voicemail  

Voicemail  Password  

Skip  Voicemail  Password  

Verification  

Disable  This  Extension  

Enable  LDAP  

User  Settings

 

First  Name  

The  extension  number  associated  with  the  user.  

Configure  the  CallerID  Number  that  would  be  applied  for  outbound  calls   from  this  user.  

Note:  

The  ability  to  manipulate  your  outbound  Caller  ID  may  be  limited  by  your  

VoIP  provider.  

Assign   permission   level   to   the   user.   The   available   permissions   are  

"Internal",  "Local",  "National"  and  "International"  from  the  lowest  level  to   the  highest  level.  The  default  setting  is  "Internal".  

Note:  

Users  need  to  have  the  same  level  as  or  higher  level  than  an  outbound   rule's  privilege  in  order  to  make  outbound  calls  using  this  rule.    

Configure  the  password  for  the  user.  A  random  secure  password  will  be   automatically   generated.   It   is   recommended   to   use   this   password   for   security  purpose.  

If  enabled,  SIP  Password  will  accept  only  alphabet  characters  and  digits;;  

AuthID  will  be  changed  to  the  same  as  Extension.  

Configure   the   authentication   ID   for   the   user.   If   not   configured,   the   extension  number  will  be  used  for  authentication.  

Enable  voicemail  for  the  user.  The  default  setting  is  "Yes".  

Configure   voicemail   password   (digits   only)   for   the   user   to   access   the   voicemail  box.  A  random  numeric  password  is  automatically  generated.  It   is   recommended   to   use   the   random   generated   password   for   security   purpose.  

When  user  dials  voicemail  code,  the  password  verification  IVR  is  skipped.  

If  enabled,  this  would  allow  one-­button  voicemail  access.  By  default  this   option  is  disabled.  

 

If  selected,  this  extension  will  be  disabled  on  the  UCM6100.  

Note:  

The  disabled  extension  still  exists  on  the  PBX  but  can’t  be  used  on  the   end  device.  

If  enabled,  this  extension  will  be  added  to  LDAP  Phonebook  PBX  list;;  if   disabled,  this  extension  will  be  skipped  when  creating  LDAP  Phonebook.  

Configure   the   first   name   of   the   user.   The   first   name   can   contain   characters,  letters,  digits  and  _.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  122  of  304    

 

Last  Name  

Email  Address  

User  Password  

Language  

Music  On  Hold  

 

SIP  Settings

NAT  

Can  Reinvite  

DTMF  Mode  

Insecure  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

 

Configure   the   last   name   of   the   user.   The   last   name   can   contain   characters,  letters,  digits  and  _.  

Fill  in  the  Email  address  for  the  user.  Voicemail  will  be  sent  to  this  Email   address.  

Configure   the   password   for   user   portal   access.   A   random   numeric   password   is   automatically   generated.   It   is   recommended   to   use   the   randomly  generated  password  for  security  purpose.  

Select   the   voice   prompt   language   to   be   used   for   this   extension.   The   default   setting   is   "Default"   which   is   the   selected   voice   prompt   language   under  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Language.  The  dropdown  list   shows  all  the  current  available  voice  prompt  languages  on  the  UCM6100.  

To   add   more   languages   in   the   list,   please   download   voice   prompt   package  by  selecting  "Check  Prompt  List"  under  web  UI-­>PBX-­>Internal  

Options-­>Language.  

Select  which  Music  On  Hold  class  to  suggest  to  extension  when  putting   the  active  call  on  hold.  

Table  35:  SIP  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Media  

Use   NAT   when   the   UCM6100   is   on   a   public   IP   communicating   with   devices  hidden  behind  NAT  (e.g.,  broadband  router).  If  there  is  one-­way   audio  issue,  usually  it's  related  to  NAT  configuration  or  Firewall's  support   of  SIP  and  RTP  ports.  The  default  setting  is  enabled.  

By  default,  the  UCM6100  will  route  the  media  steams  from  SIP  endpoints   through   itself.   If   enabled,   the   PBX   will   attempt   to   negotiate   with   the   endpoints  to  route  the  media  stream  directly.  It  is  not  always  possible  for   the   UCM6100   to   negotiate   endpoint-­to-­endpoint   media   routing.   The   default  setting  is  "No".  

Select   DTMF   mode   for   the   user   to   send   DTMF.   The   default   setting   is  

"RFC2833".   If   "Info"   is   selected,   SIP   INFO   message   will   be   used.   If  

"Inband"  is  selected,  64-­kbit  PCMU  and  PCMA  are  required.  When  "Auto"   is   selected,   RFC2833   will   be   used   if   offered,   otherwise   "Inband"   will   be   used.  

•  

Port:   Allow   peers   matching   by   IP   address   without   matching   port   number.  

•  

Very:   Allow   peers   matching   by   IP   address   without   matching   port   number.   Also,   authentication   of   incoming   INVITE   messages   is   not   required.  

•  

No:  Normal  IP-­based  peers  matching  and  authentication  of  incoming  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  123  of  304    

 

Enable  Keep-­alive  

Keep-­alive  Frequency  

TEL  URI  

SRTP  

Fax  Mode  

Strategy  

 

INVITE.  

The  default  setting  is  "Port".  

If  enabled,  empty  SDP  packet  will  be  sent  to  the  SIP  server  periodically  to   keep  the  NAT  port  open.  The  default  setting  is  "Yes".  

Configure  the  Keep-­alive  interval  (in  seconds)  to  check  if  the  host  is  up.  

The  default  setting  is  60  seconds.  

If   the   end   device/phone   has   an   assigned   PSTN   telephone   number,   this   field  should  be  set  to  "User=Phone".  Then  a  "User=Phone"  parameter  will   be   attached   to   the   Request-­Line   and   TO   header   in   the   SIP   request   to   indicate  the  E.164  number.  If  set  to  "Enable",  "Tel:"  will  be  used  instead  of  

"SIP:"  in  the  SIP  request.  The  default  setting  is  disabled.  

Enable  SRTP  for  the  call.  The  default  setting  is  disabled.  

Select  Fax  mode.  The  default  setting  is  “None”.  

•  

None:  Disable  Fax.  

•  

Fax   Detect:   Fax   signal   from   the   user/trunk   during   the   call   can   be   detected   and   the   received   Fax   will   be   sent   to   the   Email   address   configured  for  this  extension.  If  no  Email  address  can  be  found  for  the   user,  the  Fax  will  be  sent  to  the  default  Email  address  configured  in  

Fax  setting  page  under  web  UI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Fax/T.38.  

This   option   controls   how   the   extension   can   be   used   on   devices   within   different  types  of  network.  

•  

Allow  All  

Device  in  any  network  can  register  this  extension.  

•  

Local  Subnet  Only  

Only   the   user   in   specific   subnet   can   register   this   extension.   Up   to   three  subnet  addresses  can  be  specified.  

•  

A  Specific  IP  Address  

Only  the  device  on  the  specific  IP  address  can  register  this  extension.  

The  default  setting  is  "Allow  All".  

Select  audio  and  video  codec  for  the  extension.  The  available  codecs  are:  

PCMU,   PCMA,   GSM,   AAL2-­G.726-­32,   G,726,   G.722,   G.729,   G.723,   iLBC,  ADPCM,  H.264,  H.263  and  H.263p.  

Codec  Preference  

 

Call  Transfer  

Call  Forward  Unconditional  

CFU  Time  Condition  

Table  36:  SIP  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Features  

Configure   the   Call   Forward   Unconditional   target   number.   If   not   configured,   the   Call   Forward   Unconditional   feature   is   deactivated.   The   default  setting  is  deactivated.  

Select   time   condition   for   Call   Forward   Unconditional.   CFU   takes   effect  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  124  of  304    

 

Call  Forward  No  Answer  

CFN  Time  Condition  

Call  Forward  Busy  

CFB  Time  Condition  

CC  Settings  

Enable  CC  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

  only  during  the  selected  time  condition.  The  available  time  condition  are  

“Office   Time”,   “Out   of   Office   Time”,   “Holiday”,   “Out   of   Holiday”,   “Out   of  

Office  Time  or  Holiday”  and  “Specific”.    

Note:  

•  

“Specific”  has  higher  priority  to  “Office  Times”  if  there  is  a  conflict  in   terms  of  time  period.  

•  

Specific   time   can   be   configured   on   the   bottom   of   the   extension   configuration  dialog.  Scroll  down  the  add  Time  Condition  for  specific   time.  

•  

Office  Time  and  Holiday  could  be  configured  on  page  Settings-­>Time  

Settings-­>Office  Time/Holiday  page.  

Configure  the  Call  Forward  No  Answer  target  number.  If  not  configured,   the  Call  Forward  No  Answer  feature  is  deactivated.  The  default  setting  is   deactivated.  

Select   time   condition   for   Call   Forward   No   Answer.   The   available   time   condition   are   “Office   Time”,   “Out   of   Office   Time”,   “Holiday”,   “Out   of  

Holiday”,  “Out  of  Office  Time  or  Holiday”  and  “Specific”.    

Note:  

•  

“Specific”  has  higher  priority  to  “Office  Times”  if  there  is  a  conflict  in   terms  of  time  period.  

•  

Specific   time   can   be   configured   on   the   bottom   of   the   extension   configuration  dialog.  Scroll  down  the  add  Time  Condition  for  specific   time.  

•  

Office  Time  and  Holiday  could  be  configured  on  page  Settings-­>Time  

Settings-­>Office  Time/Holiday  page.  

Configure  the  Call  Forward  Busy  target  number.  If  not  configured,  the  Call  

Forward  Busy  feature  is  deactivated.  The  default  setting  is  deactivated.  

Select  time  condition  for  Call  Forward  Busy.  The  available  time  condition   are  “Office  Time”,  “Out  of  Office  Time”,  “Holiday”,  “Out  of  Holiday”,  “Out  of  

Office  Time  or  Holiday”  and  “Specific”.    

Note:  

•  

“Specific”  has  higher  priority  to  “Office  Times”  if  there  is  a  conflict  in   terms  of  time  period.  

•  

Specific   time   can   be   configured   on   the   bottom   of   the   extension   configuration  dialog.  Scroll  down  the  add  Time  Condition  for  specific   time.  

•  

Office  Time  and  Holiday  could  be  configured  on  page  Settings-­>Time  

Settings-­>Office  Time/Holiday  page.  

If  enabled,  UCM6100  will  automatically  alert  this  extension  when  a  called  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  125  of  304    

 

CC  Mode  

CC  Max  Agents  

CC  Max  Monitors  

Ring  Simultaneously  

Ring  Simultaneously  

External  Number  

Time  Condition  for  Ring  

Simultaneously  

Other  Settings  

Ring  Timeout  

Auto  Record  

Skip  Trunk  Auth  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

  party  is  available,  given  that  a  previous  call  to  that  party  failed  for  some   reason.  By  default  it’s  disabled.  

Two  modes  for  Call  Completion  are  supported:  

•  

Normal:  This  extension  is  used  as  ordinary  extension.  

•  

For  Trunk:  This  extension  is  registered  from  a  PBX.  

The  default  setting  is  “Normal”.  

Configure  the  maximum  number  of  CCSS  agents  which  may  be  allocated   for   this   channel.   In   other   words,   this   number   serves   as   the   maximum   number   of   CC   requests   this   channel   is   allowed   to   make.   The   minimum   value  is  1.  

Configure   the   maximum   number   of   monitor   structures   which   may   be   created  for  this  device.  In  other  words,  this  number  tells  how  many  callers   may  request  CC  services  for  a  specific  device  at  one  time.  The  minimum   value  is  1.  

Enable  this  option  to  have  an  external  number  ring  simultaneously  along   with   the   extension.   If   a   register   trunk   is   used   for   outbound,   the   register   number  will  be  used  to  be  displayed  for  the  external  number  as  caller  ID   number.  

Set  the  external  number  to  be  rang  simultaneously.  ‘-­’  is  the  connection   character  which  will  be  ignored.  

Ring  the  external  number  simultaneously  along  with  the  extension  on  the   basis  of  this  time  condition.  

Configure   the   number   of   seconds   to   ring   the   user   before   the   call   is   forwarded   to   voicemail   (voicemail   is   enabled)   or   hang   up   (voicemail   is   disabled).  If  not  specified,  the  default  ring  timeout  is  60  seconds  on  the  

UCM6100,   which   can   be   configured   in   the   global   ring   timeout   setting   under  web  GUI-­>Internal  Options-­>IVR  Prompt:  General  Preference.  The   valid  range  is  between  5  seconds  and  600  seconds.  

Note:  

If  the  end  point  also  has  a  ring  timeout  configured,  the  actual  ring  timeout   used  is  the  shortest  time  set  by  either  device.  

Enable  automatic  recording  for  the  calls  using  this  extension.  The  default   setting   is   disabled.   The   recording   files   can   be   accessed   under   web  

GUI-­>CDR-­>Recording  Files.  

·   If   set   to   ‘yes’,   users   can   skip   entering   the   password   when   making   outbound  calls.    

·   If  set  to  ‘By  Time’,  users  can  skip  entering  the  password  when  making  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  126  of  304    

 

  outbound  calls  during  the  selected  time  condition.    

·   If  set  to  ‘No’,  users  will  be  asked  to  enter  the  password  when  making   outbound  calls.  

Time  Condition  for  Skip  Trunk  

Auth  

Dial  Trunk  Password  

 

If  ‘Skip  Trunk  Auth’  is  set  to  ‘By  Time’,  select  a  time  condition  during  which   users  can  skip  entering  password  when  making  outbound  calls.  

Configure  personal  password  when  making  outbound  calls  via  trunk.  

Table  37:  SIP  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Specific  Time  

Specific  Time

 

Time  Condition  

 

Click  to  add  Time  Condition  to  configure  specific  time  for  this  extension.  

CREATE  NEW  IAX  EXTENSION  

 

The   UCM6100   supports   Inter-­Asterisk   eXchange   (IAX)   protocol.   IAX   is   used   for   transporting   VoIP   telephony   sessions   between   servers   and   terminal   devices.   IAX   is   similar   to   SIP   but   also   has   its   own  

  characteristic.  For  more  information,  please  refer  to  RFC  5465.        

To   manually   create   new   IAX   user,   go   to   Web   GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call   Routes-­>Extensions.   Click   on  

 

"Create  New  User"-­>"Create  New  IAX  Extension"  and  a  new  dialog  window  will  show  for  users  to  fill  in  the   extension  information.  The  configuration  parameters  are  as  follows.  

Table  38:  IAX  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Basic  Settings  

General

 

Extension  

CallerID  Number  

Permission  

SIP/IAX  Password  

The  extension  number  associated  with  the  user.  

Configure  the  CallerID  Number  that  would  be  applied  for  outbound  calls   from  this  user.  

Note:  

The  ability  to  manipulate  your  outbound  Caller  ID  may  be  limited  by  your  

VoIP  provider.  

Assign   permission   level   to   the   user.   The   available   permissions   are  

"Internal",  "Local",  "National"  and  "International"  from  the  lowest  level  to   the  highest  level.  The  default  setting  is  "Internal".  

Note:  

Users  need  to  have  the  same  level  as  or  higher  level  than  an  outbound   rule's  privilege  in  order  to  make  outbound  calls  using  this  rule.    

Configure  the  password  for  the  user.  A  random  secure  password  will  be   automatically   generated.   It   is   recommended   to   use   this   password   for   security  purpose.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  127  of  304    

 

Enable  Voicemail  

Voicemail  Password  

Skip  Voicemail  Password  

Verification  

Disable  This  Extension  

Enable  LDAP  

User  Settings

First  Name  

Last  Name  

Email  Address  

 

User  Password  

Language  

Music  On  Hold  

 

 

Enable  voicemail  for  the  user.  The  default  setting  is  "Yes".  

Configure   voicemail   password   (digits   only)   for   the   user   to   access   the   voicemail  box.  A  random  numeric  password  is  automatically  generated.  It   is   recommended   to   use   the   random   generated   password   for   security   purpose.  

When  user  dials  voicemail  code,  the  password  verification  IVR  is  skipped.  

If  enabled,  this  would  allow  one-­button  voicemail  access.  By  default  this   option  is  disabled.  

If  selected,  this  extension  will  be  disabled  on  the  UCM6100.  

 

Note:  

The  disabled  extension  still  exists  on  the  PBX  but  can’t  be  used  on  the   end  device.  

If  enabled,  this  extension  will  be  added  to  LDAP  Phonebook  PBX  list;;  if   disabled,  this  extension  will  be  skipped  when  creating  LDAP  Phonebook.  

Configure   the   first   name   of   the   user.   The   first   name   can   contain   characters,  letters,  digits  and  _.  

Configure   the   last   name   of   the   user.   The   last   name   can   contain   characters,  letters,  digits  and  _.  

Fill  in  the  Email  address  for  the  user.  Voicemail  will  be  sent  to  this  Email   address.  

Configure   the   password   for   user   portal   access.   A   random   numeric   password   is   automatically   generated.   It   is   recommended   to   use   the   randomly  generated  password  for  security  purpose.  

Select   the   voice   prompt   language   to   be   used   for   this   extension.   The   default   setting   is   "Default"   which   is   the   selected   voice   prompt   language   under  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Language.  The  dropdown  list   shows  all  the  current  available  voice  prompt  languages  on  the  UCM6100.  

To   add   more   languages   in   the   list,   please   download   voice   prompt   package  by  selecting  "Check  Prompt  List"  under  web  UI-­>PBX-­>Internal  

Options-­>Language.  

Select   which   Music   On   Hold   class   to   suggest   to   the   extension   when   putting  the  active  on  hold.  

 

Table  39:  IAX  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Media  

SIP  Settings

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  128  of  304    

 

Max  Number  of  Calls  

Require  Call  Token  

SRTP  

Fax  Mode  

Strategy  

Codec  Preference  

Call  Transfer  

Call  Forward  Unconditional  

 

Configure   the   maximum   number   of   calls   allowed   for   each   remote   IP   address.  

Configure  to  enable/disable  requiring  call  token.  If  set  to  "Auto",  it  might   lock   out   users   who   depend   on   backward   compatibility   when   peer   authentication   credentials   are   shared   between   physical   endpoints.   The   default  setting  is  "Yes".  

Enable  SRTP  for  the  call.  The  default  setting  is  disabled.  

Select  Fax  Mode.  The  default  setting  is  “None”.  

•  

None:  Disable  Fax.  This  is  the  default  setting.  

•  

Fax   Detect:   Fax   signal   from   the   user/trunk   during   the   call   can   be   detected   and   the   received   Fax   will   be   sent   to   the   Email   address   configured  for  this  extension.  If  no  Email  address  can  be  found  for  the   user,  the  Fax  will  be  sent  to  the  default  Email  address  configured  in  

Fax  setting  page  under  web  UI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Fax/T.38.  

This   option   controls   how   the   extension   can   be   used   on   devices   within   different  types  of  network.  

•  

Allow  All  

Device  in  any  network  can  register  this  extension.  

•  

Local  Subnet  Only  

Only   the   user   in   specific   subnet   can   register   this   extension.   Up   to   three  subnet  addresses  can  be  specified.  

•  

A  Specific  IP  Address  

Only  the  device  on  the  specific  IP  address  can  register  this  extension.  

The  default  setting  is  "Allow  All".  

Select  audio  and  video  codec  for  the  extension.  The  available  codecs  are:  

PCMU,   PCMA,   GSM,   AAL2-­G.726-­32,   G,726,   G.722,   G.729,   G.723,   iLBC,  ADPCM,  H.264,  H.263  and  H.263p.  

 

Table  40:  IAX  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Features  

CFU  Time  Condition  

Configure   the   Call   Forward   Unconditional   target   number.   If   not   configured,   the   Call   Forward   Unconditional   feature   is   deactivated.   The   default  setting  is  deactivated.  

Select   time   condition   for   Call   Forward   Unconditional.   CFU   takes   effect   only  during  the  selected  time  condition.  The  available  time  condition  are  

“Office   Time”,   “Out   of   Office   Time”,   “Holiday”,   “Out   of   Holiday”,   “Out   of  

Office  Time  or  Holiday”  and  “Specific”.    

Note:  

•  

“Specific”  has  higher  priority  to  “Office  Times”  if  there  is  a  conflict  in  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  129  of  304    

 

Call  Forward  No  Answer  

CFN  Time  Condition  

Call  Forward  Busy  

CFB  Time  Condition  

Ring  Simultaneously  

Ring  Simultaneously  

External  Number  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

  terms  of  time  period.  

•  

Specific   time   can   be   configured   on   the   bottom   of   the   extension   configuration  dialog.  Scroll  down  the  add  Time  Condition  for  specific   time.  

•  

Office  Time  and  Holiday  could  be  configured  on  page  Settings-­>Time  

Settings-­>Office  Time/Holiday  page.  

Configure  the  Call  Forward  No  Answer  target  number.  If  not  configured,   the  Call  Forward  No  Answer  feature  is  deactivated.  The  default  setting  is   deactivated.  

Select   time   condition   for   Call   Forward   No   Answer.   The   available   time   condition   are   “Office   Time”,   “Out   of   Office   Time”,   “Holiday”,   “Out   of  

Holiday”,  “Out  of  Office  Time  or  Holiday”  and  “Specific”.    

Note:  

•  

“Specific”  has  higher  priority  to  “Office  Times”  if  there  is  a  conflict  in   terms  of  time  period.  

•  

Specific   time   can   be   configured   on   the   bottom   of   the   extension   configuration  dialog.  Scroll  down  the  add  Time  Condition  for  specific   time.  

•  

Office  Time  and  Holiday  could  be  configured  on  page  Settings-­>Time  

Settings-­>Office  Time/Holiday  page.  

Configure  the  Call  Forward  Busy  target  number.  If  not  configured,  the  Call  

Forward  Busy  feature  is  deactivated.  The  default  setting  is  deactivated.  

Select  time  condition  for  Call  Forward  Busy.  The  available  time  condition   are  “Office  Time”,  “Out  of  Office  Time”,  “Holiday”,  “Out  of  Holiday”,  “Out  of  

Office  Time  or  Holiday”  and  “Specific”.    

Note:  

•  

“Specific”  has  higher  priority  to  “Office  Times”  if  there  is  a  conflict  in   terms  of  time  period.  

•  

Specific   time   can   be   configured   on   the   bottom   of   the   extension   configuration  dialog.  Scroll  down  the  add  Time  Condition  for  specific   time.  

•  

Office  Time  and  Holiday  could  be  configured  on  page  Settings-­>Time  

Settings-­>Office  Time/Holiday  page.  

Enable  this  option  to  have  an  external  number  ring  simultaneously  along   with   the   extension.   If   a   register   trunk   is   used   for   outbound,   the   register   number  will  be  used  to  be  displayed  for  the  external  number  as  caller  ID   number.  

Set  the  external  number  to  be  rang  simultaneously.  ‘-­’  is  the  connection   character  which  will  be  ignored.  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  130  of  304    

 

 

Time  Condition  for  Ring  

Simultaneously  

Other  Settings  

Ring  the  external  number  simultaneously  along  with  the  extension  on  the   basis  of  this  time  condition.  

Ring  Timeout  

Auto  Record  

Skip  Trunk  Auth  

Time  Condition  for  Skip  Trunk  

Auth  

Dial  Trunk  Password  

Configure   the   number   of   seconds   to   ring   the   user   before   the   call   is   forwarded   to   voicemail   (voicemail   is   enabled)   or   hang   up   (voicemail   is   disabled).  If  not  specified,  the  default  ring  timeout  is  60  seconds  on  the  

UCM6100,   which   can   be   configured   in   the   global   ring   timeout   setting   under  web  GUI-­>Internal  Options-­>IVR  Prompt:  General  Preference.  The   valid  range  is  between  5  seconds  and  600  seconds.  

Note:  

If  the  end  point  also  has  a  ring  timeout  configured,  the  actual  ring  timeout   used  is  the  shortest  time  set  by  either  device.  

Enable  automatic  recording  for  the  calls  using  this  extension.  The  default   setting   is   disabled.   The   recording   files   can   be   accessed   under   web  

GUI-­>CDR-­>Recording  Files.  

•  

If   set   to   “Yes”,   users   can   skip   entering   the   password   when   making   outbound  calls.    

•  

If   set   to   “By   Time”,   users   can   skip   entering   the   password   when   making  outbound  calls  during  the  selected  time  condition.    

•  

If  set  to  “No”,  users  will  be  asked  to  enter  the  password  when  making   outbound  calls.  

If   “Skip   Trunk   Auth”   is   set   to   “By   Time”,   select   a   time   condition   during   which  users  can  skip  entering  password  when  making  outbound  calls.  

Configure  personal  password  when  making  outbound  calls  via  trunk.  

 

Table  41:  IAX  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Specific  Time  

Specific  Time

 

Time  Condition   Click  to  add  Time  Condition  to  configure  specific  time  for  this  extension.  

 

CREATE  NEW  FXS  EXTENSION  

 

The  UCM6100  supports  Foreign  eXchange  Subscriber  (FXS)  interface.  FXS  is  used  when  user  needs  to   connect  analog  phone  lines  or  FAX  machines  to  the  UCM6100.  

   

To   manually   create   new   FXS   user,   go   to   Web   GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call   Routes-­>Extensions.   Click   on  

 

"Create  New  User"-­>"Create  New  FXS  Extension"  and  a  new  dialog  window  will  show  for  users  to  fill  in  the   extension  information.  The  configuration  parameters  are  as  follows.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  131  of  304    

 

 

General

 

Extension  

Analog  Station  

CallerID  Number  

Permission  

Enable  Voicemail  

Voicemail  Password  

Skip  Voicemail  Password  

Verification  

Disable  This  Extension  

Enable  LDAP  

User  Settings

First  Name  

Last  Name  

Email  Address  

 

User  Password  

Table  42:  FXS  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Basic  Settings  

The  extension  number  associated  with  the  user.  

Select  the  FXS  port  to  be  assigned  for  this  extension.  

Configure  the  CallerID  Number  that  would  be  applied  for  outbound  calls   from  this  user.  

Note:  

The  ability  to  manipulate  your  outbound  Caller  ID  may  be  limited  by  your  

VoIP  provider.  

Assign   permission   level   to   the   user.   The   available   permissions   are  

"Internal",  "Local",  "National"  and  "International"  from  the  lowest  level  to   the  highest  level.  The  default  setting  is  "Internal".  

Note:  

Users  need  to  have  the  same  level  as  or  higher  level  than  an  outbound   rule's  privilege  in  order  to  make  outbound  calls  using  this  rule.    

Enable  voicemail  for  the  user.  The  default  setting  is  "Yes".  

Configure   voicemail   password   (digits   only)   for   the   user   to   access   the   voicemail  box.  A  random  numeric  password  is  automatically  generated.  It   is   recommended   to   use   the   random   generated   password   for   security   purpose.  

When  user  dials  voicemail  code,  the  password  verification  IVR  is  skipped.  

If  enabled,  this  would  allow  one-­button  voicemail  access.  By  default  this   option  is  disabled.  

 

If  selected,  this  extension  will  be  disabled  on  the  UCM6100.  

Note:  

The  disabled  extension  still  exists  on  the  PBX  but  can’t  be  used  on  the   end  device.  

If  enabled,  this  extension  will  be  added  to  LDAP  Phonebook  PBX  list;;  if   disabled,  this  extension  will  be  skipped  when  creating  LDAP  Phonebook.  

Configure   the   first   name   of   the   user.   The   first   name   can   contain   characters,  letters,  digits  and  _.  

Configure   the   last   name   of   the   user.   The   last   name   can   contain   characters,  letters,  digits  and  _.  

Fill  in  the  Email  address  for  the  user.  Voicemail  will  be  sent  to  this  Email   address.  

Configure   the   password   for   user   portal   access.   A   random   numeric  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  132  of  304    

 

Language  

Music  On  Hold  

 

Analog  Settings

 

Call  Waiting  

User  ‘#’  as  SEND  

RX  Gain  

TX  Gain  

MIN  RX  Flash  

MAX  RX  Flash  

Enable  Polarity  Reversal  

Echo  Cancellation  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

  password   is   automatically   generated.   It   is   recommended   to   use   the   randomly  generated  password  for  security  purpose.  

Select   the   voice   prompt   language   to   be   used   for   this   extension.   The   default   setting   is   "Default"   which   is   the   selected   voice   prompt   language   under  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Language.  The  dropdown  list   shows  all  the  current  available  voice  prompt  languages  on  the  UCM6100.  

To   add   more   languages   in   the   list,   please   download   voice   prompt   package  by  selecting  "Check  Prompt  List"  under  web  UI-­>PBX-­>Internal  

Options-­>Language.  

Select  which  Music  On  Hold  class  to  suggest  to  extension  when  putting   the  active  call  on  hold.  

Table  43:  FXS  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Media  

Configure   to   enable/disable   call   waiting   feature.   The   default   setting   is  

"No".  

If   configured,   the   #   key   can   be   used   as   SNED   key   after   dialing   the   number  on  the  analog  phone.  The  default  setting  is  "Yes".  

Configure  the  RX  gain  for  the  receiving  channel  of  analog  FXS  port.  The   valid  range  is  -­30dB  to  +6dB.  The  default  setting  is  0.  

Configure   the   TX   gain   for   the   transmitting   channel   of   analog   FXS   port.  

The  valid  range  is  -­30dB  to  +6dB.  The  default  setting  is  0.  

Configure  the  minimum  period  of  time  (in  milliseconds)  that  the  hook-­flash   must  remain  unpressed  for  the  PBX  to  consider  the  event  as  a  valid  flash   event.  The  valid  range  is  30ms  to  1000ms.  The  default  setting  is  200ms.  

Configure   the   maximum   period   of   time   (in   milliseconds)   that   the   hook-­flash  must  remain  unpressed  for  the  PBX  to  consider  the  event  as  a   valid   flash   event.   The   minimum   period   of   time   is   256ms   and   it   can't   be   modified.  The  default  setting  is  1250ms.  

If   enabled,   a   polarity   reversal   will   be   marked   as   received   when   an   outgoing   call   is   answered   by   the   remote   party.   For   some   countries,   a   polarity   reversal   is   used   for   signaling   the   disconnection   of   a   phone   line   and   the   call   will   be   considered   as   hangup   on   a   polarity   reversal.   The   default  setting  is  "Yes".  

Specify  "ON",  "OFF"  or  a  value  (the  power  of  2)  from  32  to  1024  as  the   number  of  taps  of  cancellation.  

Note:  

When  configuring  the  number  of  taps,  the  number  256  is  not  translated   into  256ms  of  echo  cancellation.  Instead,  256  taps  means  256/8  =  32  ms.  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  133  of  304    

 

3-­Way  Calling  

Send  CallerID  After  

Fax  Mode  

Call  Transfer  

Call  Forward  Unconditional  

CFU  Time  Condition  

Call  Forward  No  Answer  

CFN  Time  Condition  

 

The  default  setting  is  "ON",  which  is  128  taps.  

Configure  to  enable/disable  3-­way  calling  feature  on  the  user.  The  default   setting  is  enabled.  

Configure  the  number  of  rings  before  sending  CID.  Default  setting  is  1.  

For   FXS   extension,   there   are   three   options   available   in   Fax   Mode.   The   default  setting  is  “None”.  

•  

None:  Disable  Fax.  

•  

Fax   Detect:   Fax   signal   from   the   user/trunk   during   the   call   can   be   detected   and   the   received   Fax   will   be   sent   to   the   Email   address   configured  for  this  extension.  If  no  Email  address  can  be  found  for  the   user,  the  Fax  will  be  sent  to  the  default  Email  address  configured  in  

Fax  setting  page  under  web  UI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Fax/T.38.  

•  

Fax   Gateway:   If   selected,   the   UCM6100   can   support   conversation   and   processing   of   Fax   data   from   T.30   to   T.38   or   T.38   to   T.30.   This   feature  is  only  available  for  FXS  or  FXO  port.  

 

Table  44:  FXS  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Features  

Configure   the   Call   Forward   Unconditional   target   number.   If   not   configured,   the   Call   Forward   Unconditional   feature   is   deactivated.   The   default  setting  is  deactivated.  

Select   time   condition   for   Call   Forward   Unconditional.   CFU   takes   effect   only  during  the  selected  time  condition.  The  available  time  condition  are  

“Office   Time”,   “Out   of   Office   Time”,   “Holiday”,   “Out   of   Holiday”,   “Out   of  

Office  Time  or  Holiday”  and  “Specific”.    

Note:  

•  

“Specific”  has  higher  priority  to  “Office  Times”  if  there  is  a  conflict  in   terms  of  time  period.  

•  

Specific   time   can   be   configured   on   the   bottom   of   the   extension   configuration  dialog.  Scroll  down  the  add  Time  Condition  for  specific   time.  

•  

Office  Time  and  Holiday  could  be  configured  on  page  Settings-­>Time  

Settings-­>Office  Time/Holiday  page.  

Configure  the  Call  Forward  No  Answer  target  number.  If  not  configured,   the  Call  Forward  No  Answer  feature  is  deactivated.  The  default  setting  is   deactivated.  

Select   time   condition   for   Call   Forward   No   Answer.   The   available   time   condition   are   “Office   Time”,   “Out   of   Office   Time”,   “Holiday”,   “Out   of  

Holiday”,  “Out  of  Office  Time  or  Holiday”  and  “Specific”.    

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  134  of  304    

 

Call  Forward  Busy  

CFB  Time  Condition  

CC  Settings  

Enable  CC  

Ring  Simultaneously  

Ring  Simultaneously  

External  Number  

Time  Condition  for  Ring  

Simultaneously  

Other  Settings  

Ring  Timeout  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

 

Note:  

•  

“Specific”  has  higher  priority  to  “Office  Times”  if  there  is  a  conflict  in   terms  of  time  period.  

•  

Specific   time   can   be   configured   on   the   bottom   of   the   extension   configuration  dialog.  Scroll  down  the  add  Time  Condition  for  specific   time.  

•  

Office  Time  and  Holiday  could  be  configured  on  page  Settings-­>Time  

Settings-­>Office  Time/Holiday  page.  

Configure  the  Call  Forward  Busy  target  number.  If  not  configured,  the  Call  

Forward  Busy  feature  is  deactivated.  The  default  setting  is  deactivated.  

Select  time  condition  for  Call  Forward  Busy.  The  available  time  condition   are  “Office  Time”,  “Out  of  Office  Time”,  “Holiday”,  “Out  of  Holiday”,  “Out  of  

Office  Time  or  Holiday”  and  “Specific”.    

Note:  

•  

“Specific”  has  higher  priority  to  “Office  Times”  if  there  is  a  conflict  in   terms  of  time  period.  

•  

Specific   time   can   be   configured   on   the   bottom   of   the   extension   configuration  dialog.  Scroll  down  the  add  Time  Condition  for  specific   time.  

•  

Office  Time  and  Holiday  could  be  configured  on  page  Settings-­>Time  

Settings-­>Office  Time/Holiday  page.  

If  enabled,  UCM6100  will  automatically  alert  this  extension  when  a  called   party  is  available,  given  that  a  previous  call  to  that  party  failed  for  some   reason.  

Enable  this  option  to  have  an  external  number  ring  simultaneously  along   with  the  extension.  

If  a  register  trunk  is  used  for  outbound,  the  register  number  will  be  used  to   be  displayed  for  the  external  number  as  caller  ID  number.  

Set  the  external  number  to  be  rang   simultaneously.  ‘-­’  is  the  connection   character  which  will  be  ignored.  

Ring  the  external  number  simultaneously  along  with  the  extension  on  the   basis  of  this  time  condition.  

Configure   the   number   of   seconds   to   ring   the   user   before   the   call   is   forwarded   to   voicemail   (voicemail   is   enabled)   or   hang   up   (voicemail   is   disabled).  If  not  specified,  the  default  ring  timeout  is  60  seconds  on  the  

UCM6100,   which   can   be   configured   in   the   global   ring   timeout   setting  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  135  of  304    

 

 

Auto  Record  

Skip  Trunk  Auth  

Time  Condition  for  Skip  Trunk  

Auth  

Dial  Trunk  Password   under  web  GUI-­>Internal  Options-­>IVR  Prompt:  General  Preference.  The   valid  range  is  between  5  seconds  and  600  seconds.  

Note:  

If  the  end  point  also  has  a  ring  timeout  configured,  the  actual  ring  timeout   used  is  the  shortest  time  set  by  either  device.  

Enable  automatic  recording  for  the  calls  using  this  extension.  The  default   setting   is   disabled.   The   recording   files   can   be   accessed   under   web  

GUI-­>CDR-­>Recording  Files.  

•  

If   set   to   “Yes”,   users   can   skip   entering   the   password   when   making   outbound  calls.    

•  

If   set   to   “By   Time”,   users   can   skip   entering   the   password   when   making  outbound  calls  during  the  selected  time  condition.    

•  

If  set  to  “No”,  users  will  be  asked  to  enter  the  password  when  making   outbound  calls.  

If   “Skip   Trunk   Auth”   is   set   to   “By   Time”,   select   a   time   condition   during   which  users  can  skip  entering  password  when  making  outbound  calls.  

Configure  personal  password  when  making  outbound  calls  via  trunk.  

 

Table  45:  FXS  Extension  Configuration  Parameters  -­  Specific  Time  

Specific  Time

 

Time  Condition  

 

Click  to  add  Time  Condition  to  configure  specific  time  for  this  extension.  

 

BATCH  ADD  EXTENSIONS  

BATCH  ADD  SIP  EXTENSIONS  

 

In  order  to  add  multiple  SIP  extensions,  BATCH  add  can  be  used  to  create  standardized  SIP  extension   accounts.  However,  unique  extension  user  name  can’t  be  set  using  BATCH  add.  

Under  Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call  Routes-­>Extensions,  click  on  "Batch  Add  Extensions"-­>"Batch  Add  

 

 

SIP  Extensions".  

Table  46:  Batch  Add  SIP  Extension  Parameters  

General

 

Start  Extension  

Configure  the  starting  extension  number  of  the  batch  of  extensions  to  be   added.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  136  of  304    

 

Create  Number  

Permission  

Enable  Voicemail  

SIP/IAX  Password  

Voicemail  Password  

Ring  Timeout  

Auto  Record  

Skip  Voicemail  Password  

Verification  

Music  On  Hold  

Enable  LDAP  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

 

Specify  the  number  of  extensions  to  be  added.  The  default  setting  is  5.  

Assign   permission   level   to   the   user.   The   available   permissions   are  

"Internal",  "Local",  "National"  and  "International"  from  the  lowest  level  to   the  highest  level.  The  default  setting  is  "Internal".  

Note:  

Users  need  to  have  the  same  level  as  or  higher  level  than  an  outbound   rule's  privilege  in  order  to  make  outbound  calls  from  this  rule.  

Enable  Voicemail  for  the  user.  The  default  setting  is  "Yes".  

Configure   the   SIP/IAX   password   for   the   users.   Three   options   are   available  to  create  password  for  the  batch  of  extensions.  

•  

User  Random  Password.  

A   random   secure   password   will   be   automatically   generated.   It   is   recommended  to  use  this  password  for  security  purpose.  

•  

Use  Extension  as  Password.  

•  

Enter  a  password  to  be  used  on  all  the  extensions  in  the  batch.  

Configure  Voicemail  password  (digits  only)  for  the  users.  

•  

User  Random  Password.    

A   random   password   in   digits   will   be   automatically   generated.   It   is   recommended  to  use  this  password  for  security  purpose.  

•  

Use  Extension  as  Password.  

•  

Enter  a  password  to  be  used  on  all  the  extensions  in  the  batch.  

Configure   the   number   of   seconds   to   ring   the   user   before   the   call   is   forwarded   to   voicemail   (voicemail   is   enabled)   or   hang   up   (voicemail   is   disabled).  If  not  specified,  the  default  ring  timeout  is  60  seconds  on  the  

UCM6100,   which   can   be   configured   in   the   global   ring   timeout   setting   under   web   GUI-­>Internal   Options-­>IVR   Prompt:   General   Preference.  

The  valid  range  is  between  5  seconds  and  600  seconds.  

Note:  

If  the  end  point  also  has  a  ring  timeout  configured,  the  actual  ring  timeout   used  is  the  shortest  time  set  by  either  device.  

Enable  automatic  recording  for  the  calls  using  this  extension.  The  default   setting   is   disabled.   The   recording   files   can   be   accessed   under   web  

GUI-­>CDR-­>Recording  Files.  

When  user  dials  voicemail  code,  the  password  verification  IVR  is  skipped.  

If  enabled,  this  would  allow  one-­button  voicemail  access.  By  default  this   option  is  disabled.  

Select  which  Music  On  Hold  class  to  suggest  to  extensions  when  putting   them  on  hold.  

If  enabled,  the  batch  added  extensions  will  be  added  to  LDAP  Phonebook  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  137  of  304    

 

SIP  Settings

NAT  

Can  Reinvite  

DTMF  Mode  

Insecure  

TEL  URI  

Other  Settings

 

SRTP  

Fax  Mode  

 

Enable  Keep-­alive  

Keep-­alive  Frequency  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

 

PBX   list;;   if   disabled,   the   batch   added   extensions   will   be   skipped   when   creating  LDAP  Phonebook.  

Use   NAT   when   the   PBX   is   on   a   public   IP   communicating   with   devices   hidden   behind   NAT   (e.g.,   broadband   router).   If   there   is   one-­way   audio   issue,  usually  it's  related  to  NAT  configuration  or  Firewall's  support  of  SIP   and  RTP  ports.  The  default  setting  is  enabled.  

By   default,   the   PBX   will   route   the   media   steams   from   SIP   endpoints   through   itself.   If   enabled,   the   PBX   will   attempt   to   negotiate   with   the   endpoints  to  route  the  media  stream  directly.  It  is  not  always  possible  for   the   PBX   to   negotiate   endpoint-­to-­endpoint   media   routing.   The   default   setting  is  "No".  

Select   DTMF   mode   for   the   user   to   send   DTMF.   The   default   setting   is  

"RFC2833".   If   "Info"   is   selected,   SIP   INFO   message   will   be   used.   If  

"Inband"  is  selected,  64-­kbit  codec  PCMU  and  PCMA  are  required.  When  

"Auto"   is   selected,   RFC2833   will   be   used   if   offered,   otherwise   "Inband"   will  be  used.  

•  

Port:   Allow   peers   matching   by   IP   address   without   matching   port   number.  

•  

Very:   Allow   peers   matching   by   IP   address   without   matching   port   number.   Also,   authentication   of   incoming   INVITE   messages   is   not   required.  

•  

No:  Normal  IP-­based  peers  matching  and  authentication  of  incoming  

INVITE.  

The  default  setting  is  "Port".  

If  enabled,  empty  SDP  packet  will  be  sent  to  the  SIP  server  periodically  to   keep  the  NAT  port  open.  The  default  setting  is  "Yes".  

Configure  the  number  of  seconds  for  the  host  to  be  up  for  Keep-­alive.  The   default  setting  is  60  seconds.  

If   the   end   device/phone   has   an   assigned   PSTN   telephone   number,   this   field  should  be  set  to  "User=Phone".  Then  a  "User=Phone"  parameter  will   be   attached   to   the   Request-­Line   and   TO   header   in   the   SIP   request   to   indicate  the  E.164  number.  If  set  to  "Enable",  "Tel:"  will  be  used  instead  of  

"SIP:"  in  the  SIP  request.  The  default  setting  is  disabled.  

Enable  SRTP  for  the  call.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

Select  Fax  mode  for  this  user.  The  default  setting  is  “None”.  

•  

None:  Disable  Fax.  

•  

Fax   Detect:   Fax   signal   from   the   user/trunk   during   the   call   can   be  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  138  of  304    

 

 

Strategy  

Skip  Trunk  Auth  

Codec  Preference   detected   and   the   received   Fax   will   be   sent   to   the   Email   address   configured  for  this  extension.  If  no  Email  address  can  be  found  for  the   user,  the  Fax  will  be  sent  to  the  default  Email  address  configured  in  

Fax  setting  page  under  web  UI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Fax/T.38.  

This   option   controls   how   the   extension   can   be   used   on   devices   within   different  types  of  network.  

•  

Allow  All  

Device  in  any  network  can  register  this  extension.  

•  

Local  Subnet  Only  

Only   the   user   in   specific   subnet   can   register   this   extension.   Up   to   three  subnet  addresses  can  be  specified.  

•  

A  Specific  IP  Address.    

Only  the  device  on  the  specific  IP  address  can  register  this  extension.  

The  default  setting  is  "Allow  All".  

If   enable   “All”,   users   do   not   need   to   enter   password   when   making   an   outbound  call.  If  enable  “Follow  Me”,  the  user  can  dial  out  via  follow  me   without  password.  

Select  audio  and  video  codec  for  the  extension.  The  available  codecs  are:  

PCMU,   PCMA,   GSM,   AAL2-­G.726-­32,   G.722,   G.729,   G.723,   iLBC,  

ADPCM,  LPC10,  H.264,  H.263  and  H.263p.  

 

BATCH  ADD  IAX  EXTENSIONS  

 

Under  Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call  Routes-­>Extensions,  click  on  "Batch  Add  Extensions"-­>"Batch  Add  

IAX  Extensions".  

Table  47:  Batch  Add  IAX  Extension  Parameters  

General

 

Start  Extension  

Create  Number  

Permission  

Enable  Voicemail  

Configure  the  starting  extension  number  of  the  batch  of  extensions  to  be   added.  

Specify  the  number  of  extensions  to  be  added.  The  default  setting  is  5.  

Assign   permission   level   to   the   user.   The   available   permissions   are  

"Internal",  "Local",  "National"  and  "International"  from  the  lowest  level  to   the  highest  level.  The  default  setting  is  "Internal".  

Note:  

Users  need  to  have  the  same  level  as  or  higher  level  than  an  outbound   rule's  privilege  in  order  to  make  outbound  calls  from  this  rule.  

Enable  Voicemail  for  the  user.  The  default  setting  is  "Yes".  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  139  of  304    

 

SIP/IAX  Password  

Voicemail  Password  

Ring  Timeout  

Auto  Record  

Skip  Voicemail  Password  

Verification  

Music  On  Hold  

Enable  LDAP  

IAX  Settings

 

Max  Number  of  Calls  

Require  Call  Token  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

 

Configure   the   SIP/IAX   password   for   the   users.   Three   options   are   available  to  create  password  for  the  batch  of  extensions.  

•  

User  Random  Password.  

A   random   secure   password   will   be   automatically   generated.   It   is   recommended  to  use  this  password  for  security  purpose.  

•  

Use  Extension  as  Password.  

•  

Enter  a  password  to  be  used  on  all  the  extensions  in  the  batch.  

Configure  Voicemail  password  (digits  only)  for  the  users.  

•  

User  Random  Password.    

A   random   password   in   digits   will   be   automatically   generated.   It   is   recommended  to  use  this  password  for  security  purpose.  

•  

Use  Extension  as  Password.  

•  

Enter  a  password  to  be  used  on  all  the  extensions  in  the  batch.  

Configure   the   number   of   seconds   to   ring   the   user   before   the   call   is   forwarded   to   voicemail   (voicemail   is   enabled)   or   hang   up   (voicemail   is   disabled).  If  not  specified,  the  default  ring  timeout  is  60  seconds  on  the  

UCM6100,   which   can   be   configured   in   the   global   ring   timeout   setting   under   web   GUI-­>Internal   Options-­>IVR   Prompt:   General   Preference.  

The  valid  range  is  between  5  seconds  and  600  seconds.  

Note:  

If  the  end  point  also  has  a  ring  timeout  configured,  the  actual  ring  timeout   used  is  the  shortest  time  set  by  either  device.  

Enable  automatic  recording  for  the  calls  using  this  extension.  The  default   setting   is   disabled.   The   recording   files   can   be   accessed   under   web  

GUI-­>CDR-­>Recording  Files.  

When  user  dials  voicemail  code,  the  password  verification  IVR  is  skipped.  

If  enabled,  this  would  allow  one-­button  voicemail  access.  By  default  this   option  is  disabled.  

Select  which  Music  On  Hold  class  to  suggest  to  extensions  when  putting   them  on  hold.  

If  enabled,  the  batch  added  extensions  will  be  added  to  LDAP  Phonebook  

PBX   list;;   if   disabled,   the   batch   added   extensions   will   be   skipped   when   creating  LDAP  Phonebook.  

Configure   the   maximum   number   of   calls   allowed   for   each   remote   IP   address.  

Configure  to  enable/disable  requiring  call  token.  If  set  to  "Auto",  it  might   lock   out   users   who   depend   on   backward   compatibility   when   peer   authentication   credentials   are   shared   between   physical   endpoints.   The  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  140  of  304    

 

  default  setting  is  "Yes".  

Other  Settings

 

SRTP  

Fax  Mode  

Strategy  

Skip  Trunk  Auth  

Codec  Preference  

Enable  SRTP  for  the  call.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

Select  Fax  Mode  for  this  user.  The  default  setting  is  “None”.  

•  

None:  Disable  Fax.  

•  

Fax   Detect:   Fax   signal   from   the   user/trunk   during   the   call   can   be   detected   and   the   received   Fax   will   be   sent   to   the   Email   address   configured  for  this  extension.  If  no  Email  address  can  be  found  for  the   user,  the  Fax  will  be  sent  to  the  default  Email  address  configured  in  

Fax  setting  page  under  web  UI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Fax/T.38.  

This   option   controls   how   the   extension   can   be   used   on   devices   within   different  types  of  network.  

•  

Allow  All  

Device  in  any  network  can  register  this  extension.  

•  

Local  Subnet  Only  

Only   the   user   in   specific   subnet   can   register   this   extension.   Up   to   three  subnet  addresses  can  be  specified.  

•  

A  Specific  IP  Address.    

Only  the  device  on  the  specific  IP  address  can  register  this  extension.  

The  default  setting  is  "Allow  All".  

If   enable   “All”,   users   do   not   need   to   enter   password   when   making   an   outbound   call.   If   enable   “Follow   Me”,   the   call   can   dial   out   via   follow   me   without  password.  

Select  audio  and  video  codec  for  the  extension.  The  available  codecs  are:  

PCMU,   PCMA,   GSM,   AAL2-­G.726-­32,   G.722,   G.729,   G.723,   iLBC,  

ADPCM,  LPC10,  H.264,  H.263  and  H.263p.  

 

SEARCH  AND  EDIT  EXTENSION  

 

All   the   UCM6100   extensions   are   listed   under   Web   GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call   Routes-­>Extensions,   with   status,   Extension,   CallerID   Name,   Technology   (SIP,   IAX   and   FXS),   IP   and   Port.   Each   extension   has   a   checkbox   for   users   to   "Modify   Selected   Extensions"   or   "Delete   Selected   Extensions".   Also,   options  

"Edit” ,  "Reboot"     and  "Delete"     are  available  per  extension.  User  can  search  an  extension  by   specifying  the  extension  number  to  find  an  extension  quickly.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  141  of  304    

 

 

Figure  81:  Manage  Extensions  

 

•  

Status  

Users  can  see  the  following  icon  for  each  extension  to  indicate  the  SIP  status.  

    Green:       Free  

    Blue:      

    Yellow:      

    Grey:      

Ringing  

In  Use  

Unavailable  (the  extension  is  not  registered  or  disabled  on  the  PBX)  

 

•  

Edit  single  extension  

Click  on   to  start  editing  the  extension  parameters.  

 

•  

Reboot  the  user  

Click  on     to  send  NOTIFY  reboot  event  to  the  device  which  has  an  UCM6100  extension  already   registered.  To  successfully  reboot  the  user,  "Zero  Config"  needs  to  be  enabled  on  the  UCM6100  web  

GUI-­>PBX-­>Zero  Config-­>Auto  Provisioning  Settings.  

 

•  

Delete  single  extension  

Click  on     to  delete  the  extension.  Or  select  the  checkbox  of  the  extension  and  then  click  on  "Delete  

 

Selected  Extensions".  

•  

Modify  selected  extensions  

Select   the   checkbox   for   the   extension(s).   Then   click   on   "Modify   Selected   Extensions"   to   edit   the  

  extensions  in  a  batch.  

 

•  

Delete  selected  extensions  

Select   the   checkbox   for   the   extension(s).   Then   click   on   "Delete   Selected   Extensions"   to   delete   the   extension(s).  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  142  of  304    

 

EXPORT  EXTENSIONS  

 

The  extensions  configured  on  the  UCM6100  can  be  exported  to  csv  format  file  with  selected  technology  

"SIP",  "IAX"  or  "FXS".  Click  on  "Export  Extensions"  button  and  select  technology  in  the  prompt  below.  

 

 

Figure  82:  Export  Extensions  

 

The  exported  csv  file  can  be  serve  as  a  template  for  users  to  fill  in  desired  extension  information  to  be  

  imported  to  the  UCM6100.  

IMPORT  EXTENSIONS  

 

The  capability  to  import  extensions  to  the  UCM6100  provides  users  flexibility  to  batch  add  extensions  with  

  similar  or  different  configuration  quickly  into  the  PBX  system.  

1.   Export  extension  csv  file  from  the  UCM6100  by  clicking  on  "Export  Extensions"  button.  

2.   Fill  up  the  extension  information  you  would  like  in  the  exported  csv  template.  

3.   Click  on  "Import  Extensions"  button.  The  following  dialog  will  be  prompted.  

 

Figure  83:  Import  Extensions  

4.   Select  the  option  in  "On  Duplicate  Extension"  to  define  how  the  duplicate  extension(s)  in  the  imported  

  csv  file  should  be  treated  by  the  PBX.  

•  

Skip:  Duplicate  extensions  in  the  csv  file  will  be  skipped.  The  PBX  will  keep  the  current  extension  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  143  of  304    

 

information  as  previously  configured  without  change.  

•  

Delete   and   Recreate:   The   current   extension   previously   configured   will   be   deleted   and   the   duplicate  extension  in  the  csv  file  will  be  loaded  to  the  PBX.  

•  

Update  Information:  The  current  extension  previously  configured  in  the  PBX  will  be  kept.  However,   if  the  duplicate  extension  in  the  csv  file  has  different  configuration  for  any  options,  it  will  override   the  configuration  for  those  options  in  the  extension.  

5.   Click  on   to  select  csv  file  from  local  directory  in  the  PC.  

6.   Click  on  "Save"  to  import  the  csv  file.  

 

7.   Click  on  "Apply  Changes"  to  apply  the  imported  file  on  the  UCM6100.  

EMAIL  TO  USER  

 

Once  the  extensions  are  created  with  Email  address,  the  PBX  administrator  can  click  on  button  “Email  To  

User”  to  send  the  account  registration  and  configuration  information  to  the  user.  Please  make  sure  Email   setting   under   web   UI-­>Settings-­>Email   Settings   is   properly   configured   and   tested   on   the   UCM6100  

  before  using  “Email  To  User”.  

When  click  on  “Email  To  User”  button,  the  following  message  will  be  prompted  in  the  web  page.  Click  on  

OK  to  confirm  sending  the  account  information  to  all  users’  Email  addresses.  

 

 

Figure  84:  Email  To  User  -­  Prompt  Information  

 

The  user  will  receive  Email  including  account  registration  information  and  LDAP  configuration.  A  QR  code  

  is   also   generated   for   Mobile   applications   to   scan   it   and   get   automatically   provisioned.   QR   code   provisioning  is  supported  on  Grandstream  Softphone  GS  Wave  Android

TM

 application.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  144  of  304    

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Figure  85:  Account  Registration  Information  and  QR  Code  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

 

 

Figure  86:  LDAP  Client  Information  and  QR  Code  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  145  of  304    

 

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  146  of  304    

 

 

TRUNKS  

ANALOG  TRUNKS  

 

 

Go  to  Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call  Routes-­>Analog  Trunks  to  add  and  edit  analog  trunks.  

•  

Click  on  "Create  New  Analog  Trunk"  to  add  a  new  analog  trunk.  

•  

Click  on     to  edit  the  analog  trunk.  

 

•  

Click  on     to  delete  the  analog  trunk.  

ANALOG  TRUNK  CONFIGURATION  

 

 

The  analog  trunk  options  are  listed  in  the  table  below.  

Table  48:  Analog  Trunk  Configuration  Parameters  

Channels  

Trunk  Name  

SLA  Mode  

Barge  Allowed  

Hold  Access  

Select  the  channel  for  the  analog  trunk.  

•  

UCM6102:  2  channels  

•  

UCM6104:  4  channels  

•  

UCM6108:  8  channels  

•  

UCM6116:  16  channels  

Specify  a  unique  label  to  identify  the  trunk  when  listed  in  outbound  rules,   incoming  rules  and  etc.  

Enable   this   option   to   satisfy   two   primary   use   cases,   which   include   emulating  a  simple  key  system  and  creating  shared  extensions  on  a  PBX.  

Enable  SLA  Mode  will  disable  polarity  reversal.  

The   barge   option   specifies   whether   or   not   other   stations   are   allowed   to   join   a   call   in   progress   on   this   trunk.   If   enabled,   the   other   stations   can   press  the  line  button  to  join  the  call.  The  default  setting  is  Yes.  

The  hold  option  specifies  hold  permissions  for  this  trunk.  If  set  to  “Open”,   any  station  can  place  this  trunk  on  hold  and  any  other  station  is  allowed  to   retrieve  the  call.  If  set  to  “Private”,  only  the  station  that  places  the  call  on   hold  can  retrieve  the  call.  The  default  setting  is  Yes.    

Advanced  Options

 

Enable  Polarity  Reversal  

If   enabled,   a   polarity   reversal   will   be   marked   as   received   when   an   outgoing   call   is   answered   by   the   remote   party.   For   some   countries,   a  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  147  of  304    

 

 

Polarity  on  Answer  Delay  

Current  Disconnect  Threshold  

(ms)  

Ring  Timeout  

RX  Gain  

TX  Gain  

Use  CallerID  

Fax  Mode  

Caller  ID  Scheme  

FXO  Dial  Delay(ms)  

Auto  Record  

Disable  This  Trunk   polarity   reversal   is   used   for   signaling   the   disconnection   of   a   phone   line   and   the   call   will   be   considered   as   “hangup”   on   a   polarity   reversal.   The   default  setting  is  “No”.  

When  FXO  port  answers  the  call,  FXS  may  send  a  Polarity  Reversal.  If   this  interval  is  shorter  than  the  value  of  “Polarity  on  Answer  Delay”,  the  

Polarity   Reversal   will   be   ignored.   Otherwise,   the   FXO   will   onhook   to   disconnect  the  call.  The  default  setting  is  600ms.  

This  is  the  periodic  time  (in  ms)  that  the  UCM6100  will  use  to  check  on  a   voltage  drop  in  the  line.  The  default  setting  is  200.  The  valid  range  is  50  to  

3000.  

Configure   the   ring   timeout   (in   ms).   Trunk   (FXO)   devices   must   have   a   timeout  to  determine  if  there  was  a  hangup  before  the  line  is  answered.  

This   value   can   be   used   to   configure   how   long   it   takes   before   the  

UCM6100  considers  a  non-­ringing  line  with  hangup  activity.  The  default   setting  is  8000.  

Configure  the  RX  gain  for  the  receiving  channel  of  analog  FXO  port.  The   valid  range  is  from  -­13.5  (dB)  to  +  12.0  (dB).  The  default  setting  is  0.  

Configure   the   TX   gain   for   the   transmitting   channel   of   analog   FXO   port.  

The  valid  range  is  from  -­13.5  (dB)  to  +  12.0  (dB).  The  default  setting  is  0.  

Configure  to  enable  CallerID  detection.  The  default  setting  is  “Yes”.  

There   are   three   options   available   in   Fax   Mode.   The   default   setting   is  

“None”.  

•  

None:  Disable  Fax.  

•  

Fax   Detect:   Fax   signal   from   the   user/trunk   during   the   call   can   be   detected   and   the   received   Fax   will   be   sent   to   the   Email   address   configured  for  this  extension.  If  no  Email  address  can  be  found  for  the   user,  the  Fax  will  be  sent  to  the  default  Email  address  configured  in  

Fax  setting  page  under  web  UI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Fax/T.38.  

•  

Fax   Gateway:   If   selected,   the   UCM6100   can   support   conversation   and   processing   of   Fax   data   from   T.30   to   T.38   or   T.38   to   T.30.   This   feature  is  only  available  for  FXS  or  FXO  port.  

Select   the   Caller   ID   scheme   for   this   trunk.   The   default   setting   is  

“Bellcore/Telcordia”.  

Configure   the   time   interval   between   off-­hook   and   first   dialed   digit   for   outbound  calls.  

Enable   automatic   recording   for   the   calls   using   this   trunk.   The   default   setting   is   disabled.   The   recording   files   can   be   accessed   under   web  

GUI-­>CDR-­>Recording  Files.  

If  selected,  the  trunk  will  be  disabled.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  148  of  304    

 

DAHDI  Out  Line  Selection  

Tone  Settings

Congestion  Detection  

Congestion  Count  

Tone  Country  

 

Busy  Detection  

Busy  Tone  Count  

Busy  Tone  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

 

This  is  to  implement  analog  trunk  outbound  line  selection  strategy.  Three   options  are  available:  

•  

Ascend  

When  the  call  goes  out  from  this  analog  trunk,  it  will  always  try  to  use   the  first  idle  FXO  port.  The  port  order  that  the  call  will  use  to  go  out   would  be  port  1-­>port  2-­>port  10-­>port  16.  Every  time  it  will  start  with   port  1  (if  it's  idle).  

•  

Poll  

When  the  call  goes  out  from  this  analog  trunk,  it  will  use  the  port  that   is  not  used  last  time.  And  it  will  always  use  the  port  in  the  order  of  port  

1-­>2-­>10-­>16-­>1-­>2-­>10-­>16-­>1-­>2-­>10-­>16...,   following   the   last   port  being  used.  

•  

Descend  

When  the  call  goes  out  from  this  analog  trunk,  it  will  always  try  to  use   the  last  idle  FXO  port.  The  port  order  that  the  call  will  use  to  go  out   would  be  port  16-­>port  10-­>port  2-­>port  1.  Every  time  it  will  start  with   port  16  (if  it's  idle).  

 

The  default  setting  is  “Ascend”  mode.  

Busy   Detection   is   used   to   detect   far   end   hangup   or   for   detecting   busy   signal.  The  default  setting  is  "Yes".  

If   "Busy   Detection"   is   enabled,   users   can   specify   the   number   of   busy   tones   to   be   played   before   hanging   up.   The   default   setting   is   2.   Better   results   might   be   achieved   if   set   to   4,   6   or   even   8.   Please   note   that   the   higher   the   number   is,   the   more   time   is   needed   to   hangup   the   channel.  

However,  this  might  lower  the  probability  to  get  random  hangup.  

Congestion   detection   is   used   to   detect   far   end   congestion   signal.   The   default  setting  is  "Yes".  

If   "Congestion   Detection"   is   enabled,   users   can   specify   the   number   of   congestion  tones  to  wait  for.  The  default  setting  is  2.  

Select  the  country  for  tone  settings.  If  "Custom"  is  selected,  users  could   manually  configure  the  values  for  Busy  Tone  and  Congestion  Tone.  The   default  setting  is  "United  States  of  America  (USA)".  

Syntax:    

f1=val[@level][,f2=val[@level]],c=on1/off1[-­on2/off2[-­on3/off3]];;  

Frequencies  are  in  Hz  and  cadence  on  and  off  are  in  ms.  

Frequencies  Range:  [0,  4000)  

Busy  Level  Range:  (-­300,  0)  

Cadence  Range:  [0,  16383].  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  149  of  304    

 

 

Congestion  Tone  

PSTN  Detection  

Select  Tone  Country  "Custom"  to  manually  configure  Busy  Tone  value.  

Default  value:  

[email protected]­50,[email protected]­50,c=500/500  

Syntax:    

f1=val[@level][,f2=val[@level]],c=on1/off1[-­on2/off2[-­on3/off3]];;  

Frequencies  are  in  Hz  and  cadence  on  and  off  are  in  ms.  

Frequencies  Range:  [0,  4000)  

Busy  Level  Range:  (-­300,  0)  

Cadence  Range:  [0,  16383].  

Select  Tone  Country  "Custom"  to  manually  configure  Busy  Tone  value.  

Default  value:  

[email protected]­50,[email protected]­50,c=250/250  

Click  on  "Detect"  to  detect  the  busy  tone,  Polarity  Reversal  and  Current  

Disconnect  by  PSTN.  Before  the  detecting,  please  make  sure  there  are   more  than  one  channel  configured  and  working  properly.  If  the  detection   has  busy  tone,  the  "Tone  Country"  option  will  be  set  as  "Custom".  

 

PSTN  DETECTION  

 

The  UCM6100  provides  PSTN  detection  function  to  help  users  detect  the  busy  tone,  Polarity  Reversal  and  

Current  Disconnect  by  making  a  call  from  the  PSTN  line  to  another  destination.  The  detecting  call  will  be   answered  and  up  for  about  1  minute.  Once  done,  the  detecting  result  will  show  and  can  be  used  for  the  

UCM6100  settings.  

 

1.   Go  to  UCM6100  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call  Routes-­>Analog  Trunks  page.  

2.   Click  to  edit  the  analog  trunk  created  for  the  FXO  port.    

3.   In  the  dialog  window  to  edit  the  analog  trunk,  go  to  "Tone  Settings"  section  and  there  are  two  methods   to  set  the  busy  tone.  

 

•  

Tone  Country.  The  default  setting  is  "United  States  of  America  (USA)".  

•  

PSTN  Detection.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  150  of  304    

 

 

Figure  87:  UCM6100  FXO  Tone  Settings  

 

4.   Click  on  "Detect"  to  start  PSTN  detection.  

 

 

Figure  88:  UCM6100  PSTN  Detection  

 

•  

If  there  are  two  FXO  ports  connected  to  PSTN  lines,  use  the  following  settings  for  auto-­detection.  

 

Detect  Model:  Auto  Detect.  

Source  Channel:  The  source  channel  to  be  detected.  

Destination  Channel:  The  channel  to  help  detecting.  For  example,  the  second  FXO  port.  

 

Destination   Number:   The   number   to   be   dialed   for   detecting.   This   number   must   be   the   actual  

PSTN  number  for  the  FXO  port  used  as  the  destination  channel.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  151  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  89:  UCM6100  PSTN  Detection:  Auto  Detect  

 

•  

If  there  is  only  one  FXO  port  connected  to  PSTN  line,  use  the  following  settings  for  auto-­detection.  

 

Figure  90:  UCM6100  PSTN  Detection:  Semi-­Auto  Detect  

 

Detect  Model:  Semi-­auto  Detect.  

Source  Channel:  The  source  channel  to  be  detected.  

 

Destination  Number:  The  number  to  be  dialed  for  detecting.  This  number  could  be  a  cell  phone   number  or  other  PSTN  number  that  can  be  reached  from  the  source  channel  PSTN  number.  

5.   Click  "Detect"  to  start  detecting.  The  source  channel  will  initiate  a  call  to  the  destination  number.  For  

"Auto  Detect",  the  call  will  be  automatically  answered.  For  "Semi-­auto  Detect",  the  UCM6100  web  GUI  

 

 

  will  display  prompt  to  notify  the  user  to  answer  or  hang  up  the  call  to  finish  the  detecting  process.  

6.   Once   done,   the   detected   result   will   show.   Users   could   save   the   detecting   result   as   the   current  

UCM6100  settings.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  152  of  304    

 

 

Table  49:  PSTN  Detection  for  Analog  Trunk  

Detect  Model  

Select  "Auto  Detect"  or  "Semi-­auto  Detect"  for  PSTN  detection.  

•  

Auto  Detect  

Please   make   sure   two   or   more   channels   are   connected   to   the  

UCM6100  and  in  idle  status  before  starting  the  detection.  During  the   detection,  one  channel  will  be  used  as  caller  (Source  Channel)  and   another   channel   will   be   used   as   callee   (Destination   Channel).   The  

UCM6100  will  control  the  call  to  be  established  and  hang  up  between   caller  and  callee  to  finish  the  detection.  

•  

Semi-­auto  Detect  

Semi-­auto   detection   requires   answering   or   hanging   up   the   call   manually.   Please   make   sure   one   channel   is   connected   to   the  

UCM6100  and  in  idle  status  before  starting  the  detection.  During  the   detection,  source  channel  will  be  used  as  caller  and  send  the  call  to   the   configured   Destination   Number.   Users   will   then   need   follow   the   prompts  in  web  GUI  to  help  finish  the  detection.  

The  default  setting  is  "Auto  Detect".  

Select  the  channel  to  be  detected.  

Select  the  channel  to  help  detect  when  "Auto  Detect"  is  used.  

Source  Channel  

Destination  Channel  

Destination  Number   Configure  the  number  to  be  called  to  help  the  detection.  

 

 

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

Note:  

•  

The  PSTN  detection  process  will  keep  the  call  up  for  about  1  minute.  

•  

If  "Semi-­auto  Detect'  is  used,  please  pick  up  the  call  only  after  informed  from  the  web  GUI  prompt.  

•  

Once   the   detection   is   successful,   the   detected   parameters   "Busy   Tone",   "Polarity   Reversal"   and  

"Current   Disconnect   by   PSTN"   will   be   filled   into   the   corresponding   fields   in   the   analog   trunk  

 

configuration.  

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

VOIP  TRUNKS  

 

VoIP   trunks   can   be   configured   in   UCM6100   under   Web   GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call   Routes-­>VoIP   Trunks.  

Once   created,   the   VoIP   trunks   will   be   listed   with   Provider   Name,   Type,   Hostname/IP,   Username   and  

Options  to  edit/detect  the  trunk.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  153  of  304    

 

 

•  

Click  on  "Create  New  SIP  Trunk"  or  "Create  New  IAX  Trunk"  to  add  a  new  VoIP  trunk.  

•  

Click  on     to  configure  detailed  parameters  for  the  VoIP  trunk.  

•  

Click  on     to  configure  Direct  Outward  Dialing  (DOD)  for  the  SIP  Trunk.  

•  

Click  on     to  start  LDAP  Sync.  

•  

Click  on     to  delete  the  VoIP  trunk.  

 

For  VoIP  trunk  example,  please  refer  to  the  document  in  the  following  link:   http://www.grandstream.com/products/ucm_series/ucm65xx/documents/how_to_interconnect_multiple_uc

  m6510_using_peer_trunk.pdf

 

 

The  VoIP  trunk  options  are  listed  in  the  table  below.  

Table  50:  Create  New  SIP  Trunk  

Type  

Provider  Name  

Host  Name  

Select  the  VoIP  trunk  type.  

•  

Peer  SIP  Trunk  

•  

Register  SIP  Trunk  

Configure   a   unique   label   to   identify   this   trunk   when   listed   in   outbound   rules,  inbound  rules  and  etc.  

Configure   the   IP   address   or   URL   for   the   VoIP   provider’s   server   of   the   trunk.  

Keep  Original  CID  

Keep  Trunk  CID  

NAT  

Disable  This  Trunk  

TEL  URI  

Keep   the   CID   from   the   inbound   call   when   dialing   out.   This   setting   will   override  “Keep  Trunk  CID”  option.  Please  make  sure  that  the  peer  PBX  at   the  other  side  supports  to  match  user  entry  using  “username”  field  from   authentication  line.      

If  enabled,  the  trunk  CID  will  not  be  overridden  by  extension’s  CID  when   the  extension  has  CID  configured.  The  default  setting  is  “No”.  

Turn  on  this  setting  when  the  PBX  is  using  public  IP  and  communicating   with   devices   behind   NAT.   If   there   is   one-­way   audio   issue,   usually   it   is   related  to  NAT  configuration  or  SIP/RTP  port  support  on  the  firewall.  

If  checked,  the  trunk  will  be  disabled.  

 

Note:  

If  a  current  SIP  trunk  is  disabled,  UCM  will  send  UNREGISTER  message  

(REGISTER  message  with  expires=0)  to  the  SIP  provider.  

If  the  trunk  has  an  assigned  PSTN  telephone  number,  this  field  should  be   set  to  "User=Phone".  Then  a  "User=Phone"  parameter  will  be  attached  to  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  154  of  304    

 

Need  Registration  

Username  

Password  

Auth  ID  

Auto  Record  

 

Basic  Settings

 

Provider  Name  

Host  Name  

Transport  

Keep  Original  CID  

Keep  Trunk  CID  

NAT  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

  the  Request-­Line  and  TO  header  in  the  SIP  request  to  indicate  the  E.164   number.  If  set  to  "Enable",  "Tel:"  will  be  used  instead  of  "SIP:"  in  the  SIP   request.  The  default  setting  is  disabled.  

Select  whether  the  trunk  needs  to  register  on  the  external  server  or  not   when  "Register  SIP  Trunk"  type  is  selected.  The  default  setting  is  No.  

Enter   the   username   to   register   to   the   trunk   from   the   provider   when  

"Register  SIP  Trunk"  type  is  selected.  

Enter   the   password   to   register   to   the   trunk   from   the   provider   when  

"Register  SIP  Trunk"  is  selected.  

Enter  the  Authentication  ID  for  "Register  SIP  Trunk"  type.  

Enable   automatic   recording   for   the   calls   using   this   trunk   (for   SIP   trunk   only).  The  default  setting  is  disabled.  The  recording  files  can  be  accessed   under  web  GUI-­>CDR-­>Recording  Files.  

Table  51:  SIP  Register  Trunk  Configuration  Parameters  

Configure   a   unique   label   to   identify   this   trunk   when   listed   in   outbound   rules,  inbound  rules  and  etc.  

Configure   the   IP   address   or   URL   for   the   VoIP   provider’s   server   of   the   trunk.  

Configure  the  SIP  transport  protocol  to  be  used  in  this  trunk.  The  default   setting  is  "All  -­  UDP  Primary".  

•  

UDP  Only  

•  

TCP  Only  

•  

TLS  Only  

•  

All  -­  UDP  Primary:  UDP  is  the  primary  transport  protocol  when  all  the   other  SIP  transport  methods  are  available  too.  

•  

All  -­  TCP  Primary:  TCP  is  the  primary  transport  protocol  when  all  the   other  SIP  transport  methods  are  available  too.  

•  

All  –  TLS  Primary:  TLS  is  the  primary  transport  protocol  when  all  the   other  SIP  transport  methods  are  available  too.  

Keep   the   CID   from   the   inbound   call   when   dialing   out.   This   setting   will   override  “Keep  Trunk  CID”  option.  Please  make  sure  that  the  peer  PBX  at   the  other  side  supports  to  match  user  entry  using  “username”  field  from   authentication  line.      

If  enabled,  the  trunk  CID  will  not  be  overridden  by  extension’s  CID  when   the  extension  has  CID  configured.  The  default  setting  is  “No”.  

Turn  on  this  option  when  the  PBX  is  using  public  IP  and  communicating   with   devices   behind   NAT.   If   there   is   one-­way   audio   issue,   usually   it’s  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  155  of  304    

 

Disable  This  Trunk  

TEL  URI  

Need  Registration  

Username  

Password  

Auth  ID  

Auto  Record  

Advanced  Settings

Codec  Preference  

From  Domain  

From  User  

Send  PPI  Header  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

  related  to  NAT  configuration  or  SIP/RTP  port  configuration  on  the  firewall.  

 

If  selected,  the  trunk  will  be  disabled.  

Note:  

If  a  current  SIP  trunk  is  disabled,  UCM  will  send  UNREGISTER  message  

(REGISTER  message  with  expires=0)  to  the  SIP  provider.  

If  the  trunk  has  an  assigned  PSTN  telephone  number,  this  field  should  be   set  to  "User=Phone".  Then  a  "User=Phone"  parameter  will  be  attached  to   the  Request-­Line  and  TO  header  in  the  SIP  request  to  indicate  the  E.164   number.  If  set  to  "Enable",  "Tel:"  will  be  used  instead  of  "SIP:"  in  the  SIP   request.  The  default  setting  is  disabled.  

Select  whether  the  trunk  needs  to  register  on  the  external  server  or  not   when  "Register  SIP  Trunk"  type  is  selected.  The  default  setting  is  No.  

Enter   the   username   to   register   to   the   trunk   from   the   provider   when  

"Register  SIP  Trunk"  type  is  selected.  

Enter   the   password   to   register   to   the   trunk   from   the   provider   when  

"Register  SIP  Trunk"  is  selected.  

Enter  the  Authentication  ID  for  "Register  SIP  Trunk"  type.  

Enable   automatic   recording   for   the   calls   using   this   trunk   (for   SIP   trunk   only).  The  default  setting  is  disabled.  The  recording  files  can  be  accessed   under  web  GUI-­>CDR-­>Recording  Files.  

Select   audio   and   video   codec   for   the   VoIP   trunk.   The   available   codecs   are:  PCMU,  PCMA,  GSM,  AAL2-­G.726-­32,  G.726,  G.722,  G.729,  G.723,   iLBC,  ADPCM,  H.264,  H.263,  H.263p.  

Configure  the  actual  domain  name  where  the  extension  comes  from.  This   can  be  used  to  override  the  From  Header.  

For  example,  "trunk.UCM6100.provider.com"  is  the  From  Domain  in  From  

Header:  sip:[email protected]  

Configure   the   actual   user   name   of   the   extension.   This   can   be   used   to   override  the  From  Header.  There  are  cases  where  there  is  a  single  ID  for   registration  (single  trunk)  with  multiple  DIDs.  

For   example,   "1234567"   is   the   From   User   in   From   Header:   sip:[email protected]  

If   enabled,   the   SIP   INVITE   message   sent   to   the   trunk   will   contain   PPI  

 

(P-­Preferred-­Identity)  header.  The  default  setting  is  “No”.  

Note:  

“Send   PPI   Header”   and   “Send   PAI   Header”   cannot   be   enabled   at   the  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  156  of  304    

 

 

Send  PAI  Header  

Outbound  Proxy  Support  

Outbound  Proxy  

DID  Mode  

DTMF  Mode   same  time.  Only  one  of  the  two  headers  is  allowed  to  be  contained  in  the  

SIP  INVITE  message.  

If   enabled,   the   SIP   INVITE   message   sent   to   the   trunk   will   contain   PAI  

 

(P-­Asserted-­Identity)  header.  The  default  setting  is  “No”.  

Note:  

“Send   PPI   Header”   and   “Send   PAI   Header”   cannot   be   enabled   at   the   same  time.  Only  one  of  the  two  headers  is  allowed  to  be  contained  in  the  

SIP  INVITE  message.  

Select  to  enable  outbound  proxy  in  this  trunk.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

When  outbound  proxy  support  is  enabled,  enter  the  IP  address  or  URL  of   the  outbound  proxy.  

Configure  where  to  get  the  destination  ID  of  an  incoming  SIP  call,  from  

SIP  Request-­line  or  To-­header.  The  default  is  set  to  "Request-­line".  

Configure  the  default  DTMF  mode  when  sending  DTMF  on  this  trunk.  

•  

Default:   The   global   setting   of   DTMF   mode   will   be   used.   The   global   setting   for   DTMF   Mode   setting   is   under   web   UI-­>PBX-­>SIP  

Settings-­>ToS.  

•  

RFC2833:  Send  DTMF  using  RFC2833.  

•  

Info:  Send  DTMF  using  SIP  INFO  message.  

•  

Inband:  Send  DTMF  using  inband  audio.  This  requires  64  bit  codec,   i.e.,  PCMU  and  PCMA.  

•  

Auto:   Send   DTMF   using   RFC2833   if   offered.   Otherwise,   inband   will   be  used.  

Enable  Qualify  

Qualify  Timeout  

Qualify  Frequency  

Maximum  Number  of  Call  Lines  

Fax  Mode  

If  enabled,  the  UCM6100  will  regularly  send  SIP  OPTIONS  to  the  device   to  check  if  the  device  is  still  online.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

When  "Enable  Qualify"  option  is  set  to  "Yes",  configure  the  timeout  (in  ms)   for  the  Qualify  SIP  message.  If  no  response  is  received  within  the  timeout,   the  device  is  considered  offline.  The  default  setting  is  1000ms.  

When   "Enable   Qualify"   option   is   set   to   "Yes",   configure   the   interval   (in   seconds)  of  the  SIP  OPTIONS  message  sent  to  the  device  to  check  if  the   device  is  still  online.  The  default  setting  is  60  seconds.  

The   maximum   number   of   concurrent   calls   using   the   trunk.   The   default   settings  0,  which  means  no  limite.  

Select  Fax  mode.  The  default  setting  is  “None”.  

•  

None:  Disable  Fax.  

•  

Fax   Detect:   Fax   signal   from   the   user/trunk   during   the   call   can   be   detected   and   the   received   Fax   will   be   sent   to   the   Email   address   configured  for  this  extension.  If  no  Email  address  can  be  found  for  the  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  157  of  304    

 

SRTP  

CC  Settings

Enable  CC  

 

Basic  Settings

 

Provider  Name  

Host  Name  

 

CC  Max  Agents  

CC  Max  Monitors  

Transport  

Keep  Original  CID  

Keep  Trunk  CID  

NAT  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

  user,  the  Fax  will  be  sent  to  the  default  Email  address  configured  in  

Fax  setting  page  under  web  UI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Fax/T.38.  

Enable  SRTP  for  the  VoIP  trunk.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

If  enabled,  the  system  will  automatically  alert  the  user  when  a  called  party   is  available,  given  that  a  previous  call  to  that  party  failed  for  some  reason.  

Configure  the  maximum  number  of  CCSS  agents  which  may  be  allocated   for   this   channel.   In   other   words,   this   number   serves   as   the   maximum   number   of   CC   requests   this   channel   is   allowed   to   make.   The   minimum   value  is  1.  

Configure   the   maximum   number   of   monitor   structures   which   may   be   created  for  this  device.  In  other  words,  this  number  tells  how  many  callers   may  request  CC  services  for  a  specific  device  at  one  time.  The  minimum   value  is  1.  

Table  52:  SIP  Peer  Trunk  Configuration  Parameters  

Configure   a   unique   label   to   identify   this   trunk   when   listed   in   outbound   rules,  inbound  rules  and  etc.  

Configure   the   IP   address   or   URL   for   the   VoIP   provider’s   server   of   the   trunk.  

Configure  the  SIP  transport  protocol  to  be  used  in  this  trunk.  The  default   setting  is  "All  -­  UDP  Primary".  

•  

UDP  Only  

•  

TCP  Only  

•  

TLS  Only  

•  

All  -­  UDP  Primary:  UDP  is  the  primary  transport  protocol  when  all  the   other  SIP  transport  methods  are  available  too.  

•  

All  -­  TCP  Primary:  TCP  is  the  primary  transport  protocol  when  all  the   other  SIP  transport  methods  are  available  too.  

•  

All  –  TLS  Primary:  TLS  is  the  primary  transport  protocol  when  all  the   other  SIP  transport  methods  are  available  too.  

Keep   the   CID   from   the   inbound   call   when   dialing   out,   this   setting   will   override  “Keep  Trunk  CID”  option.  Please  make  sure  that  the  peer  PBX  at   the  other  side  supports  to  match  user  entry  using  “username”  field  from   authentication  line.      

If  enabled,  the  trunk  CID  will  not  be  overridden  by  extension’s  CID  when   the  extension  has  CID  configured.  The  default  setting  is  “No”.  

Turn  on  this  option  when  the  PBX  is  using  public  IP  and  communicating  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  158  of  304    

 

Disable  This  Trunk  

TEL  URI  

Caller  ID  

CallerID  Name  

Auto  Record  

Advanced  Settings

 

Codec  Preference  

DID  Mode  

DTMF  Mode  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

  awith   devices   behind   NAT.   If   there   is   one-­way   audio   issue,   usually   it’s   related  to  NAT  configuration  or  SIP/RTP  port  configuration  on  the  firewall.  

If  selected,  the  trunk  will  be  disabled.  

 

Note:  

If  a  current  SIP  trunk  is  disabled,  UCM  will  send  UNREGISTER  message  

(REGISTER  message  with  expires=0)  to  the  SIP  provider.  

If  the  trunk  has  an  assigned  PSTN  telephone  number,  this  field  should  be   set  to  "User=Phone".  Then  a  "User=Phone"  parameter  will  be  attached  to   the  Request-­Line  and  TO  header  in  the  SIP  request  to  indicate  the  E.164   number.  If  set  to  "Enable",  "Tel:"  will  be  used  instead  of  "SIP:"  in  the  SIP   request.  The  default  setting  is  disabled.  

Configure  the  Caller  ID.  This  is  the  number  that  the  trunk  will  try  to  use   when  making  outbound  calls.  For  some  providers,  it  might  not  be  possible   to  set  the  CallerID  with  this  option  and  this  option  will  be  ignored.  

When   making   outgoing   calls,   the   following   rules   are   used   to   determine   which  CallerID  will  be  used  if  they  exist:  

•  

The  CallerID  configured  for  the  extension  will  be  looked  up  first.  

•  

If  no  CallerID  configured  for  the  extension,  the  CallerID  configured  for   the  trunk  will  be  used.  

•  

If  the  above  two  are  missing,  the  "Global  Outbound  CID"  defined  in  

Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>General  will  be  used.  

Configure  the  name  of  the  caller  to  be  displayed  when  the  extension  has   no  CallerID  Name  configured.  

Enable   automatic   recording   for   the   calls   using   this   trunk   (for   SIP   trunk   only).  The  default  setting  is  disabled.  The  recording  files  can  be  accessed   under  web  GUI-­>CDR-­>Recording  Files.  

Select   audio   and   video   codec   for   the   VoIP   trunk.   The   available   codecs   are:  PCMU,  PCMA,  GSM,  AAL2-­G.726-­32,  G.726,  G.722,  G.729,  G.723,   iLBC,  ADPCM,  H.264,  H.263,  H.263p.  

Configure  where  to  get  the  destination  ID  of  an  incoming  SIP  call,  from  

SIP  Request-­line  or  To-­header.  The  default  is  set  to  "Request-­line".  

Configure  the  default  DTMF  mode  when  sending  DTMF  on  this  trunk.  

•  

Default:   The   global   setting   of   DTMF   mode   will   be   used.   The   global   setting   for   DTMF   Mode   setting   is   under   web   UI-­>PBX-­>SIP  

Settings-­>ToS.  

•  

RFC2833:  Send  DTMF  using  RFC2833.  

•  

Info:  Send  DTMF  using  SIP  INFO  message.  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  159  of  304    

 

 

Enable  Qualify  

Qualify  Timeout  

Sync  LDAP  Password  

Sync  LDAP  Port  

LDAP  Outbound  Rule  

LDAP  Dialed  Prefix  

•  

Inband:  Send  DTMF  using  inband  audio.  This  requires  64  bit  codec,   i.e.,  PCMU  and  PCMA.  

•  

Auto:   Send   DTMF   using   RFC2833   if   offered.   Otherwise,   inband   will   be  used.  

If  enabled,  the  UCM6100  will  regularly  send  SIP  OPTIONS  to  the  device   to  check  if  the  device  is  still  online.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

When  "Enable  Qualify"  option  is  set  to  "Yes",  configure  the  timeout  (in  ms)   for  the  Qualify  SIP  message.  If  no  response  is  received  within  the  timeout,   the  device  is  considered  offline.  The  default  setting  is  1000ms.  

Qualify  Frequency  

Maximum  Number  of  Call  Lines  

Fax  Mode  

SRTP  

Sync  LDAP  Enable  

When   "Enable   Qualify"   option   is   set   to   "Yes",   configure   the   interval   (in   seconds)  of  the  SIP  OPTIONS  message  sent  to  the  device  to  check  if  the   device  is  still  online.  The  default  setting  is  60  seconds.  

The   maximum   number   of   concurrent   calls   using   the   trunk.   The   default   settings  0,  which  means  no  limite.  

Select  Fax  mode.  The  default  setting  is  “None”.  

•  

None:  Disable  Fax.  

•  

Fax   Detect:   Fax   signal   from   the   user/trunk   during   the   call   can   be   detected   and   the   received   Fax   will   be   sent   to   the   Email   address   configured  for  this  extension.  If  no  Email  address  can  be  found  for  the   user,  the  Fax  will  be  sent  to  the  default  Email  address  configured  in  

Fax  setting  page  under  web  UI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Fax/T.38.  

Enable  SRTP  for  the  VoIP  trunk.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

If  enabled,  the  local  UCM6100  will  automatically  provide  and  update  the   local  LDAP  contacts  to  the  remote  UCM6100  SIP  peer  trunk.  In  order  to   ensure   successful   synchronization,   the   remote   UCM6100   peer   also   needs  to  enable  this  option  on  the  SIP  peer  trunk.  The  default  setting  is  

"No".  

This  is  the  password  used  for  LDAP  contact  file  encryption  and  decryption   during  the  LDAP  sync  process.  The  password  must  be  the  same  on  both  

UCM6100  peers  o  ensure  successful  synchronization.  

Configure   the   TCP   port   used   LDAP   sync   feature   between   two   peer  

UCM6100.  

Specify   an   outbound   rule   for   LDAP   sync   feature.   The   UCM6100   will   automatically   modify   the   remote   contacts   by   adding   prefix   parsed   from   this  rule.  

Specify  the  prefix  for  LDAP  sync  feature.  The  UCM6100  will  automatically   modify  the  remote  contacts  by  adding  this  prefix.  

CC  Settings

 

Enable  CC   If  enabled,  the  system  will  automatically  alert  the  user  when  a  called  party  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  160  of  304    

 

Provider  Name  

Host  Name  

Keep  Trunk  CID  

Username  

Password  

Disable  This  Trunk  

 

Basic  Settings

 

Provider  Name  

Host  Name  

Keep  Trunk  CID  

Disable  This  Trunk  

Caller  ID  

CC  Max  Agents  

CC  Max  Monitors  

 

Type  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

  is  available,  given  that  a  previous  call  to  that  party  failed  for  some  reason.  

Configure  the  maximum  number  of  CCSS  agents  which  may  be  allocated   for   this   channel.   In   other   words,   this   number   serves   as   the   maximum   number   of   CC   requests   this   channel   is   allowed   to   make.   The   minimum   value  is  1.  

Configure   the   maximum   number   of   monitor   structures   which   may   be   created  for  this  device.  In  other  words,  this  number  tells  how  many  callers   may  request  CC  services  for  a  specific  device  at  one  time.  The  minimum   value  is  1.  

Table  53:  Create  New  IAX  Trunk  

Select  the  VoIP  trunk  type.  

•  

Peer  IAX  Trunk  

•  

Register  IAX  Trunk  

Configure   a   unique   label   to   identify   this   trunk   when   listed   in   outbound   rules,  inbound  rules  and  etc.  

Configure   the   IP   address   or   URL   for   the   VoIP   provider’s   server   of   the   trunk.  

If  enabled,  the  trunk  CID  will  not  be  overridden  by  extension's  CID  when   the  extension  has  CID  configured.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

Enter   the   username   to   register   to   the   trunk   from   the   provider   when  

"Register  IAX  Trunk"  type  is  selected.  

Enter   the   password   to   register   to   the   trunk   from   the   provider   when  

"Register  IAX  Trunk"  type  is  selected.  

If  selected,  the  trunk  will  be  disabled.  

Table  54:  IAX  Register  Trunk  Configuration  Parameters  

Configure   a   unique   label   to   identify   this   trunk   when   listed   in   outbound   rules,  inbound  rules  and  etc.  

Configure   the   IP   address   or   URL   for   the   VoIP   provider’s   server   of   the   trunk.  

If  enabled,  the  trunk  CID  will  not  be  overridden  by  extension's  CID  when   the  extension  has  CID  configured.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

If  selected,  the  trunk  will  be  disabled.  

Configure  the  Caller  ID.  This  is  the  number  that  the  trunk  will  try  to  use   when  making  outbound  calls.  For  some  providers,  it  might  not  be  possible   to  set  the  CallerID  with  this  option  and  this  option  will  be  ignored.  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  161  of  304    

 

 

CallerID  Name  

When   making   outgoing   calls,   the   following   rules   are   used   to   determine   which  CallerID  will  be  used  if  they  exist:  

•  

The  CallerID  configured  for  the  extension  will  be  looked  up  first.  

•  

If  no  CallerID  configured  for  the  extension,  the  CallerID  configured  for   the  trunk  will  be  used.  

•  

If  the  above  two  are  missing,  the  "Global  Outbound  CID"  defined  in  

Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>General  will  be  used.  

Configure  the  name  of  the  caller  to  be  displayed  when  the  extension  has   no  CallerID  Name  configured.  

Enter  the  username  to  register  to  the  trunk  from  the  provider.  

Enter  the  password  to  register  to  the  trunk  from  the  provider.  

Username  

Password  

Advanced  Settings

 

Codec  Preference  

Enable  Qualify  

Qualify  Timeout  

Qualify  Frequency  

Maximum  Number  of  Call  Lines  

Fax  Mode  

Select   audio   and   video   codec   for   the   VoIP   trunk.   The   available   codecs   are:  PCMU,  PCMA,  GSM,  AAL2-­G.726-­32,  G.726,  G.722,  G.729,  G.723,   iLBC,  ADPCM,  H.264,  H.263,  H.263p.  

If  enabled,  the  UCM6100  will  regularly  send  SIP  OPTIONS  to  the  device   to  check  if  the  device  is  still  online.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

When  "Enable  Qualify"  option  is  set  to  "Yes",  configure  the  timeout  (in  ms)   for  the  Qualify  SIP  message.  If  no  response  is  received  within  the  timeout,   the  device  is  considered  offline.  The  default  setting  is  1000ms.  

When   "Enable   Qualify"   option   is   set   to   "Yes",   configure   the   interval   (in   seconds)  of  the  SIP  OPTIONS  message  sent  to  the  device  to  check  if  the   device  is  still  online.  The  default  setting  is  60  seconds.  

The   maximum   number   of   concurrent   calls   using   the   trunk.   The   default   settings  0,  which  means  no  limited.  

Select  Fax  mode.  The  default  setting  is  “None”.  

•  

None:  Disable  Fax.  

•  

Fax   Detect:   Fax   signal   from   the   user/trunk   during   the   call   can   be   detected   and   the   received   Fax   will   be   sent   to   the   Email   address   configured  for  this  extension.  If  no  Email  address  can  be  found  for  the   user,  the  Fax  will  be  sent  to  the  default  Email  address  configured  in  

Fax  setting  page  under  web  UI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Fax/T.38.  

 

 

 

Table  55:  IAX  Peer  Trunk  Configuration  Parameters  

Basic  Settings

 

Provider  Name  

Configure   a   unique   label   to   identify   this   trunk   when   listed   in   outbound   rules,  inbound  rules  and  etc.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  162  of  304    

 

 

Host  Name  

Keep  Trunk  CID  

Disable  This  Trunk  

Caller  ID  

CallerID  Name  

Configure   the   IP   address   or   URL   for   the   VoIP   provider’s   server   of   the   trunk.  

If  enabled,  the  trunk  CID  will  not  be  overridden  by  extension's  CID  when   the  extension  has  CID  configured.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

If  selected,  the  trunk  will  be  disabled.  

Configure  the  Caller  ID.  This  is  the  number  that  the  trunk  will  try  to  use   when  making  outbound  calls.  For  some  providers,  it  might  not  be  possible   to  set  the  CallerID  with  this  option  and  this  option  will  be  ignored.  

When   making   outgoing   calls,   the   following   rules   are   used   to   determine   which  CallerID  will  be  used  if  they  exist:  

•  

The  CallerID  configured  for  the  extension  will  be  looked  up  first.  

•  

If  no  CallerID  configured  for  the  extension,  the  CallerID  configured  for   the  trunk  will  be  used.  

•  

If  the  above  two  are  missing,  the  "Global  Outbound  CID"  defined  in  

Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>General  will  be  used.  

Configure  the  name  of  the  caller  to  be  displayed  when  the  extension  has   no  CallerID  Name  configured.  

Advanced  Settings

 

Codec  Preference  

Enable  Qualify  

Qualify  Timeout  

Qualify  Frequency  

Maximum  Number  of  Call  Lines  

Fax  Mode  

Select   audio   and   video   codec   for   the   VoIP   trunk.   The   available   codecs   are:  PCMU,  PCMA,  GSM,  AAL2-­G.726-­32,  G.726,  G.722,  G.729,  G.723,   iLBC,  ADPCM,  H.264,  H.263,  H.263p.  

If  enabled,  the  UCM6100  will  regularly  send  SIP  OPTIONS  to  the  device   to  check  if  the  device  is  still  online.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

When  "Enable  Qualify"  option  is  set  to  "Yes",  configure  the  timeout  (in  ms)   for  the  Qualify  SIP  message.  If  no  response  is  received  within  the  timeout,   the  device  is  considered  offline.  The  default  setting  is  1000ms.  

When   "Enable   Qualify"   option   is   set   to   "Yes",   configure   the   interval   (in   seconds)  of  the  SIP  OPTIONS  message  sent  to  the  device  to  check  if  the   device  is  still  online.  The  default  setting  is  60  seconds.  

The   maximum   number   of   concurrent   calls   using   the   trunk.   The   default   settings  0,  which  means  no  limited.  

Select  Fax  mode.  The  default  setting  is  “None”.  

•  

None:  Disable  Fax.  

•  

Fax   Detect:   Fax   signal   from   the   user/trunk   during   the   call   can   be   detected   and   the   received   Fax   will   be   sent   to   the   Email   address   configured  for  this  extension.  If  no  Email  address  can  be  found  for  the   user,  the  Fax  will  be  sent  to  the  default  Email  address  configured  in  

Fax  setting  page  under  web  UI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Fax/T.38.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  163  of  304    

 

 

 

DIRECT  OUTWARD  DIALING  (DOD)  

 

The  UCM6100  provides  Direct  Outward  Dialing  (DOD)  which  is  a  service  of  a  local  phone  company  (or   local  exchange  carrier)  that  allows  subscribers  within  a  company's  PBX  system  to  connect  to  outside  lines   directly.  

 

 

Example  of  how  DOD  is  used:  

Company  ABC  has  a  SIP  trunk.  This  SIP  trunk  has  4  DIDs  associated  to  it.  The  main  number  of  the  office   is  routed  to  an  auto  attendant.  The  other  three  numbers  are  direct  lines  to  specific  users  of  the  company.    

At  the  moment  when  a  user  makes  an  outbound  call  their  caller  ID  shows  up  as  the  main  office  number.    

This   poses   a   problem   as   the   CEO   would   like   their   calls   to   come   from   their   direct   line.   This   can   be   accomplished  by  configuring  DOD  for  the  CEO’s  extension.  

 

Steps  on  how  to  configure  DOD  on  the  UCM6100:  

 

1.   To  setup  DOD  go  to  UCM6100  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call  Routes-­>VoIP  Trunks  page.  

2.   Click     to  access  the  DOD  options  for  the  selected  SIP  Trunk.    

3.   Click  "Create  a  new  DOD"  to  begin  your  DOD  setup  

4.   For   "DOD   Number"   enter   one   of   the   numbers   (DIDs)   from   your   SIP   trunk   provider.   In   the   example   above  Company  ABC  received  4  DIDs  from  their  provider.  ABC  will  enter  in  the  number  for  the  CEO's   direct  line.  

5.   Select  an  extension  from  the  "Available  Extensions"  list.  Users  have  the  option  of  selecting  more  than   one   extension.   In   this   case,   Company   ABC   would   select   the   CEO's   extension.   After   making   the   selection,  click  on  the     button  to  move  the  extension(s)  to  the  "Selected  Extensions"  list.      

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  164  of  304    

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Figure  91:  DOD  extension  selection  

 

 

6.   Click  "Save"  at  the  bottom.  

Once   completed,   the   user   will   return   to   the   EDIT   DOD   page   that   shows   all   the   extensions   that   are   associated  to  a  particular  DOD.    

 

 

Figure  92:  Edit  DOD  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  165  of  304    

 

SLA  STATION  

 

Starting  from  1.0.7.10,  the  UCM6100  supports  SLA  that  allows  mapping  the  key  with  LED  on  a  multi-­line   phone  to  different  external  lines.  When  there  is  an  incoming  call  and  the  phone  starts  to  ring,  the  LED  on   the  key  will  flash  in  red  and  the  call  can  be  picked  up  by  pressing  this  key.  This  allows  users  to  know  if  the   line  is  occupied  or  not.  The  SLA  function  on  the  UCM6100  is  similar  to  BLF  but  SLA  is  used  to  monitor   external  line  i.e.,  analog  trunk  on  the  UCM6100.  Users  could  configure  the  phone  with  BLF  mode  on  the  

MPK   to   monitor   the   analog   trunk   status   or   press   the   line   key   pick   up   call   from   the   analog   trunk   on   the  

 

UCM6100.  

CREATE/EDIT  SLA  STATION    

 

 

SLA  Station  can  be  configured  on  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call  Routes-­>SLA  Station.  

 

Figure  93:  SLA  Station  

 

•  

Click  on  “Create  New  SLA  Station”  to  add  a  SLA  Station.  

•  

Click   on   parameters.  

  to   edit   the   SLA   Station.   The   following   table   shows   the   SLA   Station   configuration  

 

 

•  

Click  on     to  delete  the  SLA  Station.  

Station  Name  

Station  

Available  SLA  Trunks    

Selected  SLA  Trunks  

Table  56:  SLA  Station  Configuration  Parameters  

Configure  a  name  to  identify  the  SLA  Station.  

Specify  a  SIP  extension  as  a  station  that  will  be  using  SLA.  

Existing  Analog  Trunks  with  SLA  Mode  enabled  will  be  listed  here.  

Select  a  trunk  for  this  SLA  from  the  Available  SLA  Trunks  list.  Click  on    

      to  arrange  the  order.  If  there  are  multiple  trunks  selected,  when   there  are  calls  on  those  trunks  at  the  same  time,  pressing  the  LINE  key  on   the  phone  will  pick  up  the  call  on  the  first  trunk  here.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  166  of  304    

 

 

SLA  Station  Options

 

Ring  Timeout  

Ring  Delay  

Hold  Access  

Configure   the   time   (in   seconds)   to   ring   the   station   before   the   call   is   considered  unanswered.  No  timeout  is  set  by  default.  If  set  to  0,  there  will   be  no  timeout.    

Configure  the  time  (in  seconds)  for  delay  before  ringing  the  station  when   a  call  first  coming  in  on  the  shared  line.  No  delay  is  set  by  default.  If  set  to  

0,  there  will  be  no  delay.  

This  option  defines  the  competence  of  the  hold  action  for  one  particular   trunk.  If  set  to  “open”,  any  station  could  hold  a  call  on  that  trunk  or  resume   one  held  session;;  if  set  to  “private”,  only  the  station  that  places  the  trunk   call  on  hold  could  resume  the  session.  The  default  setting  is  “open”.  

 

SAMPLE  CONFIGURATION  

 

 

1.   On  the  UCM6100,  go  to  web  UI-­>Basic/Call  Routes-­>Analog  Trunks  page.  Create  analog  trunk  or   edit  the  existing  analog  trunk.  Make  sure  “SLA  Mode”  is  enabled  for  the  analog  trunk.  Once  enabled,  

  this   analog   trunk   will   be   only   available   for   the   SLA   stations   created   under   web   UI-­>Basic/Call  

Routes-­>SLA  Station  page.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  167  of  304    

 

 

Figure  94:  Enable  SLA  Mode  for  Analog  Trunk  

 

Click  on  “Save”.  The  analog  trunk  will  be  listed  with  trunk  mode  “SLA”.  

 

Figure  95:  Analog  Trunk  with  SLA  Mode  Enabled  

 

2.   On  the  UCM6100,  go  to  web  UI-­>Basic/Call  Routes-­>SLA  Station  page,  click  on  “Create  New  SLA  

Station”.  Please  refer  to  section  

[CREATE/EDIT  SLA  STATION]

 for  the  configuration  parameters.  Users   can   create   one   or   more   SLA   stations   to   monitor   the   analog   trunk.   The   following   figure   shows   two   stations,  1002  and  1005,  are  configured  to  be  associated  with  SLA  trunk  “fxo1”.  

 

 

 

Figure  96:  SLA  Example  -­  SLA  Station  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  168  of  304    

 

 

3.   On  the  SIP  phone  1,  configure  to  register  UCM6100  extension  1002.  Configure  the  MPK  as  BLF  mode   and  the  value  must  be  set  to  “extension_trunkname”,  which  is  1002_fxo1  in  this  case.  

4.   On  the  SIP  phone  2,  configure  to  register  UCM6100  extension  1005.  Configure  the  MPK  as  BLF  mode   and  value  must  be  set  to  “extension_trunkname”,  which  is  1005_fxo1  in  this  case.  

 

 

Figure  97:  SLA  Example  -­  MPK  Configuration  

 

 

Now  the  SLA  station  is  ready  to  use.  The  following  functions  can  be  achieved  by  this  configuration.  

•  

Making  an  outbound  call  from  the  station/extension,  using  LINE  key  

When  the  extension  is  in  idle  state,  pressing  the  line  key  for  this  extension  on  the  phone  to  off  hook.  

Then  dial  the  station’s  extension  number,  for  example,  dial  1002  on  phone  1  (or  dial  1005  on  phone  2),   to  hear  the  dial  tone.  Then  the  users  could  dial  external  number  for  the  outbound  call.  

•  

Making  an  outbound  call  from  the  station/extension,  using  BLF  key  

When  the  extension  is  in  idle  state,  pressing  the  MPK  and  users  could  dial  external  numbers  directly.  

•  

Answering  call  using  LINE  key  

When  the  station  is  ringing,  pressing  the  LINE  key  to  answer  the  incoming  call.  

•  

Barging-­in  active  call  using  BLF  key  

When   there   is   an   active   call   between   an   SLA   station   and   an   external   number   using   the   SLA   trunk,   other   SLA   stations   monitoring   the   same   trunk   could   join   the   call   by   pressing   the   BLF   key   if   “Barge  

Allowed”  is  enabled  for  the  analog  trunk.  

•  

Hold/Unhold  using  BLF  key  

If  the  external  line  is  previously  put  on  hold  by  an  SLA  station,  another  station  that  monitors  the  same  

SLA  trunk  could  unhold  the  call  by  pressing  the  BLF  key  if  “Hold  Access”  is  set  to  “open”  on  the  analog  

  trunk  and  the  SLA  station.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  169  of  304    

 

 

CALL  ROUTES  

OUTBOUND  ROUTES  

 

In  the  UCM6100,  an  outgoing  calling  rule  pairs  an  extension  pattern  with  a  trunk  used  to  dial  the  pattern.  

This  allows  different  patterns  to  be  dialed  through  different  trunks  (e.g.,  "Local"  7-­digit  dials  through  a  FXO  

  while  "Long  distance"  10-­digit  dials  through  a  low-­cost  SIP  trunk).  Users  can  also  set  up  a  failover  trunk  to   be  used  when  the  primary  trunk  fails.  

 

Go  to  Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call  Routes-­>Outbound  Routes  to  add  and  edit  outbound  rules.  

•  

Click  on  "Create  New  Outbound  Rule"  to  add  a  new  outbound  route.  

•  

Click  on     to  edit  the  outbound  route.  

•  

Click  on     to  delete  the  outbound  route.  

•  

On  the  UCM6100,  the  outbound  route  priority  is  based  on  “Best  matching  pattern”.  For  example,  the  

UCM6100  has  outbound  route  A  with  pattern  1xxx  and  outbound  route  B  with  pattern  10xx  configured.  

When   dialing   1000   for   outbound   call,   outbound   route   B   will   always   be   used   first.   This   is   because   pattern  10xx  is  a  better  match  than  pattern  1xxx.  Only  when  there  are  multiple  outbound  routes  with   the  same  pattern  configured,  users  can  click  on     to  move  the  outbound  route  up/down  to  

  arrange  the  priority  among  those  outbound  routes.  

Table  57:  Outbound  Route  Configuration  Parameters  

Calling  Rule  Name  

Pattern  

Password  

Call  Duration  Limit  

Configure  the  name  of  the  calling  rule  (e.g.,  local,  long_distance,  and  etc).  

Letters,  digits,  _  and  -­  are  allowed.  

•  

All  patterns  are  prefixed  with  the  "_".  

•  

Special  characters:    

X:  Any  Digit  from  0-­9.  

Z:  Any  Digit  from  1-­9.  

N:  Any  Digit  from  2-­9.  

".":  Wildcard.  Match  one  or  more  characters.  

"!":  Wildcard.  Match  zero  or  more  characters  immediately.  

Example:  [12345-­9]  -­  Any  digit  from  1  to  9.  

Configure  the  password  for  users  to  use  this  rule  when  making  outbound   calls.  

Enable  to  configure  the  maximum  duration  for  the  call  using  this  outbound   route.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  170  of  304    

 

 

Maximum  Call  Duration  

Warning  Time  

Warning  Repeat  Interval  

Privilege  Level  

Enable  Filter  on  Source  Caller  

ID  

Configure   the   maximum   duration   of   the   call   (in   seconds).   The   default   setting  is  0,  which  means  no  limite.  

Configure  the  warning  time  for  the  call  using  this  outbound  route.  If  set  to   x  seconds,  the  warning  tone  will  be  played  to  the  caller  when  x  seconds   are  left  to  end  the  call.  

Configure   the   warning   repeat   interval   for   the   call   using   this   outbound   route.  If  set  to  x  seconds,  the  warning  tone  will  be  played  every  x  seconds   after  the  first  warning.  

Select  privilege  level  for  the  outbound  rule.  

•  

Internal:  The  lowest  level  required.  All  users  can  use  this  rule.  

•  

Local:  Users  with  Local,  National,  or  International  level  are  allowed  to   use  this  rule.  

•  

National:  Users  with  National  or  International  level  are  allowed  to  use   this  rule.  

•  

International:  The  highest  level  required.  Only  users  with  international   level  can  use  this  rule.  

 

•  

Disable:  The  default  setting  is  "Disable".  If  selected,  only  the  matched   source  caller  ID  will  be  allowed  to  use  this  outbound  route.  

Please  be  aware  of  the  potential  security  risks  when  using  "Internal"  level,   which   means   all   users   can   use   this   outbound   rule   to   dial   out   from   the   trunk.  

When   enabled,   users   could   specify   extensions   allowed   to   use   this   outbound   route.   "Privilege   Level"   is   automatically   disabled   if   using  

"Enable  Filter  on  Source  Caller  ID".  

The  following  two  methods  can  be  used  at  the  same  time  to  define  the   extensions  as  the  source  caller  ID.  

1.   Select  available  extensions/extension  groups  from  the  left  to  the  right.  

This  allows  users  to  specify  arbitrary  single  extensions  available  in   the  PBX.  

2.   Custom  Dynamic  Route:  define  the  pattern  for  the  source  caller  ID.  

This  allows  users  to  define  extension  range  instead  of  selecting  them   one  by  one.  

•  

All  patterns  are  prefixed  with  the  "_".  

•  

Special  characters:    

X:  Any  Digit  from  0-­9.  

Z:  Any  Digit  from  1-­9.  

N:  Any  Digit  from  2-­9.  

".":  Wildcard.  Match  one  or  more  characters.  

"!":  Wildcard.  Match  zero  or  more  characters  immediately.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  171  of  304    

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Example:  [12345-­9]  -­  Any  digit  from  1  to  9.  

Send  This  Call  Through  Trunk

 

Use  Trunk   Select  the  trunk  for  this  outbound  rule.  

Strip  

Prepend  

Allows  the  user  to  specify  the  number  of  digits  that  will  be  stripped  from   the  beginning  of  the  dialed  string  before  the  call  is  placed  via  the  selected   trunk.  

Example:  

The  users  will  dial  9  as  the  first  digit  of  a  long  distance  calls.  However,  9   should  not  be  sent  out  via  analog  lines  and  the  PSTN  line.  In  this  case,  1   digit  should  be  stripped  before  the  call  is  placed.  

Specify  the  digits  to  be  prepended  before  the  call  is  placed  via  the  trunk.  

Those  digits  will  be  prepended  after  the  dialing  number  is  stripped.  

Use  Failover  Trunk

 

Failover  Trunk  

Strip  

Prepend  

Failover   trunks   can   be   used   to   make   sure   that   a   call   goes   through   an   alternate  route,  when  the  primary  trunk  is  busy  or  down.  If  "Use  Failover  

Trunk"  is  enabled  and  "Failover  trunk"  is  defined,  the  calls  that  cannot  be   placed  via  the  regular  trunk  may  have  a  secondary  trunk  to  go  through.      

Example:  

The  user's  primary  trunk  is  a  VoIP  trunk  and  the  user  would  like  to  use  the  

PSTN   when   the   VoIP   trunk   is   not   available.   The   PSTN   trunk   can   be   configured  as  the  failover  trunk  of  the  VoIP  trunk.  

Allows  the  user  to  specify  the  number  of  digits  that  will  be  stripped  from   the  beginning  of  the  dialed  string  before  the  call  is  placed  via  the  selected   trunk.  

Example:  

The  users  will  dial  9  as  the  first  digit  of  a  long  distance  calls.  However,  9   should  not  be  sent  out  via  analog  lines  and  the  PSTN  line.  In  this  case,  1   digit  should  be  stripped  before  the  call  is  placed.  

Specify  the  digits  to  be  prepended  before  the  call  is  placed  via  the  trunk.  

Those  digits  will  be  prepended  after  the  dialing  number  is  stripped.  

 

INBOUND  ROUTES  

 

Inbound  routes  can  be  configured  via  Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call  Routes-­>Inbound  Routes.  

 

•  

Click  on  "Create  New  Inbound  Rule"  to  add  a  new  inbound  route.  

•  

Click  on  "Blacklist"  to  configure  blacklist  for  all  inbound  routes.  

•  

Click  on     to  edit  the  inbound  route.  

Page  172  of  304    

 

 

•  

Click  on     to  delete  the  inbound  route.  

 

INBOUND  RULE  CONFIGURATIONS  

Table  58:  Inbound  Rule  Configuration  Parameters  

Trunks  

DID  Pattern  

Privilege  Level  

Default  Destination  

Select  the  trunk  to  configure  the  inbound  rule.  

•  

All  patterns  are  prefixed  with  the  "_".  

•  

Special  characters:  

X:  Any  Digit  from  0-­9.  

Z:  Any  Digit  from  1-­9.  

N:  Any  Digit  from  2-­9.  

".":  Wildcard.  Match  one  or  more  characters.  

"!":  Wildcard.  Match  zero  or  more  characters  immediately.  

Example:  [12345-­9]  -­  Any  digit  from  1  to  9.  

•  

The  pattern  can  be  composed  of  two  parts,  divided  by  a  ‘/’  character.    

The  first  part  is  used  to  specify  the  dialed  number  the  second  part  is   used  to  specify  the  caller  ID  and  it  is  optional,  if  set  it  means  only  the   extension   with   the   specific   caller   ID   is   allowed   to   call   in   or   call   out.    

For  example,  patter  '_2XXX/1234'  means  the  only  extension  with  the   caller  ID  '1234'  is  allowed  to  use  this  rule.  

Configure  the  privilege  level  for  this  inbound  route.  

Select  the  default  destination  for  the  inbound  call.  

•  

Extension  

•  

Voicemail  

•  

Conference  Room  

•  

Queue  

•  

Ring  Group  

•  

Paging/Intercom  

•  

Voicemail  Group  

•  

Fax  

•  

DISA  

•  

IVR  

•  

Dial  By  Name  

•  

External  Number  

•  

By  DID  

When   "By   DID"   is   used,   the   UCM6100   will   look   for   the   destination   based   on   the   number   dialed,   which   could   be   local   extensions,   conference,   call   queue,   ring   group,   paging/intercom   group,   IVR,   voicemail   groups   and   Fax   extension   as   configured   in   "DID  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  173  of  304    

 

 

Strip  

Prepend  

Prepend  Trunk  Name  

Dial  Trunk  

DID  Destination   destination".   If   the   dialed   number   matches   the   DID   pattern,   the   call   will  be  allowed  to  go  through.  

Configure   the   number   of   digits   to   be   stripped   from   the   beginning   of   the  

DID.  This  option  shows  up  only  when  "By  DID"  is  selected.  

Configure   the   number   of   digits   to   be   prepended   to   an   inbound   DID   pattern,  with  strip  taking  precedence  over  prepend.  

This  option  shows  up  only  when  “By  DID”  is  selected.  If  enabled,  the  trunk   name  will  be  prepended  to  the  display  name.  

This   option   shows   up   only   when   "By   DID"   is   selected.   If   enabled,   the   external   users   dialing   in   to   the   trunk   via   this   inbound   route   can   dial   outbound  call  using  the  UCM6100’s  trunk.  

This  option  shows  up  only  when  "By  DID"  is  selected.  This  controls  the   destination   that   can   be   reached   by   the   external   caller   via   the   inbound   route.  The  DID  destination  are:  

•  

Extension  

•  

Conference  

•  

Call  Queue  

•  

Ring  Group  

•  

Paging/Intercom  Groups  

•  

IVR  

•  

Voicemail  Groups  

•  

Fax  Extension  

•  

Dial  By  Name  

•  

All  

When  present  in  an  INVITE  request,  the  Alert-­Info  header  field  specifies   an  alternative  ring  tone  to  the  UAS.  

Alert-­Info    

Time  Condition

 

Time  Conditions  

Destination  

 

Select  the  time  condition  for  the  inbound  rule.  

Select   the   destination   for   the   inbound   call   during   the   specified   time   condition.  

INBOUND  ROUTE:  PREPEND  EXAMPLE  

 

UCM6100  now  allows  user  to  prepend  digits  to  an  inbound  DID  pattern,  with  strip  taking  precedence  over   prepend.  With  the  ability  to  prepend  digits  in  inbound  route  DID  pattern,  user  no  longer  needs  to  create   multiple  routes  for  the  same  trunk  in  order  to  route  calls  to  different  extensions.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  174  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  98:  Inbound  Route  feature:  Prepend  

 

 

The  following  example  demonstrates  the  process,  

1.   If  Trunk  provides  a  DID  pattern  of  18005251163.  

2.   If  Strip  is  set  to  8,  UCM6100  will  strip  the  first  8  digits.    

3.   If  Prepend  is  set  to  2,  UCM6100  will  then  prepend  a  2  to  the  stripped  number,  now  the  number   become  2163.  

4.   UCM6100  will  now  forward  the  incoming  call  to  extension  2163.    

 

BLACKLIST  CONFIGURATIONS  

 

In  the  UCM6100,  Blacklist  is  supported  for  all  inbound  routes.  Users  could  enable  the  Blacklist  feature  and   manage  the  Blacklist  by  clicking  on  "Blacklist".  

 

•  

Select  the  checkbox  for  "Blacklist  Enable"  to  turn  on  Blacklist  feature  for  all  inbound  routes.  Blacklist  is   disabled  by  default.  

•  

Enter  a  number  in  "Add  Blacklist  Number"  field  and  then  click     to  add  to  the  list.  

•  

To  remove  a  number  from  the  Blacklist,  select  the  number  in  "Blacklist  list"  and  click  on .  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  175  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  99:  Blacklist  Configuration  Parameters  

 

•  

To  add  blacklist  number  in  batch,  click  on     to  upload  blacklist  file  in  csv  format.  The  supported  csv   format  is  as  below.  

 

Figure  100:  Blacklist  csv  File  

 

 

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

Note:  

Users  could  also  add  a  number  to  the  Blacklist  or  remove  a  number  from  the  Blacklist  by  dialing  the  feature   code  for  "Blacklist  Add'  (default:  *40)  and  "Blacklist  Remove"  (default:  *41)  from  an  extension.  The  feature   code  can  be  configured  under  Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Feature  Codes.  

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  176  of  304    

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  177  of  304    

 

 

CONFERENCE  BRIDGE  

 

The  UCM6100  supports  conference  bridge  allowing  multiple  bridges  used  at  the  same  time:  

•  

UCM6102/6104   supports   up   to   3   conference   bridges   allowing   up   to   25   simultaneous   PSTN   or   IP   participants.  

•  

UCM6108/6116   supports   up   to   6   conference   bridges   allowing   up   to   32   simultaneous   PSTN   or   IP   participants.

The   conference   bridge   configurations   can   be   accessed   under   Web   GUI-­>PBX-­>Call  

Features-­>Conference.  In  this  page,  users  could  create,  edit,  view,  invite,  manage  the  participants  and   delete  conference  bridges.  The  conference  bridge  status  and  conference  call  recordings  (if  recording  is  

  enabled)  will  be  displayed  in  this  web  page  as  well.  

CONFERENCE  BRIDGE  CONFIGURATIONS  

 

•  

Click  on  "Create  New  Conference  Room"  to  add  a  new  conference  bridge.  

•  

Click  on     to  edit  the  conference  bridge.  

•  

Click  on     to  delete  the  conference  bridge.    

Extension  

Password  

Admin  Password  

 

Table  59:  Conference  Bridge  Configuration  Parameters  

Configure   the   conference   number   for   the   users   to   dial   into   the   conference.  

When   configured,   the   users   who   would   like   to   join   the   conference   call   must  enter  this  password  before  accessing  the  conference  bridge.  

 

Note:  

•  

If  "Public  Mode"  is  enabled,  the  password  is  not  required  to  join  the   conference  bridge  thus  this  field  is  invalid.  

•  

The  password  has  to  be  at  least  4  characters.  

Configure   the   password   to   join   the   conference   bridge   as   administrator.  

Conference   administrator   can   manage   the   conference   call   via   IVR   (if  

"Enable  Caller  Menu"  is  enabled)  as  well  as  invite  other  parties  to  join  the   conference  by  dialing  "0"  (permission  required  from  the  invited  party)  or  

"1"  (permission  not  required  from  the  invited  party)  during  the  conference   call.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  178  of  304    

 

Enable  Caller  Menu  

Record  Conference  

Quiet  Mode  

Wait  For  Admin  

Enable  User  Invite  

Announce  Callers  

Public  Mode  

Play  Hold  Music  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

 

 

Note:  

•  

If  "Public  Mode"  is  enabled,  the  password  is  not  required  to  join  the   conference  bridge  thus  this  field  is  invalid.  

•  

The  password  has  to  be  at  least  4  characters.  

If   enabled,   conference   participant   could   press   the   *   key   to   access   the   conference  bridge  menu.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

If   enabled,   the   calls   in   this   conference   bridge   will   be   recorded   automatically  in  a  .wav  format  file.  All  the  recording  files  will  be  displayed   and  can  be  downloaded  in  the  conference  web  page.  The  default  setting   is  "No".  

If   enabled,   if   there   are   users   joining   or   leaving   the   conference,   voice  

  prompt  or  notification  tone  won't  be  played.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

Note:  

"Quiet   Mode"   and   "Announce   Callers"   cannot   be   enabled   at   the   same   time.  

If  enabled,  the  participants  will  not  hear  each  other  until  the  conference  

  administrator  joins  the  conference.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

Note:  

If  "Quiet  Mode"  is  enabled,  the  voice  prompt  for  "Wait  For  Admin"  will  not   be  announced.  

If   enabled,   users   could   press   0   to   invite   other   users   (with   the   users'   permission)  or  press  1  to  invite  other  users  (without  the  user's  permission)   to  join  the  conference.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

 

Note:  

Conference  administrator  can  always  invite  other  users  without  enabling   this  option.  

If   enabled,   the   caller   will   be   announced   to   all   conference   participants  

  when  there  the  caller  joins  the  conference.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

Note:  

"Quiet   Mode"   and   "Announce   Callers"   cannot   be   enabled   at   the   same   time.  

If  enabled,  no  authentication  will  be  required  when  joining  the  conference   call.  The  default  setting  is  "Yes".  

If  enabled,  the  UCM6100  will  play  Hold  music  when  there  is  only  one  user  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  179  of  304    

 

 

Music  On  Hold  

Skip  Authentication  When  

Inviting  User  via  Trunk  from  

Web  GUI  

  in  the  conference.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

Select  the  music  on  hold  class  to  be  played  in  conference  call.  Music  On  

Hold  class  can  be  set  up  under  web  UI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Music  

On  Hold.  

If   enabled,   the   invitation   from   Web   GUI   for   a   conference   bridge   with   password   will   skip   the   authentication   for   the   invited   users.   The   default   setting  is  "No".  

JOIN  A  CONFERENCE  CALL  

 

 

Users  could  dial  the  conference  bridge  extension  to  join  the  conference.  If  password  is  required,  enter  the   password  to  join  the  conference  as  a  normal  user,  or  enter  the  admin  password  to  join  the  conference  as   administrator.  

INVITE  OTHER  PARTIES  TO  JOIN  CONFERENCE  

 

When   using   the   UCM6100   conference   bridge,   there   are   two   ways   to   invite   other   parties   to   join   the  

  conference.  

•  

Invite  from  Web  GUI.  

 

For  each  conference  bridge  in  UCM6100  Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Call  Features-­>Conference,  there  is  an  icon  

  for  option  "Invite  a  participant".  Click  on  it  and  enter  the  number  of  the  party  you  would  like  to  invite.  

 

Then  click  on  "Add".  A  call  will  be  sent  to  this  number  to  join  it  into  the  conference.    

Figure  101:  Conference  Invitation  From  Web  GUI  

 

 

•  

Invite  by  dialing  0  or  1  during  conference  call.  

 

A  conference  participant  can  invite  other  parties  to  the  conference  by  dialing  from  the  phone  during  the   conference  call.  Please  make  sure  option  "Enable  User  Invite"  is  turned  on  for  the  conference  bridge  first.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  180  of  304    

 

Enter  0  or  1  during  the  conference  call.  Follow  the  voice  prompt  to  input  the  number  of  the  party  you  would   like  to  invite.  A  call  will  be  sent  to  this  number  to  join  it  into  the  conference.  

 

0:  If  0  is  entered  to  invite  other  party,  once  the  invited  party  picks  up  the  invitation  call,  a  permission  will  be  

  asked  to  "accept"  or  "reject"  the  invitation  before  joining  the  conference.    

1:  If  1  is  entered  to  invite  other  party,  no  permission  will  be  required  from  the  invited  party.  

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

Note:  

Conference  administrator  can  always  invite  other  parties  from  the  phone  during  the  call  by  entering  0  or  1.  

To  join  a  conference  bridge  as  administrator,  enter  the  admin  password  when  joining  the  conference.  A   conference  bridge  can  have  multiple  administrators.  

 

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

DURING  THE  CONFERENCE  

 

 

During  the  conference  call,  users  can  manage  the  conference  from  web  GUI  or  IVR.  

•  

Manage  the  conference  call  from  Web  GUI.  

 

Log  in  UCM6100  web  GUI  during  the  conference  call,  the  participants  in  each  conference  bridge  will   be  listed.  

1.   Click  on     to  kick  a  participant  from  the  conference.  

 

2.   Click  on     to  mute  the  participant.  

3.   Click  on     to  lock  this  conference  bridge  so  that  other  users  cannot  join  it  anymore.  

4.   Click  on     to  invite  other  users  into  the  conference  bridge.  

 

•  

Manage  the  conference  call  from  IVR.  

 

If  "Enable  Caller  Menu"  is  enabled,  conference  participant  can  input  *  to  enter  the  IVR  menu  for  the   conference.  Please  see  options  listed  in  the  table  below.  

Table  60:  Conference  Caller  IVR  Menu  

Conference  Administrator  IVR  Menu

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  181  of  304    

 

3  

4  

1  

2  

5  

6  

Mute/unmute  yourself.  

Lock/unlock  the  conference  bridge.  

Kick  the  last  joined  user  from  the  conference.  

Decrease  the  volume  of  the  conference  call.  

Decrease  your  volume.  

Increase  the  volume  of  the  conference  call.  

7  

8  

5  

6  

1  

4  

Increase  your  volume.  

More  options.  

•  

1:  List  all  users  currently  in  the  conference  call.  

•  

2:  Kick  all  non-­Administrator  participants  from  the  conference  call.  

•  

3:  Mute/Unmute  all  non-­Administrator  participants  from  the  conference  call.  

•  

4:  Record  the  conference  call.  

•  

8:  Exit  the  caller  menu  and  return  to  the  conference.  

Conference  User  IVR  Menu

 

Mute/unmute  yourself.  

Decrease  the  volume  of  the  conference  call.  

Decrease  your  volume.  

Increase  the  volume  of  the  conference  call.  

7  

8  

Increase  your  volume.  

Exit  the  caller  menu  and  return  to  the  conference.  

 

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

Note:  

 

When  there  is  participant  in  the  conference,  the  conference  bridge  configuration  cannot  be  modified.  

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

RECORD  CONFERENCE  

 

The   UCM6100   allows   users   to   record   the   conference   call   and   retrieve   the   recording   from   web  

 

GUI-­>PBX-­>Call  Features-­>Conference.    

 

To  record  the  conference  call,  when  the  conference  bridge  is  in  idle,  enable  "Record  Conference"  from  the   conference  bridge  configuration  dialog.  Save  the  setting  and  apply  the  change.  When  the  conference  call   starts,  the  call  will  be  automatically  recorded  in  .wav  format.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  182  of  304    

 

 

 

The   recording   files   will   be   listed   as   below   once   available.   Users   could   click   on     to   download   the   recording  or  click  on     to  delete  the  recording.     Users  could  also  delete  all  recording  files  by  clicking  on  

 

“Delate   All   Recording   Files”,   or   delete   multiple   recording   files   at   once   by   clicking   on   “Delete   Selected  

Recording  Files”  after  selecting  the  recording  files.  

 

Figure  102:  Conference  Recording  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  183  of  304    

 

 

IVR  

CONFIGURE  IVR  

 

IVR   configurations   can   be   accessed   under   the   UCM6100   Web   GUI-­>PBX-­>Call   Features-­>IVR.   Users   could  create,  edit,  view  and  delete  an  IVR.  

 

•  

Click  on  "Create  New  IVR"  to  add  a  new  IVR.  

•  

Click  on     to  edit  the  IVR  configuration.  

•  

Click  on     to  delete  the  IVR.  

Table  61:  IVR  Configuration  Parameters  

Basic  Settings  

Name  

Extension  

Dial  Other  Extensions  

Dial  Trunk  

Permission  

Welcome  Prompt  

Digit  Timeout  

Response  Timeout  

Configure  the  name  of  the  IVR.  Letters,  digits,  _  and  -­  are  allowed.  

Enter  the  extension  number  for  users  to  access  the  IVR.  

If   enabled,   all   callers   to   the   IVR   can   dial   other   extensions.   The   default   setting  is  "No".  

If  enabled,  all  callers  to  the  IVR  is  allowed  to  use  trunk.  The  permission   must  be  configured  for  the  users  to  use  the  trunk  first.  The  default  setting   is  "No".  

Assign  permission  level  for  outbound  calls  if  "Dial  Trunk"  is  enabled.  The   available   permissions   are   "Internal",   "Local",   "National"   and  

"International"   from   the   lowest   level   to   the   highest   level.   The   default   setting  is  "Internal".  If  the  user  tries  to  dial  outbound  calls  after  dialing  into   the  IVR,  the  UCM6100  will  compared  the  IVR's  permission  level  with  the   outbound   route's   privilege   level.   If   the   IVR's   permission   level   is   higher   than   (or   equal   to)   the   outbound   route's   privilege   level,   the   call   will   be   allowed  to  go  through.  

Select  an  audio  file  to  play  as  the  welcome  prompt  for  the  IVR.  Click  on  

"Prompt"   to   add   additional   audio   file   under   web   GUI-­>Internal  

Options-­>IVR  Prompt.  

Configure  the  timeout  between  digit  entries.  After  the  user  enters  a  digit,   the   user   needs   to   enter   the   next   digit   within   the   timeout.   If   no   digit   is   detected   within   the   timeout,   the   UCM6100   will   consider   the   entries   complete.  The  default  timeout  is  3  seconds.  

After  playing  the  prompts  in  the  IVR,  the  UCM6100  will  wait  for  the  DTMF   entry  within  the  timeout  (in  seconds).  If  no  DTMF  entry  is  detected  within  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  184  of  304    

 

Response  Timeout  Prompt  

Invalid  Prompt  

Response  Timeout  Repeat  

Loops  

Invalid  Repeat  Loops  

Language  

Key  Pressing  Events

Key  Press  Event:  

Press  0  

Press  1  

Press  2  

Press  3  

Press  4  

Press  5  

Press  6  

Press  7  

Press  8  

Press  9  

Press  *  

Timeout  

Invalid  

 

  the   timeout,   a   timeout   prompt   will   be   played.   The   default   setting   is   10   seconds.  

Select  the  prompt  message  to  be  played  when  timeout  occurs.  

Select   the   prompt   message   to   be   played   when   an   invalid   extension   is   pressed.  

Configure  the  number  of  times  to  repeat  the  prompt  if  no  DTMF  input  is   detected.   When   the   loop   ends,   it   will   go   to   the   timeout   destination   if   configured,  or  hang  up.  The  default  setting  is  3.  

Configure  the  number  of  times  to  repeat  the  prompt  if  the  DTMF  input  is   invalid.   When   the   loop   ends,   it   will   go   to   the   invalid   destination   if   configured,  or  hang  up.  The  default  setting  is  3.  

Select   the   voice   prompt   language   to   be   used   for   this   IVR.   The   default   setting   is   "Default"   which   is   the   selected   voice   prompt   language   under   web   GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal   Options-­>Language.   The   dropdown   list   shows  all  the  current  available  voice  prompt  languages  on  the  UCM6100.  

To   add   more   languages   in   the   list,   please   download   voice   prompt   package   by   selecting   "Check   Prompt   List"   under   web  

GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Language.  

Select  the  event  for  each  key  pressing  for  0-­9,  *,  Timeout  and  Invalid.  The   event  options  are:  

•  

Extension  

•  

Voicemail  

•  

Conference  Rooms  

•  

Voicemail  Group  

•  

IVR  

•  

Ring  Group  

•  

Queues  

•  

Page  Group  

•  

Fax  

•  

Custom  Prompt  

•  

Hangup  

•  

DISA  

•  

Dial  By  Name  

•  

External  Number  

•  

Callback  

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  185  of  304    

 

CREATE  CUSTOM  PROMPT  

 

To  record  new  IVR  prompt  or  upload  IVR  prompt  to  be  used  in  IVR,  click  on  “Prompt”  next  to  the  “Welcome  

Prompt”   option   and   the   users   will   be   redirected   to   Custom   Prompt   page.   Or   users   could   go   to   Web  

GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Custom  Prompt  page  directly.  

 

 

Figure  103:  Click  on  Prompt  to  Create  IVR  Prompt  

 

 

Once   the   IVR   prompt   file   is   successfully   added   to   the   UCM6100,   it   will   be   added   into   the   prompt   list   options  for  users  to  select  in  different  IVR  scenarios.  

RECORD  NEW  CUSTOM  PROMPT  

 

  Settings  

In  the  UCM6100  web  UI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Custom  Prompt  page,  click  on  “Record  New  Custom  

Prompt”  and  follow  the  steps  below  to  record  new  IVR  prompt.  

 

Figure  104:  Record  New  Custom  Prompt  

 

•  

Specify  the  IVR  file  name.  

•  

Select  the  format  (GSM  or  WAV)  for  the  IVR  prompt  file  to  be  recorded.  

•  

Select  the  extension  to  receive  the  call  from  the  UCM6100  to  record  the  IVR  prompt.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  186  of  304    

 

•  

Click   the   “Record”   button.   A   request   will   be   sent   to   the   UCM6100.   The   UCM6100   will   then   call   the   extension  for  recording  the  IVR  prompt  from  the  phone.  

 

•  

Pick  up  the  call  from  the  extension  and  start  the  recording  following  the  voice  prompt.  

•  

The  recorded  file  will  be  listed  in  the  IVR  Prompt  web  page.  Users  could  select  to  re-­record,  play  or   delete  the  recording.  

UPLOAD  CUSTOM  PROMPT  

 

If   the   user   has   a   pre-­recorded   IVR   prompt   file,   click   on   “Upload   Custom   Prompt”   in   Web  

GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Custom  Prompt  page  to  upload  the  file  to  the  UCM6100.  The  following   are  required  for  the  IVR  prompt  file  to  be  successfully  uploaded  and  used  by  the  UCM6100:  

 

•  

PCM  encoded.  

•  

16  bits.  

•  

8000Hz  mono.  

•  

In  .mp3  or  .wav  format;;  or  raw/ulaw/alaw/gsm  file  with  .ulaw  or  .alaw  suffix.  

•  

File  size  under  5M.  

 

 

 

Figure  105:  Upload  Custom  Prompt  

 

Click  on     to  select  audio  file  from  local  PC  and  click  on     to  start  uploading.  Once  uploaded,  the  file  

  will  appear  in  the  Custom  Prompt  web  page.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  187  of  304    

 

LANGUAGE  SETTINGS  FOR  VOICE  PROMPT  

 

The  UCM6100  supports  multiple  languages  in  web  GUI  as  well  as  system  voice  prompt.  Currently,  there   are  16  languages  supported  in  system  voice  prompt:  English  (United  States),  Arabic,  Chinese,  Dutch,  

English  (United  Kingdom),  French,  German,  Greek,  Hebrew,  Italian,  Polish,  Portuguese,  Russian,  

 

Spanish,  Swedish  and  Turkish.  

English   (United   States)   and   Chinese   voice   prompts   are   built   in   with   the   UCM6100   already.   The   other   languages   provided   by   Grandstream   can   be   downloaded   and   installed   from   the   UCM6100   web   GUI   directly.   Additionally,   users   could   customize   their   own   voice   prompts,   package   them   and   upload   to   the  

 

UCM6100.  

Language   settings   for   voice   prompt   can   be   accessed   under   Web   GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal  

 

Options-­>Language.  

DOWNLOAD  AND  INSTALL  VOICE  PROMPT  PACKAGE  

 

To  download  and  install  voice  prompt  package  in  different  languages  from  UCM6100  web  GUI,  click  on  

 

"Check  Prompt  List"  button.  

 

 

Figure  106:  Language  Settings  for  Voice  Prompt  

 

A  new  dialog  window  of  voice  prompt  package  list  will  be  displayed.  Users  can  see  the  version  number  

(latest  version  available  V.S.  current  installed  version),  package  size  and  options  to  upgrade  or  download   the  language.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  188  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  107:  Voice  Prompt  Package  List  

 

Click   on     to   download   the   language   to   the   UCM6100.   The   installation   will   be   automatically   started   once  the  downloading  is  finished.  

 

 

Figure  108:  New  Voice  Prompt  Language  Added  

 

A  new  language  option  will  be  displayed  after  successfully  installed.  Users  then  could  select  it  to  apply  in   the  UCM6100  system  voice  prompt  or  delete  it  from  the  UCM6100.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  189  of  304    

 

 

VOICEMAIL  

CONFIGURE  VOICEMAIL  

 

 

If  the  voicemail  is  enabled  for  UCM6100  extensions,  the  configurations  of  the  voicemail  can  be  globally  set   up  and  managed  under  Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Call  Features-­>Voicemail.  

Table  62:  Voicemail  Settings  

Max  Greeting  

Dial  ‘0’  For  Operator  

Max  Messages  Per  Folder  

Max  Message  Time  

Min  Effective  Message  Time  

Announce  Message  Caller-­ID  

Configure   the   maximum   number   of   seconds   for   the   voicemail   greeting.  

The  default  setting  is  60  seconds.  

If   enabled,   the   caller   can   press   0   to   exit   the   voicemail   application   and   connect   to   the   configured   operator’s   extension.   The   operator   extension   can  be  configured  under  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>General.  

Configure   the   maximum   number   of   messages   per   folder   in   users’   voicemail.  The  valid  range  10  to  1000.  The  default  setting  is  50.  

Select   the   maximum   duration   of   the   voicemail   message.   The   message   will  not  be  recorded  if  the  duration  exceeds  the  max  message  time.  The   default  setting  is  15  minutes.  The  available  options  are:  

•  

1  minute  

•  

2  minutes  

•  

5  minutes  

•  

15  minutes  

•  

30  minutes  

•  

Unlimited  

Configure   the   minimum   duration   (in   seconds)   of   a   voicemail   message.  

Messages  will  be  automatically  deleted  if  the  duration  is  shorter  than  the  

Min   Message   Time.   The   default   setting   is   3   seconds.   The   available   options  are:  

•  

No  minimum  

•  

1  second  

•  

2  seconds  

•  

3  seconds  

•  

4  seconds  

•  

5  seconds  

Note:  

Silence  and  noise  duration  are  not  counted  in  message  time.  

If   enabled,   the   caller   ID   of   the   user   who   has   left   the   message   will   be   announced  at  the  beginning  of  the  voicemail  message.  The  default  setting  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  190  of  304    

 

 

Announce  Message  Duration  

Play  Envelope  

Play  from  Last   is  "No".  

If  enabled,  the  message  duration  will  be  announced  at  the  beginning  of   the  voicemail  message.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

If  enabled,  a  brief  introduction  (received  time,  received  from,  and  etc)  of   each   message   will   be   played   when   accessed   from   the   voicemail   application.  The  default  setting  is  "Yes".  

If   enabled,   UCM   will   play   from   the   voice   message   left   most   recently;;   if   disabled,  UCM  will  play  from  the  earliest  left  voice  message  

If   enabled,   users   can   review   the   message   following   the   IVR   before   sending  the  message  out.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

Allow  User  Review  

 

 

ACCESS  VOICEMAIL  

 

If  the  voicemail  is  enabled  for  UCM6100  extensions,  the  users  can  dial  the  voicemail  access  feature  code  

(by  default  *98  or  *97)  to  access  the  extension’s  voicemail.  The  users  will  be  prompt  to  enter  the  voicemail   password   and   then   can   enter   digits   from   the   phone   keypad   to   navigate   in   the   IVR   menu   for   different   options.  

Table  63:  Voicemail  IVR  Menu  

Main  Menu   Sub  Menu  1  

1  -­  New   messages  

3  -­  Advanced  options  

Sub  Menu  2  

1  -­  Send  a  reply  

2  -­  Call  the  person  who  sent  this  message  

3  -­  Hear  the  message  envelop  

4  -­  Leave  a  message  

 

*  -­  Return  to  the  main  menu  

2  -­  Change   folders  

5  -­  Repeat  the  current  message  

7  -­  Delete  this  message  

8  -­  Forward  the  message  to  another  user  

9  –  Save  

*  -­  Help  

#  -­  Exit  

0  -­  New  messages  

1  -­  Old  messages  

2  -­  Work  messages  

3  -­  Family  messages  

4  -­  Friend  messages  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  191  of  304    

 

 

3  -­  

Advanced   options  

#  -­  Cancel  

1  -­  Send  a  reply  

2  -­  Call  the  person  who  sent  this  message  

3  -­  Hear  the  message  envelop  

4  -­  Leave  a  message  

*  -­  Return  to     the  main  menu  

1  -­  Record  your  unavailable  message  

2  -­  Record  your  busy  message  

0  -­  Mailbox   options  

3  -­  Record  your  name  

4  -­  Record  temporary  greeting  

1  -­  Accept  this  recording  

2  -­  Listen  to  it  

3  -­  Re-­record  your  message  

1  -­  Accept  this  recording  

2  -­  Listen  to  it  

3  -­  Re-­record  your  message  

1  -­  Accept  this  recording  

2  -­  Listen  to  it  

3  -­  Re-­record  your  message  

1  -­  Accept  this  recording  

2  -­  Listen  to  it  

 

3  -­  Re-­record  your  message  

5  -­  Change  your  password  

*  -­  Return  to  the  main  menu  

 

VOICEMAIL  EMAIL  SETTINGS  

 

The  UCM6100  can  be  configured  to  send  the  voicemail  as  attachment  to  Email.  Click  on  "Voicemail  Email  

 

Settings"  button  to  configure  the  Email  attributes  and  content.  

Table  64:  Voicemail  Email  Settings  

Attach  Recordings  to  E-­Mail  

Keep  Recordings  

Template  For  Voicemail  Emails  

If   enabled,   voicemails   will   be   sent   to   user's   Email   address.   The   default   setting  is  "Yes".  

If   enabled,   voicemail   will   be   stored   in   the   UCM6100   after   the   email   is   sent.  The  default  setting  is  “Yes”.  

 

Fill   in   the   "Subject:"   and   "Message:"   content,   to   be   used   in   the   Email   when  sending  to  the  user.  

The  template  variables  are:  

•  

\t:  TAB  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  192  of  304    

 

 

•  

${VM_NAME}:  Recipient's  first  name  and  last  name  

•  

${VM_DUR}:  The  duration  of  the  voicemail  message  

•  

${VM_MAILBOX}:  The  recipient's  extension  

•  

${VM_CALLERID}:  The  caller  ID  of  the  person  who  has  left  the   message  

•  

${VM_MSGNUM}:  The  number  of  messages  in  the  mailbox  

•  

${VM_DATE}:  The  date  and  time  when  the  message  is  left  

 

Figure  109:  Voicemail  Email  Settings  

 

 

Click  on  "Load  Default  Settings"  button  to  view  the  default  template  as  an  example.  

CONFIGURE  VOICEMAIL  GROUP  

 

The   UCM6100   supports   voicemail   group   and   all   the   extensions   added   in   the   group   will   receive   the   voicemail   to   the   group   extension.   The   voicemail   group   can   be   configured   under   Web   GUI-­>PBX-­>Call  

Features-­>Voicemail  Group.  Click  on  "Create  New  Voicemail  Group"  to  configure  the  group.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  193  of  304    

 

 

 

Extension  

Name  

Voicemail  Password  

Email  Address  

Voicemail  Group  Mailboxes  

 

Figure  110:  Voicemail  Group

 

Table  65:  Voicemail  Group  Settings  

Enter  the  Voicemail  Group  Extension.  The  voicemail  messages  left  to  this   extension  will  be  forwarded  to  all  the  voicemail  group  members.  

Configure  the  Name  to  identify  the  voicemail  group.  Letters,  digits,  _  and  -­   are  allowed.  

Configure  the  voicemail  password  for  the  users  to  check  voicemail   messages.  

Configure  the  Email  address  for  the  voicemail  group  extension.  

Select  available  mailboxes  from  the  left  list  and  add  them  to  the  right  list.  

The  extensions  need  to  have  voicemail  enabled  to  be  listed  in  available   mailboxes  list.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  194  of  304    

 

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  195  of  304    

 

RING  GROUP

 

 

The  UCM6100  supports  ring  group  feature  with  different  ring  strategies  applied  to  the  ring  group  members.  

 

This  section  describes  the  ring  group  configuration  on  the  UCM6100.  

CONFIGURE  RING  GROUP  

 

Ring  group  settings  can  be  accessed  via  Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Call  Features-­>Ring  Group.    

 

Figure  111:  Ring  Group  

 

•  

Click  on  “Create  New  Ring  Group”  to  add  ring  group.  

•  

Click  on     to  edit  the  ring  group.  The  following  table  shows  the  ring  group  configuration  parameters.  

 

•  

Click  on     to  delete  the  ring  group.  

Ring  Group  Name  

Extension  

Ring  Group  Members  

Selected  LDAP  Numbers  

Ring  Strategy  

Table  66:  Ring  Group  Parameters  

Configure  ring  group  name  to  identify  the  ring  group.  Letters,  digits,  _  and  

–  are  allowed.  

Configure  the  ring  group  extension.  

Select  available  users  from  the  left  side  to  the  ring  group  member  list  on   the  right  side.  Click  on           to  arrange  the  order.  

Select  available  remote  users  from  the  left  side  to  the  ring  group  member   list   on   the   right   side.   Click   on           to   arrange   the   order.   Note:  

LDAP  Sync  must  be  enabled  first.  

Select  the  ring  strategy.  The  default  setting  is  “Ring  in  order”.  

•  

Ring  simultaneously.    

Ring  all  the  members  at  the  same  time  when  there  is  incoming  call  to   the  ring  group  extension.  If  any  of  the  member  answers  the  call,  it  will   stop  ringing.  

•  

Ring  in  order.    

Ring  the  members  with  the  order  configured  in  ring  group  list.  If  the   first   member   doesn’t   answer   the   call,   it   will   stop   ringing   the   first   member  and  start  ringing  the  second  member.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  196  of  304    

 

 

Permission  

Custom  Prompt  

Ring  Timeout  on  Each  Member  

Auto  Record  

Enable  Destination  

Secret  

Email  Address  

Configure  the  permission  level  for  Ring  Group.  This  permission  will  take   effect  when  an  incoming  call  is  going  to  be  directed  to  an  external  number   configured   as   “Default   Destination”.   The   available   permissions   are  

"Internal",  "Local",  "National"  and  "International"  from  the  lowest  level  to   the  highest  level.  

This   option   is   to   set   a   custom   prompt   for   a   ring   group   to   announce   to   caller.   Click   on   ‘Prompt’,   it   will   direct   to   the   page   PBX-­>Internal  

Options-­>Custom   Prompt,   where   users   could   record   new   prompt   or   upload  prompt  files.  

Configure  the  number  of  seconds  to  ring  each  member.  If  set  to  0,  it  will   keep  ringing.  The  default  setting  is  30  seconds.  

Note:  

The  actual  ring  timeout  might  be  overridden  by  users  if  the  phone  has  ring   timeout  settings  as  well.  

If   enabled,   calls   on   this   ring   group   will   be   automatically   recorded.   The   default   setting   is   No.   The   recording   files   can   be   accessed   from   web  

GUI-­>CDR-­>Recording  Files.  

If  enabled,  users  could  select  extension,  voicemail,  ring  group,  IVR,  call   queue,  voicemail  group  as  the  destination  if  the  call  to  the  ring  group  has   no  answer.  Secret  and  Email  address  are  required  if  voicemail  is  selected   as  the  destination.  

Configure  the  password  to  access  the  ring  group  extension's  voicemail.    

Note:  

The  password  has  to  be  at  least  4  characters.  

Configure   the   Email   address   of   the   ring   group   extension's   voicemail.   If  

"Attach   Recordings   to   E-­mail"   is   enabled   from   Web  

GUI-­>PBX-­>Voicemail-­>Voicemail   Email   Settings,   the   voicemail   can   be  sent  to  the  ring  group's  Email  address  as  attachment.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  197  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  112:  Ring  Group  Configuration  

 

REMOTE  EXTENSION  IN  RING  GROUP  

 

Remote  extensions  from  the  peer  trunk  of  a  remote  UCM6100  can  be  included  in  the  ring  group  with  local  

  extension.  An  example  of  Ring  Group  with  peer  extensions  is  presented  in  the  following:    

1.   Creating  SIP  Peer  Trunk  between  both  UCM6100_A  and  UCM6100_B.  SIP  Trunk  can  be  found  under   web  UI-­>  PBX-­>  Basic/Call  Routes-­>  VoIP  Trunks.  Also,  please  configure  their  Inbound/Outbound   routes  accordingly.  

2.   Click   edit   button   in   the   menu   ,   and   check   if   Sync   LDAP   Enable   is   selected,   this   option   will   allow   UCM6100_A   update   remote   LDAP   server   automatically   from   peer   UCM6100_B.   In   addition,  Sync  LDAP  Password  must  match  for  UCM6100_A  and  UCM6100_B  in  order  to  sync  LDAP   contact   automatically.   Port   number   can   be   anything   between   0~65535,   and   use   the   outbound   rule   created  in  step  1  for  the  LDAP  Outbound  Rule  option.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  198  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  113:  Sync  LDAP  Server  option  

 

3.   In  case  if  LDAP  server  doesn’t  sync  automatically,  user  can  manually  sync  LDAP  server.  Under  VoIP  

Trunks   page,   click   sync   button   shown   in   the   following   figure   to   manually   sync   LDAP   contacts   from  

  peer  UCM6100.  

Figure  114:  Manually  Sync  LDAP  Server  

4.   Under   Ring   Groups   setting   page,   click under  web  UI-­>  PBX-­>  Call  Features-­>  Ring  Groups.  

.   Ring   Groups   can   be   found  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  199  of  304    

 

5.   If   LDAP   server   is   synced   correctly,   Available   LDAP   Numbers   box   will   display   available   remote   extensions  that  can  be  included  in  the  current  ring  group.  Please  also  make  sure  the  extensions  in  the   peer  UCM6100  can  be  included  into  that  UCM6100’s  LDAP  contact.    

 

Figure  115:  Ring  Group  Remote  Extension  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  200  of  304    

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  201  of  304    

 

PAGING  AND  INTERCOM  GROUP  

 

Paging   and   Intercom   Group   can   be   used   to   make   an   announcement   over   the   speaker   on   a   group   of   phones.  Targeted  phones  will  answer  immediately  using  speaker.  The  UCM6100  paging  and  intercom  can   be  used  via  feature  code  to  a  single  extension  or  a  paging/intercom  group.  This  sections  describes  the  

  configuration  of  paging/intercom  group  under  Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Call  Features-­>Paging/Intercom.  

CONFIGURE  PAGING/INTERCOM  GROUP  

 

 

•  

Click  on  "Create  New  Paging/Intercom  Group"  to  add  paging/intercom  group.  

 

Name  

Extension  

Type  

Custom  Prompt  

Page/Intercom  Group  

Members  

 

Figure  116:  Paging/Intercom  Group  

 

Table  67:  Paging/Intercom  Group  Configuration  Parameters  

Configure  paging/intercom  group  name.  

Configure  the  paging/intercom  group  extension.  

Select  "2-­way  Intercom"  or  "1-­way  Page".  

This   option   is   to   set   a   custom   prompt   for   a   paging/intercom   group   to   announce   to   caller.   Click   on   ‘Prompt’,   it   will   direct   to   the   page  

PBX-­>Internal   Options-­>Custom   Prompt,   where   users   could   record   new  prompt  or  upload  prompt  files.  

Select   available   users   from   the   left   side   to   the   paging/intercom   group   member  list  on  the  right.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  202  of  304    

 

•  

Click  on     to  edit  the  paging/intercom  group.  

•  

Click  on     to  delete  the  paging/intercom  group.  

•  

Click  on  "Paging/Intercom  Group  Settings"  to  edit  Alert-­Info  Header.  This  header  will  be  included  in  the  

SIP  INVITE  message  sent  to  the  callee  in  paging/intercom  call.  

 

 

 

Figure  117:  Page/Intercom  Group  Settings  

 

 

 

•  

The  UCM6100  has  pre-­configured  paging/intercom  feature  code.  By  default,  the  Paging  Prefix  is  *81   and   the   Intercom   Prefix   is   *80.   To   edit   page/intercom   feature   code,   click   on   "Feature   Codes"   in   the  

"Paging/Intercom   Group   Settings"   dialog.   Or   users   could   go   to   Web   GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal  

Options-­>Feature  Codes  directly.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  203  of  304    

 

CALL  QUEUE  

 

The   UCM6100   supports   call   queue   by   using   static   agents   or   dynamic   agents.   Call   Queue   system   can   accept   more   calls   than   the   available   agents.   Incoming   calls   will   be   held   until   next   representative   is   available  in  the  system.  This  section  describes  the  configuration  of  call  queue  under  Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Call  

 

Features-­>Call  Queue.    

CONFIGURE  CALL  QUEUE  

 

 

Call  queue  settings  can  be  accessed  via  Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Call  Features-­>Call  Queue.  

 

Figure  118:  Call  Queue  

 

•  

Click  on  "Create  New  Queue"  to  add  call  queue.  

•  

Click   on     to   edit   the   call   queue.   The   call   queue   configuration   parameters   are   listed   in   the   table   below.  

Extension  

Name  

Strategy  

Table  68:  Call  Queue  Configuration  Parameters  

Configure  the  call  queue  extension.  

Configure  the  call  queue  name  to  identify  the  call  queue.  

Select  the  strategy  for  the  call  queue.  

•  

Ring  All  

Ring  all  available  Agents  simultaneously  until  one  answers.  

•  

Linear  

Ring  agents  in  the  specified  order.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  204  of  304    

 

Music  On  Hold  

Leave  When  Empty  

Dial  in  Empty  Queue  

Permission  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

 

•  

Least  Recent  

Ring  the  agent  who  has  been  called  the  least  recently.  

•  

Fewest  Calls  

Ring  the  agent  with  the  fewest  completed  calls.  

•  

Random  

Ring  a  random  agent.  

•  

Round  Robin  

Ring  the  agents  in  Round  Robin  scheduling  with  memory.  

 

The  default  setting  is  "Ring  All".  

Select  the  Music  On  Hold  class  for  the  call  queue.  

 

Note:  

Music  On  Hold  classes  can  be  managed  from  Web  GUI-­>  PBX-­>Internal  

Options-­>Music  On  Hold.  

Configure  whether  the  callers  will  be  disconnected  from  the  queue  or  not   if  the  queue  has  no  agent  anymore.  The  default  setting  is  "Strict".  

•  

Yes  

Callers  will  be  disconnected  from  the  queue  if  all  agents  are  paused   or  invalid.  

•  

No  

Never   disconnect   the   callers   from   the   queue   when   the   queue   is   empty.  

•  

Strict  

Callers  will  be  disconnected  from  the  queue  if  all  agents  are  paused,   invalid  or  unavailable.  

Configure  whether  the  callers  can  dial  into  a  call  queue  if  the  queue  has   no  agent.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

•  

Yes  

Callers  can  always  dial  into  a  call  queue.  

•  

No  

Callers  cannot  dial  into  a  queue  if  all  agents  are  paused  or  invalid.  

•  

Strict  

Callers  cannot  dial  into  a  queue  if  the  agents  are  paused,  invalid  or   unavailable.  

Configure  the  permission  level  for  Call  Queue.  This  permission  will  take   effect  when  an  incoming  call  is  going  to  be  directed  to  an  external  number   configured   as   “Default   Destination”.   The   available   permissions   are  

"Internal",  "Local",  "National"  and  "International"  from  the  lowest  level  to   the  highest  level.  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  205  of  304    

 

Dynamic  Login  Password  

Ring  Time  Out  

Wrapup  Time  

Max  Queue  Length  

Report  Hold  Time  

Wait  Time  

Auto  Record  

Enable  Destination  

Queue  Timeout  

Failover  Destination  

Enable  Feature  Codes  

Agents  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

 

If   enabled,   the   configured   PIN   number   is   required   for   dynamic   agent   to   log  in.  The  default  setting  is  disabled.  

Configure  the  number  of  seconds  an  agent  will  ring  before  the  call  goes  to   the  next  agent.  The  default  setting  is  15  seconds.  

Configure  the  number  of  seconds  before  a  new  call  can  ring  the  queue   after  the  last  call  on  the  agent  is  completed.  If  set  to  0,  there  will  be  no   delay  between  calls  to  the  queue.  The  default  setting  is  15  seconds.  

Configure   the   maximum   number   of   calls   to   be   queued   at   once.   This   number  does  not  include  calls  that  have  been  connected  with  agents.  It   only   includes   calls   not   connected   yet.   The   default   setting   is   0,   which   means  unlimited.  When  the  maximum  value  is  reached,  the  caller  will  be   treated  with  busy  tone  followed  by  the  next  calling  rule  after  attempting  to   enter  the  queue.  

If  enabled,  the  UCM6100  will  report  (to  the  agent)  the  duration  of  time  of   the  call  before  the  caller  is  connected  to  the  agent.  The  default  setting  is  

"No".  

 

If   enabled,   users   will   be   disconnected   after   the   configured   number   of   seconds.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

Note:  

It   is   recommended   to   configure   "Wait   Time"   longer   than   the   "Wrapup  

Time".  

If  enabled,  the  calls  on  the  call  queue  will  be  automatically  recorded.  The   recording   files   can   be   accessed   in   Queue   Recordings   under   web  

GUI-­>PBX-­>Call  Features-­>Call  Queue.  

If   enabled,   the   incoming   call   for   the   call   queue   will   be   routed   to   the   destination  configured  in  the  next  field  if  none  of  the  agents  answers  the   call  after  ringing  for  a  time  of  “Ring  Timeout”.  

Configure  the  global  timeout  (in  seconds)  of  call  queue.  It  must  be  bigger   than  the  value  of  ring  timeout.  The  call  in  the  queue  will  be  transferred  to   the  failover  destination  directly  if  this  time  is  exceeded.    

Configure  the  call  destination  for  the  call  to  be  routed  to  if  no  agent  in  this   call  queue  answers  the  call.  

Enable  feature  codes  option  for  call  queue.  For  example,  *83  is  used  for  

“Agent  Pause”  

Select   the   available   users   to   be   the   static   agents   in   the   call   queue.  

Choose  from  the  available  users  on  the  left  to  the  static  agents  list  on  the   right.  Click  on           to  arrange  the  order.  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  206  of  304    

 

•  

Click  on     to  delete  the  call  queue.  

•  

Click   on   "Agent   Login   Settings"   to   configure   Agent   Login   Extension   Postfix   and   Agent   Logout  

Extension  Postfix.  Once  configured,  users  could  log  in  the  call  queue  as  dynamic  agent.  

 

 

Figure  119:  Agent  Login  Settings  

 

For  example,  if  the  call  queue  extension  is  6500,  Agent  Login  Extension  Postfix  is  *  and  Agent  Logout  

Extension  Postfix  is  **,  users  could  dial  6500*  to  login   to  the  call  queue  as  dynamic  agent  and  dial  

 

6500**  to  logout  from  the  call  queue.  Dynamic  agent  doesn't  need  to  be  listed  as  static  agent  and  can   log  in/log  out  at  any  time.  

•  

Call   queue   feature   code   "Agent   Pause"   and   "Agent   Unpause"   can   be   configured   under   Web  

GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal   Options-­>Feature   Codes.   The   default   feature   code   is   *83   for   "Agent   Pause"   and  *84  for  "Agent  Unpause".  

•  

Queue  recordings  are  shown  on  the  Call  Queue  page.  Click  on     to  download  the  recording  file  in  

.wav  format;;  click  on     to  delete  the  recording  file.  To  delete  multiple  recording  files  by  one  click,   select  several  recording  files  to  be  deleted  and  click  on  “Delete  Selected  Recording  Files”  or  click  on  

“Delete  All  Recording  Files”  to  delete  all  recording  files.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  207  of  304    

 

EXTENSION  GROUPS  

 

The   UCM6100   extension   group   feature   allows   users   to   assign   and   categorize   extensions   in   different   groups   to   better   manage   the   configurations   on   the   UCM6100.   For   example,   when   configuring   "Enable  

Filter  on  Source  Caller  ID",  users  could  select  a  group  instead  of  each  person's  extension  to  assign.  This  

  feature  simplifies  the  configuration  process  and  helps  manage  and  categorize  the  extensions  for  business   environment.  

CONFIGURE  EXTENSION  GROUPS  

 

Extension  group  can  be  configured  via  Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Call  Features-­>Extension  Groups.  

 

•  

Click  on  "Create  New  Extension  Group"  to  create  a  new  extension  group.  

 

•  

Click  on     to  edit  the  extension  group.  

Select  extensions  from  the  list  on  the  left  side  to  the  right  side.  

 

Figure  120:  Edit  Extension  Group  

 

 

 

 

•  

Click  on     to  delete  the  extension  group.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  208  of  304    

 

USING  EXTENSION  GROUPS  

 

Here   is   an   example   where   the   extension   group   can   be   used.   Go   to   Web   GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call  

Routes-­>Outbound  Routes  and  select  "Enable  Filter  on  Source  Caller  ID".  Both  single  extensions  and  

  extension  groups  will  show  up  for  users  to  select.  

 

 

Figure  121:  Select  Extension  Group  in  Outbound  Route  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  209  of  304    

 

PICKUP  GROUPS  

 

The   UCM6100   supports   pickup   group   feature   which   allows   users   to   pick   up   incoming   calls   for   other  

  extensions  if  they  are  in  the  same  pickup  group,  by  dialing  "Pickup  Extension"  feature  code  (by  default  *8).  

CONFIGURE  PICKUP  GROUPS  

 

Pickup  groups  can  be  configured  via  Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Call  Features-­>Pickup  Groups.  

 

•  

Click  on  "Create  New  Pickup  Group"  to  create  a  new  pickup  group.  

 

•  

Click  on     to  edit  the  pickup  group.  

Select  extensions  from  the  list  on  the  left  side  to  the  right  side.  

 

 

Figure  122:  Edit  Pickup  Group  

 

•  

Click  on     to  delete  the  pickup  group.  

 

CONFIGURE  PICKUP  FEATURE  CODE  

 

When  picking  up  the  call  for  the  pickup  group  member,  the  user  only  needs  to  dial  the  pickup  feature  code.  

It’s  not  necessary  to  add  the  extension  number  after  the  pickup  feature  code.  The  pickup  feature  code  is   configurable  under  Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Feature  Codes.  

 

The  default  pickup  feature  code  is  *8.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  210  of  304    

 

 

 

 

Figure  123:  Edit  Pickup  Feature  Code  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  211  of  304    

 

MUSIC  ON  HOLD  

 

Music  On  Hold  settings  can  be  accessed  via  Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Music  On  Hold.  In  this   page,  users  could  configure  music  on  hold  class  and  upload  music  files.  The  "default"  Music  On  Hold  class   already  has  5  audio  files  defined  for  users  to  use.  

 

 

 

Figure  124:  Music  On  Hold  Default  Class  

 

•  

Click  on  "Create  New  MOH  Class"  to  add  a  new  Music  On  Hold  class.  

•  

Click  on     to  configure  the  MOH  class  sort  method  to  be  "Alpha"  or  "Random"  for  the  sound  files.  

•  

Click  on     next  to  the  selected  Music  On  Hold  class  to  delete  this  Music  On  Hold  class.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  212  of  304    

 

•  

Click   on     to   select   music   file   from   local   PC   and   click   on     to   start   uploading.   The   music   file   uploaded  has  to  be  8  KHz  Mono  format  with  size  smaller  than  5M.  

•  

Click  on     next  to  the  sound  file  to  delete  it  from  the  selected  Music  On  Hold  Class.  

•  

Select  the  sound  files  and  click  on     to  delete  all  selected  music  on   hold  files.  

 

 

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

  Note:  

Once  the  MOH  file  is  deleted,  there  are  two  ways  to  recover  the  music  files.  

•  

Users  could  download  the  MOH  file  from  this  link:   http://downloads.asterisk.org/pub/telephony/sounds/releases/asterisk-­moh-­opsound-­wav-­2.03.tar.gz

   

After  downloading  and  unzip  the  pack,  users  could  then  upload  the  music  files  to  UCM.    

•  

Factory  reset  could  also  recover  the  MOH  file  on  the  UCM.  

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  213  of  304    

 

 

FAX/T.38  

 

The   UCM6100   supports   T.30/T.38   Fax   and   Fax   Pass-­through.   It   can   convert   the   received   Fax   to   PDF   format   and   send   it   to   the   configured   Email   address.   Fax/T.38   settings   can   be   accessed   via   Web  

GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>FAX/T.38.  The  list  of  received  Fax  files  will  be  displayed  in  the  same  web  

  page  for  users  to  view,  retrieve  and  delete.  

CONFIGURE  FAX/T.38  

 

•  

Click  on  "Create  New  Fax  Extension".  In  the  popped  up  window,  fill  the  extension,  name  and  Email   address  to  send  the  received  Fax  to.  

•  

Click  on  "Fax  Settings"  to  configure  the  Fax  parameters.  

 

Table  69:  FAX/T.38  Settings  

Enable  Error  Correction  Mode  

Maximum  Transfer  Rate  

Minimum  Transfer  Rate  

Default  Email  Address  

Template  Variables  

Configure  to  enable  Error  Correction  Mode  (ECM)  for  the  Fax.  The  default   setting  is  "Yes".  

Configure  the  maximum  transfer  rate  during  the  Fax  rate  negotiation.  The   possible   values   are   2400,   4800,   7200,   9600,   12000   and   14400.   The   default  setting  is  14400.  

Configure  the  minimum  transfer  rate  during  the  Fax  rate  negotiation.  The   possible   values   are   2400,   4800,   7200,   9600,   12000   and   14000.   The   default  setting  is  2400.  

Configure  the  Email  address  to  send  the  received  Fax  to  if  user's  Email   address  cannot  be  found.  

Note:  

The  extension's  Email  address  or  the  Fax's  default  Email  address  needs   to  be  configured  in  order  to  receive  Fax  from  Email.  If  neither  of  them  is   configured,  Fax  will  be  not  be  received  from  Email.  

Fill   in   the   "Subject:"   and   "Message:"   content,   to   be   used   in   the   Email   when  sending  the  Fax  to  the  users.    

The  template  variables  are:  

•  

${CALLERIDNUM}  :  Caller  ID  Number  

•  

${CALLERIDNAME}  :  Caller  ID  Name  

•  

${RECEIVEEXTEN}  :  The  extension  to  receive  the  Fax  

•  

${FAXPAGES}  :  Number  of  pages  in  the  Fax  

•  

${VM_DATE}  :  The  date  and  time  when  the  Fax  is  received  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  214  of  304    

 

•  

Click  on     to  edit  the  Fax  extension.  

 

•  

Click  on     to  delete  the  Fax  extension.  

SAMPLE  CONFIGURATION  TO  RECEIVE  FAX  FROM  PSTN  LINE  

 

The  following  instructions  describe  how  to  use  the  UCM6100  to  receive  Fax  from  PSTN  line  on  the  Fax   machine  connected  to  the  UCM6100  FXS  port.  

 

1.   Connect  Fax  machine  to  the  UCM6100  FXS  port.  

2.   Connect  PSTN  line  to  the  UCM6100  FXO  port.  

3.   Go  to  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Analog  Trunks  page.  

4.   Create  or  edit  the  analog  trunk  for  Fax  as  below.  

 

Fax  Mode:  Make  sure  "Fax  Mode"  option  is  set  to  "None".  

 

 

Figure  125:  Configure  Analog  Trunk  without  Fax  Detection  

 

5.   Go  to  UCM6100  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call  Routes-­>Extensions  page.  

6.   Create  or  edit  the  extension  for  FXS  port.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  215  of  304    

 

•  

Analog  Station:  Select  FXS  port  to  be  assigned  to  the  extension.  By  default,  it's  set  to  "None".  

•  

Once   selected,   analog   related   settings   for   this   extension   will   show   up   in   "Analog   Settings"   section.  

 

 

Figure  126:  Configure  Extension  for  Fax  Machine  

 

7.   Go  to  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call  Routes-­>Inbound  Routes  page.  

8.   Create  an  inbound  route  to  use  the  Fax  analog  trunk.  Select  the  created  extension  for  Fax  machine  in   step  4  as  the  default  destination.  

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  127:  Configure  Inbound  Rule  for  Fax  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  216  of  304    

 

 

Now  the  Fax  configuration  is  done.  When  there  is  an  incoming  Fax  calling  to  the  PSTN  number  for  the  

FXO  port,  it  will  send  the  Fax  to  the  Fax  machine.  

SAMPLE  CONFIGURATION  FOR  FAX-­‐‑TO-­‐‑EMAIL  

 

The   following   instructions   describe   a   sample   configuration   on   how   to   use   Fax-­to-­Email   feature   on   the  

UCM6100.  

1.   Connect  PSTN  line  to  the  UCM6100  FXO  port.  

2.   Go  to  UCM6100  web  GUI-­>Internal  Options-­>Fax/T.38  page.  Create  a  new  Fax  extension.  

 

 

Figure  128:  Create  Fax  Extension  

 

3.   Go   to   UCM6100   web   GUI-­>Basic/Call   Routes-­>Analog   Trunks   page.   Create   a   new   analog   trunk.  

Please  make  sure  "Fax  Detection"  is  set  to  "No".  

4.   Go  to  UCM6100  web  GUI-­>Basic/Call  Routes-­>Inbound  Routes  page.  Create  a  new  inbound  route   and  set  the  default  destination  to  the  Fax  extension.  

 

Figure  129:  Inbound  Route  to  Fax  Extension  

 

5.   Once  successfully  configured,  the  incoming  Fax  from  external  Fax  machine  to  the  PSTN  line  number   will  be  converted  to  PDF  file  and  sent  to  the  Email  address  [email protected]  as   attachment.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  217  of  304    

 

 

ASTERISK  MANAGER  INTERFACE  (RESTRICTED  ACCESS)  

 

Starting  from  firmware  1.0.8.11,  the  UCM6100  supports  Asterisk  Manager  Interface  (AMI)  with  restricted   access.  AMI  allows  a  client  program  to  connect  to  an  Asterisk  instance  commands  or  read  events  over  a  

TCP/IP  stream.  It’s  particularly  useful  when  the  system  admin  tries  to  track  the  state  of  a  telephony  client  

  inside  Asterisk.  

User  could  configure  AMI  parameters  on  UCM6100  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>AMI.  For  details  

  on  how  to  use  AMI  on  UCM6100,  please  refer  to  the  following  AMI  guide:  

 

  http://www.grandstream.com/products/ucm_series/ucm61xx/documents/ucm6100_ami_guide.pdf

 

 

 

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

  Warning:

   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Please  do  not  enable  AMI  on  the  UCM6100  if  it  is  placed  on  a  public  or  untrusted  network  unless  you  have   taken  steps  to  protect  the  device  from  unauthorized  access.  It  is  crucial  to  understand  that  AMI  access  can   allow  AMI  user  to  originate  calls  and  the  data  exchanged  via  AMI  is  often  very  sensitive  and  private  for   your  UCM6100  system.  Please  be  cautious  when  enabling  AMI  access  on  the  UCM6100  and  restrict  the   permission   granted   to   the   AMI   user.   By   using   AMI   on   UCM6100   you   agree   you   understand   and   acknowledge  the  risks  associated  with  this.  

 

 

 

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  218  of  304    

 

 

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  219  of  304    

 

 

BUSY  CAMP-­‐‑ON  

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  pdf  

 

Starting  from  firmware  1.0.8.11,  the  UCM6100  supports  busy  camp-­on/call  completion  feature  that  allows   the  PBX  to  camp  on  a  called  party  and  inform  the  caller  as  soon  as  the  called  party  becomes  available   given  the  previous  attempted  call  has  failed.  

 

The  configuration  and  instructions  on  how  to  use  busy  camp-­on/call  completion  feature  can  be  found  in  the   following  guide:  

  http://www.grandstream.com/products/ucm_series/ucm61xx/documents/ucm6100_busy_camp_on_guide.

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  220  of  304    

 

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  221  of  304    

 

FOLLOW  ME  

 

Follow  Me  is  a  feature  on  the  UCM6100  that  allows  users  to  direct  calls  to  other  phone  numbers  and  have   them   ring   all   at   once   or   one   after   the   other.   Calls   can   be   directed   to   users’   home   phone,   office   phone,   mobile  and  etc.  The  calls  will  get  to  the  user  no  matter  where  they  are.  Follow  Me  option  can  be  found  

  under  web  GUI-­>  PBX-­>  Call  Features-­>Follow  Me.  

To  configure  follow  me:  

 

 

•  

Click  on  "Create  New  Follow  Me"  and  then  select  an  extension  to  be  configured  with  Follow  Me.    

 

 

Figure  130:  Create  Follow  Me  

 

•  

Click  on  “Next”  to  continue  editing  Follow  Me  configuration.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  131:  Edit  Follow  Me  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  222  of  304    

 

•  

Click   on   “Add   Follow   Me   Number”   to   add   local   extensions   or   external   numbers   to   be   called   after   ringing  the  extension  selected  in  the  first  step.    

•  

Once  created,  it  will  be  displayed  on  the  follow  me  web  page  list.  Click  on     to  edit  the  Follow  Me  

  configuration.  Click  on     to  delete  the  Follow  Me.  

 

 

The  following  table  shows  the  Follow  Me  configuration  parameters.  

Table  70:  Follow  Me  Settings  

Enable  

Skip  Trunk  Auth  

Music  On  Hold  Class  

Confirm  When  Answering  

Configure  to  enable  or  disable  Follow  Me  for  this  user.  

If   external   number   is   added   in   the   Follow   Me,   please   make   sure   this   option   is   enabled   or   the   “Skip   Trunk   Auth”   option   of   the   extension   is   enabled,  otherwise  the  external  Follow  Me  number  cannot  be  reached.    

Configure   the   Music   On   Hold   class   that   the   caller   would   hear   while   tracking  the  user.  

By  default  it  is  enabled  and  user  will  be  asked  to  press  1  to  accept  the  call   or  to  press  2  to  reject  the  call  after  answering  a  Follow  Me  call.  

If  it  is  disabled,  the  Follow  Me  call  will  be  established  once  after  the  user   answers  it.  

Follow  Me  Numbers  

New  Follow  Me  Number  

The   added   numbers   are   listed   here.   Click   on         to   arrange   the   order.   Click   on     to   delete   the   number.   Click   on     to   add   new   numbers.  

Add   a   new   Follow   Me   number   which   could   be   a   ‘Local   Extension’   or  

‘External  Number’.  The  selected  dial  plan  should  have  permissions  to  dial   the  defined  external  number.    

Dialing  Order  

Select   the   order   in   which   the   Follow   Me   destinations   will   be   dialed   to   reach  the  user:  ring  all  at  once  or  ring  one  after  the  other.  

 

•  

Click  on  “Follow  Me  Options”  to  enable  or  disable  the  options  listed  in  the  following  table.  

 

Table  71:  Follow  Me  Options  

Playback  Incoming  Status  

Message  

Record  the  Caller’s  Name  

Playback  Unreachable  Status  

Message  

If   enabled,   the   PBX   will   playback   the   incoming   status   message   before   starting  the  Follow  Me  steps.  

If  enabled,  the  PBX  will  record  the  caller’s  name  from  the  phone  so  it  can   be  announced  to  the  callee  in  each  step.  

If  enabled,  the  PBX  will  playback  the  unreachable  status  message  to  the   caller  if  the  callee  cannot  be  reached.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  223  of  304    

 

ONE-­‐‑KEY  DIAL  

 

The  UCM6100  supports  One-­Key  Dial  that  allows  users  to  call  a  certain  destination  by  pressing  one  digit  0  

  to  9  on  the  keypad.  This  creates  a  system-­wide  speed  dial  access  for  all  the  extensions  on  the  UCM6100.  

 

To  enable  One-­Key  Dial,  on  the  UCM6100  web  GUI,  go  to  page  PBX-­>Call  Features-­>One-­Key  Dial.  

 

Figure  132:  Configure  One-­Key  Dial  

 

User  should  first  decide  a  digit  used  for  One-­Key  Dial  and  check  the  option  “Enable  Destination”  for  the   digit.     Then   select   a   dial   destination   from   “Default   Destination”.   The   supported   destinations   include   extension,   voicemail,   conference   room,   voicemail   group,   IVR,   ring   group,   call   queue,   page   group,   fax,  

 

DISA,  Dial  by  Name  and  external  number.    

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  224  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  133:  One-­Key  Dial  Destinations  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  225  of  304    

 

DISA  

 

In  many  situations  the  user  will  find  the  need  to  access  his  own  IP  PBX  resources  but  he  is  not  physically   near  one  of  his  extensions.  However,  he  does  have  access  to  his  own  cell  phone.  In  this  case  we  can  use   what  is  commonly  known  as  DISA  (Direct  Inward  System  Access).  Under  this  scenario  the  user  will  be  able   to  call  from  the  outside,  whether  it’s  using  his  cell  phone,  pay  phone,  regular  PSTN,  etc.  After  calling  into  

UCM6100,  the  user  can  then  dial  out  via  the  SIP  trunk  or  PSTN  trunk  connected  to  UCM6100  as  it  is  an   internal  extension.    

 

The  UCM6100  supports  DISA  to  be  used  in  IVR  or  inbound  route.  Before  using  it,  create  new  DISA  under  

  web  GUI-­>Call  Features-­>DISA.  

•  

Click  on  "Create  New  IVR"  to  add  a  new  DISA.  

•  

Click  on     to  edit  the  DISA  configuration.  

•  

Click  on     to  delete  the  DISA.  

 

Name  

Password  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

 

Figure  134:  Create  New  DISA  

 

Table  72:  DISA  Settings  

Configure  DISA  name  to  identify  the  DISA.  

Configure  the  password  (digit  only)  required  for  the  user  to  enter  before  

  using  DISA  to  dial  out.  

Note:  

The  password  has  to  be  at  least  4  digits.  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  226  of  304    

 

 

Permission  

Response  Timeout  

Digit  Timeout  

Configure   the   permission   level   for   DISA.   The   available   permissions   are  

"Internal",  "Local",  "National"  and  "International"  from  the  lowest  level  to   the  highest  level.  The  default  setting  is  "Internal".  If  the  user  tries  to  dial   outbound   calls   after   dialing   into   the   DISA,   the   UCM6100   will   compared   the  DISA's  permission  level  with  the  outbound  route's  privilege  level.  If  the  

DISA's  permission  level  is  higher  than  (or  equal  to)  the  outbound  route's   privilege  level,  the  call  will  be  allowed  to  go  through.  

Configure   the   maximum   amount   of   time   the   UCM6100   will   wait   before   hanging  up  if  the  user  dials  an  incomplete  or  invalid  number.  The  default   setting  is  10  seconds.  

Configure   the   maximum   amount   of   time   permitted   between   digits   when   the  user  is  typing  the  extension.  The  default  setting  is  5  seconds.  

Allow  Hangup  

If  enabled,  during  an  active  call,  users  can  enter  the  UCM6100  hangup   feature  code  (by  default  it's  *0)  to  disconnect  the  call  or  hang  up  directly.  A   new  dial  tone  will  be  heard  shortly  for  the  user  to  make  a  new  call.  The   default  setting  is  "No".  

 

 

Once  successfully  created,  users  can  configure  the  inbound  route  destination  as  "DISA"  or  IVR  key  event   as  "DISA".  When  dialing  into  DISA,  users  will  be  prompted  with  password  first.  After  entering  the  correct  

  password,  a  second  dial  tone  will  be  heard  for  the  users  to  dial  out.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  227  of  304    

 

CALLBACK  FEATURE  

 

Callback   is   mainly   designed   for   users   who   often   use   their   mobile   phones   to   make   long   distance   or   international   calls   which   may   have   high   service   charges.   The   callback   feature   provides   an   economic   solution  for  reduce  the  cost  from  this.  

 

 

The  callback  feature  works  as  follows:  

1.   Configure  a  new  callback  on  the  UCM6100.  

2.   On  the  UCM6100,  configure  destination  of  the  inbound  route  for  analog  trunk  to  callback.  

3.   Save  and  apply  the  settings.  

4.   The   user   calls   the   PSTN   number   of   the   UCM6100   using   the   mobile   phone,   which   goes   to   callback   destination  as  specified  in  the  inbound  route.  

5.   Once  the  user  hears  the  ringback  tone  from  the  mobile  phone,  hang  up  the  call  on  the  mobile  phone.  

6.   The  UCM6100  will  call  back  the  user.  

7.   The  user  answers  the  call.  

8.   The  call  will  be  sent  to  DISA  or  IVR  which  directs  the  user  to  dial  the  destination  number.  

9.   The  user  will  be  connected  to  the  destination  number.  

 

In  this  way,  the  calls  are  placed  and  connected  through  trunks  on  the  UCM6100  instead  of  to  the  mobile  

  phone   directly.   Therefore,   the   user   will   not   be   charged   on   mobile   phone   services   for   long   distance   or   international  calls.  

To  configure  callback  on  the  UCM6100,  go  to  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Call  Features-­>Callback  page  and  click  

  on   .  Configuration  parameters  are  listed  in  the  following  table.  

Name  

CallerID  Pattern  

Outbound  Prepend  

Table  73:  Callback  Configuration  Parameters  

Configure  a  name  to  identify  the  Callback.  

Configure  the  pattern  of  the  callers  allowed  to  use  this  callback.  The  caller   who  places  the  inbound  call  needs  to  have  the  callerID  match  this  pattern  

  so  that  the  caller  can  get  callback  after  hanging  up  the  call.  

Note:  

If  leaving  as  blank,  all  numbers  are  allowed  to  use  this  callback.  

Configure   the   prepend   digits   to   be   added   at   before   dialing   the   outside   number.   The   number   with   prepended   digits   will   be   used   to   match   the   outbound  route.  ‘-­’  is  the  connection  character  which  will  be  ignored.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  228  of  304    

 

Delay  Before  Callback  

Destination  

 

 

 

 

Configure  the  number  of  seconds  to  be  delayed  before  calling  back  the   user.  

Configure  the  destination  which  the  callback  will  direct  the  caller  to.  Two   destinations  are  available:  

•  

IVR  

•  

DISA  

The   caller   can   then   enter   the   desired   number   to   dial   out   via   UCM6100   trunk.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  229  of  304    

 

 

BLF  AND  EVENT  LIST  

BLF  

 

The   UCM6100   supports   BLF   monitoring   for   extensions,   ring   group,   call   queue,   conference   room   and   parking  lot.  For  example,  on  the  user's  phone,  configure  the  parking  lot  number  701  as  the  BLF  monitored  

  number.  When  there  is  a  parked  call  on  701,  the  LED  for  this  BLF  key  will  light  up  in  red,  meaning  a  call  is   parked  against  this  parking  lot.  Pressing  this  BLF  key  can  pick  up  the  call  from  this  parking  lot.  

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

Note:  

On  the  Grandstream  GXP  series  phones,  the  MPK  supports  "Call  Park"  mode,  which  can  be  used  to  park   the  call  by  configuring  the  MPK  number  as  call  park  feature  code  (e.g.,  700).  MPK  "Call  Park"  mode  can   also  be  used  to  monitor  and  pickup  parked  call  if  the  MPK  number  is  configured  as  parking  lot  (e.g.,  701).  

 

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

EVENT  LIST  

 

Besides  BLF,  users  can  also  configure  the  phones  to  monitor  event  list.  In  this  way,  both  local  extensions   on  the  same  UCM6100  and  remote  extensions  on  the  VOIP  trunk  can  be  monitored.  The  event  list  setting  

  is  under  web  GUI-­>Call  Features-­>Event  List.  

•  

Click  on  "Create  New  Event  List"  to  add  a  new  event  list.  

•  

Click  on     to  edit  the  event  list  configuration.  

•  

Click  on     to  delete  the  event  list.  

URI  

Local  Extensions  

Remote  Extensions  

Table  74:  Event  List  Settings  

Configure   the   name   of   this   event   list   (for   example,   office_event_list).  

Please  note  the  URI  name  cannot  be  the  same  as  the  extension  name  on   the  UCM6100.  The  valid  characters  are  letters,  digits,  _  and  -­.  

Select   the   available   extensions/Extension   Groups   listed   on   the   local  

UCM6100  to  be  monitored  in  the  event  list.  

If  LDAP  sync  is  enabled  between  the  UCM6100  and  the  peer  UCM6100,   the  remote  extensions  will  be  listed  under  "Available  Extensions".  If  not,  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  230  of  304    

 

Special  Extensions  

  manually  enter  the  remote  extensions  under  "Special  Extensions"  field.  

Manually   enter   the   remote   extensions   in   the   peer/register   trunk   to   be   monitored  in  the  event  list.  

Valid  format:  5000,5001,9000  

 

 

Figure  135:  Create  New  Event  List  

 

Remote   extension   monitoring   works   on   the   UCM6100   via   event   list   BLF,   among   Peer   SIP   trunks   or  

Register   SIP   trunks   (register   to   each   other).   Therefore,   please   properly   configure   SIP   trunks   on   the  

UCM6100  first  before  using  remote  BLF  feature.  Please  note  the  SIP  end  points  need  support  event  list  

BLF  in  order  to  monitor  remote  extensions.

 

 

When  an  event  list  is  created  on  the  UCM6100  and  remote  extensions  are  added  to  the  list,  the  UCM6100   will  send  out  SIP  SUBSCIRBE  to  the  remote  UCM6100  to  obtain  the  remote  extension  status.  When  the  

SIP   end   points   registers   and   subscribes   to   the   local   UCM6100   event   list,   it   can   obtain   the   remote   extension  status  from  this  event  list.  Once  successfully  configured,  the  event  list  page  will  show  the  status   of  total  extension  and  subscribers  for  each  event  list.  Users  can  also  select  the  event  URI  to  check  the  

  monitored  extension's  status  and  the  subscribers'  details.  

 

 

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  231  of  304    

 

 

 

Note:  

•  

To  configure  LDAP  sync,  please  go  to  UCM6100  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call  Routes-­>VoIP  Trunk.  

You  will  see  "Sync  LDAP  Enable"  option.  Once  enabled,  please  configure  password  information  for  the   remote  peer  UCM6100  to  connect  to  the  local  UCM6100.  Additional  information  such  as  port  number,  

LDAP  outbound  rule,  LDAP  Dialed  Prefix  will  also  be  required.  Both  the  local  UCM6100  and  remote  

UCM6100   need   enable   LDAP   sync   option   with   the   same   password   for   successful   connection   and   synchronization.  

•  

Currently  LDAP  sync  feature  only  works  between  two  UCM6100s.    

•  

(Theoretically)   Remote   BLF   monitoring   will   work   when   the   remote   PBX   being   monitored   is   non-­UCM6100   PBX.   However,   it   might   not   work   the   other   way   around   depending   on   whether   the   non-­UCM6100  PBX  supports  event  list  BLF  or  remote  monitoring  feature.  

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  232  of  304    

 

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  233  of  304    

 

DIAL  BY  NAME  

 

Dial  By  Name  is  a  feature  on  the  PBX  that  allows  caller  to  search  a  person  by  first  or  last  name  via  his/her   phone's  keypad.  The  administrator  can  define  the  Dial  By  Name  directory  including  the  desired  extensions   in  the  directory  and  the  searching  type  by  "first  name"  or  "last  name".  After  dialing  in,  the  PBX  IVR/Auto  

Attendant   will   guide   the   caller   to   spell   the   digits   to   find   the   person   in   the   Dial   By   Name   directory.   This   feature   allows   customers/clients   to   use   the   guided   automatic   system   to   get   in   touch   with   the   enterprise   employees   without   having   to   know   the   extension   number,   which   brings   convenience   and   improves  

  business  image  for  the  enterprise.  

DIAL  BY  NAME  CONFIGURATION  

 

The  administrators  can  create  the  dial  by  name  group  under  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Call  Features-­>Dial  By  

 

Name.  

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  136:  Create  Dial  By  Name  Group  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  234  of  304    

 

 

1.   Group  Name  

 

Enter  the  Group  Name.  This  is  to  identify  the  Dial  By  Name  group.  The  Dial  By  Name  group  can  be   used  as  the  destination  for  inbound  route  and  key  pressing  event  for  IVR.  The  group  name  defined   here  will  show  up  in  the  destination  list  when  configuring  IVR  and  inbound  route.  If  Dial  By  Name  is  set   as  a  key  pressing  event  for  IVR,  user  could  use  ‘*’  to  exit  from  Dial  By  Name,  then  re-­enter  IVR  and   start  a  new  event.  The  following  example  shows  how  to  use  this  option.  

 

 

Figure  137:  Dial  By  Name  Group  In  IVR  Key  Pressing  Events  

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  235  of  304    

 

 

Figure  138:  Dial  By  Name  Group  In  Inbound  Rule  

 

 

 

2.   Extension  

 

Configure  the  direct  dial  extension  for  the  Dial  By  Name  group.  

3.   Available  Extensions/Selected  Extensions  

 

Select  available  extensions  from  the  left  side  to  the  right  side  as  the  directory  for  the  Dial  By  Name   group.  Only  the  selected  extensions  here  can  be  reached  by  the  Dial  By  Name  IVR  when  dialing  into   this  group.  The  extensions  here  must  have  a  valid  first  name  and  last  name  configured  under  web  

GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call  Routes-­>Extensions  in  order  to  be  searchable  in  Dial  By  Name  directory   through  IVR.  By  specifying  the  extensions  here,  the  administrators  can  make  sure  unscreened  calls   will  not  reach  the  company  employee  if  he/she  doesn't  want  to  receive  them  directly.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  236  of  304    

 

 

Figure  139:  Configure  Extension  First  Name  and  Last  Name  

 

 

 

 

4.   Query  Type  

 

Specify  the  query  type.  This  defines  how  the  caller  will  need  to  enter  to  search  the  directory.  

By  First  Name:  enter  the  first  3  digits  of  the  first  name  to  search  the  directory.  

By  Last  Name:  enter  the  first  3  digits  of  the  last  name  to  search  the  directory.  

By  Full  Name:  enter  the  first  3  digits  of  the  first  name  or  last  name  to  search  the  directory.  

 

5.   Select  Type  

 

Specify  the  select  type  on  the  searching  result.  The  IVR  will  confirm  the  name/number  for  the  party  the   caller  would  like  to  reach  before  dialing  out.  

 

By  Order:  After  the  caller  enters  the  digits,  the  IVR  will  announce  the  first  matching  party's  name  and   number.  The  caller  can  confirm  and  dial  out  if  it's  the  destination  party,  or  press  *  to  listen  to  the  next   matching  result  if  it's  not  the  desired  party  to  call.  

By  Menu:  After  the  caller  enters  the  digits,  the  IVR  will  announce  8  matching  results.  The  caller  can   press  number  1  to  8  to  select  and  call,  or  press  9  for  results  in  next  page.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  237  of  304    

 

ACTIVE  CALLS  AND  MONITOR  

 

The  active  calls  on  the  UCM6100  are  displayed  in  web  UI-­>Status-­>Active  Calls  page.  Users  can  monitor  

  the  status,  hang  up  the  call  as  well  as  barge  in  the  active  calls  in  real  time  manner.  

ACTIVE  CALLS  STATUS  

 

To  view  the  status  of  active  calls,  navigate  to  web  GUI-­>Status-­>Active  Calls.  The  following  figure  shows  

  extension  1000  is  calling  1001.  1001  is  ringing.  

 

 

Figure  140:  Status-­>PBX  Status-­>Active  Calls  -­  Ringing  

 

 

The  following  figure  shows  the  call  between  1000  and  1001  is  established.  

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  141:  Status-­>PBX  Status-­>Active  Calls  –  Call  Established  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  238  of  304    

 

 

In  active  call  web  page,  click  on     to  refresh  the  active  call  status.  

HANG  UP  ACTIVE  CALLS  

  icon  in  the  active  call  dialog.  Users  can  also  click  on   To  hang  up  an  active  call,  click  on  

  to  hang  up  all  active  calls.  

CALL  MONITOR  

During  an  active  call,  click  on  icon     and  the  monitor  dialog  will  pop  up.  

 

 

 

Figure  142:  Configure  to  Monitor  an  Active  Call  

 

In  the  “Monitor”  dialog,  configure  the  following  to  monitor  an  active  call:  

 

1.   Enter  an  available  extension  for  “Monitor’s  Extension”  which  will  be  used  to  monitor  the  active  call.  

2.   “Monitored  Extension”  must  be  one  of  the  parties  in  the  active  call  to  be  monitored.    

3.   Select  spy  mode.  There  are  three  options  in  “Spy  Mode”.  

•  

Listen  

In  “Listen”  mode,  the  extension  monitoring  the  call  can  hear  both  parties  in  the  active  call  but  the   audio  of  the  user  on  this  extension  will  not  be  heard  by  either  party  in  the  monitored  active  call.  

•  

Whisper  

In  “Whisper”  mode,  the  extension  monitoring  the  call  can  hear  both  parties  in  the  active  call.  The   user  on  this  extension  can  only  talk  to  the  selected  monitored  extension  and  he/she  will  not  be   heard  by  the  other  party  in  the  active  call.  This  can  be  usually  used  to  supervise  calls.  

•  

Barge  

In  “Barge”  mode,  the  extension  monitoring  the  call  can  talk  to  both  parties  in  the  active  call.  The   call  will  be  established  similar  to  three-­way  conference.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  239  of  304    

 

4.   Enable  or  disable  “Require  Confirmation”  option.  If  enabled,  the  confirmation  of  the  invited  monitor’s   extension  is  required  before  the  active  call  can  be  monitored.  This  option  can  be  used  to  avoid  adding   participant  who  has  auto-­answer  configured  or  call  forwarded  to  voicemail.  

5.   Click  on  “Add”.  An  INVITE  will  be  sent  to  the  monitor’s  extension.  The  monitor  can  answer  the  call  and   start  monitoring.  If  “Require  Confirmation”  is  enabled,  the  user  will  be  asked  to  confirm  to  monitor  the   call.  

 

 

Another  way  to  monitor  active  calls  is  to  dial  the  corresponding  feature  codes  from  an  extension.  Please   refer  to  

[Table  75:  UCM6100  Feature  Codes]

 and  

[ENABLE  SPY]

 section  for  instructions.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  240  of  304    

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  241  of  304    

 

CALL  FEATURES  

 

The  UCM6100  supports  call  recording,  transfer,  call  forward,  call  park  and  other  call  features  via  feature  

  code.  This  section  lists  all  the  feature  codes  in  the  UCM6100  and  describes  how  to  use  the  call  features.  

FEATURE  CODES  

Table  75:  UCM6100  Feature  Codes

 

Feature  Maps

 

Blind  Transfer  

•  

Default  code:  #1.  

•  

Enter  the  code  during  active  call.  After  hearing  "Transfer",  you   will   hear   dial   tone.   Enter   the   number   to   transfer   to.   Then   the   user  will  be  disconnected  and  transfer  is  completed.  

•  

Options  

Disable  

Allow  Caller:  Enable  the  feature  code  on  caller  side  only.  

Allow  Callee:  Enable  the  feature  code  on  callee  side  only.  

Allow  Both:  Enable  the  feature  code  on  both  caller  and  callee.

 

Attended  Transfer  

Disconnect  

•  

Default  code:  *2.  

•  

Enter  the  code  during  active  call.  After  hearing  "Transfer",  you   will  hear  the  dial  tone.  Enter  the  number  to  transfer  to  and  the   user   will   be   connected   to   this   number.   Hang   up   the   call   to   complete  the  attended  transfer.  

•  

Options  

Disable  

Allow  Caller:  Enable  the  feature  code  on  caller  side  only.  

Allow  Callee:  Enable  the  feature  code  on  callee  side  only.  

Allow  Both:  Enable  the  feature  code  on  both  caller  and  callee.

 

•  

Default  code:  *0.  

•  

Enter  the  code  during  active  call.  It  will  disconnect  the  call.  

•  

Options  

Disable  

Allow  Caller:  Enable  the  feature  code  on  caller  side  only.  

Allow  Callee:  Enable  the  feature  code  on  callee  side  only.

 

Allow  Both:  Enable  the  feature  code  on  both  caller  and  callee.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  242  of  304    

 

Call  Park  

Audio  Mix  Record  

•  

Default  code:  #72.  

•  

Enter  the  code  during  active  call  to  park  the  call.  

•  

Options  

Disable  

Allow  Caller:  Enable  the  feature  code  on  caller  side  only.  

Allow  Callee:  Enable  the  feature  code  on  callee  side  only.  

Allow  Both:  Enable  the  feature  code  on  both  caller  and  callee.

 

•  

Default  code:  *3.  

•  

Enter   the   code   followed   by   #   or   SEND   to   start   recording   the   audio   call   and   the   UCM6100   will   mix   the   streams   natively   on   the  fly  as  the  call  is  in  progress.  

•  

Options  

Disable  

Allow  Caller:  Enable  the  feature  code  on  caller  side  only.  

Allow  Callee:  Enable  the  feature  code  on  callee  side  only.  

Allow  Both:  Enable  the  feature  code  on  both  caller  and  callee.

 

DND/Call  Forward

 

Do  Not  Disturb  (DND)  Activate  

Do  Not  Disturb  (DND)  Deactivate  

Call  Forward  Busy  Activate  

Call  Forward  Busy  Deactivate  

Call  Forward  No  Answer  Activate  

•  

Default  code:  *77.  

•  

Default  code:  *78.  

•  

Default  Code:  *90.  

•  

Enter  the  code  and  follow  the  voice  prompt.  Or  enter  the  code   followed  by  the  extension  to  forward  the  call.    

•  

Default  Code:  *91.  

•  

Default  Code:  *92.  

•  

Enter  the  code  and  follow  the  voice  prompt.  Or  enter  the  code   followed  by  the  extension  to  forward  the  call.  

Call  Forward  No  Answer  

Deactivate  

Call  Forward  Unconditional  

Activate  

•  

Default  Code:  *93.  

•  

Default  Code:  *72.  

•  

Enter  the  code  and  follow  the  voice  prompt.  Or  enter  the  code   followed  by  the  extension  to  forward  the  call.  

Call  Forward  Unconditional  

Deactivate  

Feature  Misc

 

•  

Default  Code:  *73.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  243  of  304    

 

Feature  Code  Digits  Timeout  

Call  Park  

Parked  Lots  

Use  Parklot  as  Extension  

Parking  Timeout  (s)  

Feature  Codes

My  Voicemail  

Agent  Pause  

Agent  Unpause  

Paging  Prefix  

 

Voicemail  Access  Code  

Intercom  Prefix  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

•  

Default  Setting:  1000.  

•  

Configure  the  maximum  interval  (in  milliseconds)  between  the   digits  input  to  activate  the  feature  code.    

•  

Default  Extension:  700.  

•  

During  an  active  call,  initiate  blind  transfer  and  then  enter  this   code  to  park  the  call.  

•  

Default  Extension:  701-­720.  

•  

These   are   the   extensions   where   the   calls   will   be   parked,   i.e.,   parking  lots  that  the  parked  calls  can  be  retrieved.  

•  

If  checked,  the  parking  lot  number  can  be  used  as  extension.  

The  user  can  transfer  the  call  to  the  parking  lot  number  to  park   the   call.   Please   note   this   parking   lot   number   range   might   conflict  with  extension  range.  

•  

Default  setting:  300.  

•  

This   is   the   timeout   allowed   for   a   call   to   be   parked.   After   the   timeout,  if  the  call  is  not  picked  up,  the  extension  who  parks  the   call  will  be  called  back.  

 

•  

Default  Code:  *98.  

•  

Enter  *98  and  follow  the  voice  prompt.  Or  dial  *98  followed  by   the   extension   and   #   to   access   the   entered   extension's   voicemail  box.  

•  

Default  Code:  *97.  

•  

Press  *97  to  access  the  voicemail  box.  

•  

Default  Code:  *83.  

•  

Pause  the  agent  in  all  call  queues.  

•  

Default  Code:  *84.  

•  

Unpause  the  agent  in  all  call  queues.  

•  

Default  Code:  *81.  

•  

To  page  an  extension,  enter  the  code  followed  by  the  extension   number.  

•  

Default  Code:  *80.  

•  

To   intercom   an   extension,   enter   the   code   followed   by   the   extension  number.  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  244  of  304    

 

Blacklist  Add  

Blacklist  Remove  

Call  Pickup  on  Ringing  

Pickup  Extension  

Direct  Dial  Voicemail  Prefix  

Call  Completion  Request  

Call  Completion  Cancel  

Enable  Spy  

Listen  Spy  

Whisper  Spy  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

•  

Default  Code:  *40.  

•  

To   add   a   number   to   blacklist   for   inbound   route,   dial   *40   and   follow  the  voice  prompt  to  enter  the  number.  

•  

Default  Code:  *41.  

•  

To   remove   a   number   from   current   blacklist   for   inbound   route,   dial  *41  and  follow  the  voice  prompt  to  remove  the  number.  

•  

Default  Code:  **.  

•  

To  pick  up  a  call  for  any  extension  xxxx,  enter  the  code  followed   by  the  extension  number  xxxx.  

•  

Default  Code:  *8.  

•  

This   code   is   for   the   pickup   group   which   can   be   assigned   for   each  extension  on  the  extension  configuration  page.  

•  

If   there   is   an   incoming   call   to   an   extension,   the   other   extensions  within  the  same  pickup  group  can  dial  *8  directly  to   pick  up  the  call.  

•  

Default  Code:  *  

•  

This   code   is   for   the   user   to   directly   dial   or   transfer   to   an   extension's  voicemail.  

•  

For   example,   directly   dial   *5000   will   have   to   call   go   into   the   extension  5000's  voicemail.  If  the  user  would  like  to  transfer  the   call   to   the   extension   5000's   voicemail,   enter   *5000   as   the   transfer  target  number.  

•  

Default  Code:  *11  

•  

This  code  is  for  the  user  who  wants  to  use  Call  Completion  to   complete  a  call.  

•  

Default  Code:  *12  

•  

This  code  is  for  the  user  who  wants  to  cancel  Call  Completion   request.  

Check  this  box  to  enable  spy  feature  codes.  

This   is   the   feature   code   to   listen   in   on   a   call   to   monitor   performance.  Monitor’s  line  will  be  muted,  and  neither  party  will   hear  from  the  monitor’s  extension.  The  default  setting  is  *54.  

This   is   the   feature   code   to   speak   to   one   side   of   the   call   (for   example,   whisper   to   employees   to   help   them   handle   a   call).  

Only  one  side  will  be  able  to  hear  from  the  monitor’s  extension.  

The  default  setting  is  *55.  

 

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  245  of  304    

 

Barge  Spy  

This   is   the   feature   code   to   join   in   on   the   call   to   assist   both   parties.  The  default  setting  is  *56.  

 

 

CALL  RECORDING  

 

The  UCM6100  allows  users  to  record  audio  during  the  call.  If  "Auto  Record"  is  turned  on  for  an  extension,  

  ring  group,  call  queue  or  trunk,  the  call  will  be  automatically  recorded  when  there  is  established  call  with  it.  

Otherwise,  please  follow  the  instructions  below  to  manually  record  the  call.  

1.   Make  sure  the  feature  code  for  "Audio  Mix  Record"  is  configured  and  enabled.  

 

 

2.   After  establishing  the  call,  enter  the  "Audio  Mix  Record"  feature  code  (by  default  it's  *3)  followed  by  #   or  SEND  to  start  recording.  

3.   To  stop  the  recording,  enter  the  "Audio  Mix  Record"  feature  code  (by  default  it's  *3)  followed  by  #  or  

SEND  again.  Or  the  recording  will  be  stopped  once  the  call  hangs  up.  

4.   The  recording  file  can  be  retrieved  under  Web  GUI-­>Status-­>CDR.  Click  on     to  play  the  recording   or  click  on     to  download  the  recording  file.  

 

 

Figure  143:  Download  Recording  File  from  CDR  Page  

 

 

The  above  recorded  call's  recording  files  are  also  listed  under  the  UCM6100  web  GUI-­>CDR-­>Recording  

Files.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  246  of  304    

 

 

Figure  144:  Download  Recording  File  from  Recording  Files  Page  

 

CALL  PARK  

 

 

The  UCM6100  provides  call  park  and  call  pickup  features  via  feature  code.  

PARK  A  CALL  

 

 

There  are  two  feature  codes  that  can  be  used  to  park  the  call.  

 

•  

Feature  Maps-­>Call  Park  (Default  code  #72)  

During  an  active  call,  press  #72  and  the  call  will  be  parked.  Parking  lot  number  (default  range  701  to  

720)  will  be  announced  after  parking  the  call.  

 

•  

Feature  Misc-­>Call  Park  (Default  code  700)  

During  an  active  call,  initiate  blind  transfer  (default  code  #1)  and  then  dial  700  to  park  the  call.  Parking   lot  number  (default  range  701  to  720)  will  be  announced  after  parking  the  call.  

 

RETRIEVE  THE  PARKED  CALL  

 

 

To  retrieve  the  parked  call,  simply  dial  the  parking  lot  number  and  the  call  will  be  established.  If  a  parked   call  is  not  retrieved  after  the  timeout,  the  original  extension  who  parks  the  call  will  be  called  back.  

ENABLE  SPY  

 

If  “Enable  Spy”  option  is  enabled,  feature  codes  for  Listen  Spy,  Whisper  Spy  and  Barge  Spy  are  available   for  users  to  dial  from  any  extension  to  perform  the  corresponding  actions.  

 

Assume  a  call  is  on-­going  between  extension  A  and  extension  B,  user  could  dial  the  feature  code  from   extension  C  to  listen  on  their  call  (*54  by  default),  whisper  to  one  side  (*55  by  default),  or  barge  into  the  call  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  247  of  304    

 

 

 

(*56  by  default).  Then  the  user  will  be  asked  to  enter  the  number  to  call,  which  should  be  either  side  of  the   active  call,  extension  A  or  B  in  this  example.    

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

  Caution:

 

 

“Enable  Spy”  allows  any  user  to  listen  to  any  call  by  feature  codes.  This  may  result  in  the  leakage  of  user  

 

privacy.  

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  248  of  304    

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  249  of  304    

 

 

INTERNAL  OPTIONS  

 

This  section  describes  internal  options  that  haven't  been  mentioned  in  previous  sections  yet.  The  settings   in  this  section  can  be  applied  globally  to  the  UCM6100,  including  general  configurations,  jitter  buffer,  RTP   settings,   ports   config   and   STUN   monitor.   The   options   can   be   accessed   via   Web   GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal  

 

Options.  

INTERNAL  OPTIONS/GENERAL  

 

Table  76:  Internal  Options/General  

General  Preferences

 

Global  OutBound  CID  

Global  OutBound  CID  Name  

Operator  Extension  

Ring  Timeout  

Record  Prompt  

Configure  the  global  CallerID  used  for  all  outbound  calls  when  no  other  

CallerID   is   defined   with   higher   priority.   If   no   CallerID   is   defined   for   extension  or  trunk,  the  global  outbound  CID  will  be  used  as  CallerID.  

Configure   the   global   CallerID   Name   used   for   all   outbound   calls.   If   configured,   all   outbound   calls   will   have   the   CallerID   Name   set   to   this   name.  If  not,  the  extension's  CallerID  Name  will  be  used.  

Specify  the  operator  extension,  which  will  be  dialed  when  users  presses  0   to  exit  voicemail  application.  The  operator  extension  can  also  be  used  in  

IVR  option.  

Configure   the   number   of   seconds   to   ring   an   extension   before   the   call   goes  to  the  user's  voicemail  box.  The  default  setting  is  60.    

 

Note:  

This  is  the  global  value  used  for  each  extension  if  "Ring  Timeout"  field  is   left  empty  on  the  extension  configuration  page.      

If   enabled,   users   will   hear   voice   prompt   before   recording   is   started   or   stopped.   For   example,   before   recording,   the   UCM6100   will   play   voice   prompt  "The  call  will  be  recorded".  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

Extension  Preferences

 

Enforce  Strong  Passwords  

If  enabled,  strong  password  will  be  enforced  for  the  password  created  on  

  the  UCM6100.  The  default  setting  is  enabled.  

Strong  Password  Rules:  

1.   Password  for  voicemail,  voicemail  group,  outbound  route,  DISA,  call   queue   and   conference   requires   non-­repetitive   and   non-­sequential   digits,   with   a   minimum   length   of   4   digits.   Repetitive   digits   pattern  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  250  of  304    

 

Enable  Random  Password  

Disable  Extension  Range  

Extension  Ranges  

 

(such  as  0000,  1111,  1234,  2345,  and  etc),  or  common  digits  pattern  

(such  as  111222,  321321  and  etc)  are  not  allowed  to  be  configured  as   password.  

 

2.   Password  for  extension  registration,  web  GUI  admin  login,  LDAP  and  

LDAP  sync  requires  alphanumeric  characters  containing  at  least  two   categories  of  the  following,  with  a  minimum  length  of  4  characters.  

•  

Numeric  digits  

•  

Lowercase  alphabet  characters  

•  

Uppercase  alphabet  characters  

•  

Special  characters  

If   enabled,   random   password   will   be   generated   when   the   extension   is   created.   The   default   setting   is   "Yes".   It   is   recommended   to   enable   it   for   security  purpose.  

 

If   set   to   "Yes",   users   could   disable   the   extension   range   pre-­configured/configured  on  the  UCM6100.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

Note:  

It  is  recommended  to  keep  the  system  assignment  to  avoid  inappropriate   usage  and  unnecessary  issues.  

 

The  default  extension  range  assignment  is:  

•  

User  Extensions:  1000-­6299  

User   Extensions   is   referring   to   the   extensions   created   under   web  

 

UI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call  Routes-­>Extensions  page.  

•  

Pick  Extensions:  4000-­4999  

This   refers   to   the   extensions   that   can   be   manually   picked   from   end   device   when   being   provisioned   by   the   UCM6100.   There   are   two   related   options   in   zero   config   page-­>Auto   Provision   Settings,   "Pick  

Extension   Segment"   and   "Enable   Pick   Extension".   If   "Enable   Pick  

Extension"   under   zero   config   settings   is   selected,   the   extension   list   defined   in   "Pick   Extension   Segment"   will   be   sent   out   to   the   device   after   receiving   the   device's   request.   This   "Pick   Extension   Segment"   should  be  a  subset  of  the  "Pick  Extensions"  range  here.  This  feature   is  for  the  GXP  series  phones  that  support  selecting  extension  to  be   provisioned  via  phone's  LCD.  

 

•  

Auto  Provision  Extensions:  5000-­6299  

This  sets  the  range  for  "Zero  Config  Extension  Segment"  which  is  the  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  251  of  304    

 

  extensions   can   be   assigned   on   the   UCM6100   to   provision   the   end   device.  

 

•  

Conference  Extensions:  6300-­6399  

•  

Ring  Group  Extensions:  6400-­6499  

•  

Queue  Extensions:  6500-­6599  

•  

Voicemail  Group  Extensions:  6600-­6699  

•  

IVR  Extensions:  7000-­7100  

 

•  

Fax  Extensions:  7200-­8200  

 

 

 

INTERNAL  OPTIONS/JITTER  BUFFER  

Table  77:  Internal  Options/Jitter  Buffer  

SIP  Jitter  Buffer

 

Enable  Jitter  Buffer  

Jitter  Buffer  Size  

Max  Jitter  Buffer  

Implementation  

Select  to  enable  jitter  buffer  on  the  sending  side  of  the  SIP  channel.  The   default  setting  is  "No".  

Configure  the  time  (in  ms)  to  buffer.  This  is  the  jitter  buffer  size  used  in  

"Fixed"   jitter   buffer,   or   used   as   the   initial   time   for   "adaptive"   jitter   buffer.  

The  default  setting  is  100.  

Configure  the  maximum  time  (in  ms)  to  buffer  for  "Adaptive"  jitter  buffer   implementation,   or   used   as   the   jitter   buffer   size   for   "Fixed"   jitter   buffer   implementation.  The  default  setting  is  200.  

Configure   the   jitter   buffer   implementation   on   the   sending   side   of   a   SIP   channel.  The  default  setting  is  "Fixed".  

•  

Fixed  

The  size  is  always  equal  to  the  value  of  "Max  Jitter  Buffer".  

•  

Adaptive  

The  size  is  adjusted  automatically  and  the  maximum  value  equals  to   the  value  of  "Max  Jitter  Buffer".  

 

INTERNAL  OPTIONS/RTP  SETTINGS  

 

Table  78:  Internal  Options/RTP  Settings  

RTP  Start  

RTP  End  

Configure  the  RTP  port  starting  number.  The  default  setting  is  10000.    

Configure  the  RTP  port  ending  address.  The  default  setting  is  20000.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  252  of  304    

 

 

Strict  RTP  

Configure   to   enable   or   disable   strict   RTP   protection.   If   enabled,   RTP   packets   that   do   not   come   from   the   source   of   the   RTP   stream   will   be   dropped.  The  default  setting  is  "Disable".  

Configure   to   enable   or   disable   RTP   Checksums   on   RTP   traffic.   The   default  setting  is  "Disable".  

RTP  Checksums  

 

INTERNAL  OPTIONS/PORTS  CONFIG  

The  analog  hardware  (FXS  port  and  FXO  port)  on  the  UCM6100  will  be  listed  in  this  page.  Click  on     to  

  edit  signaling  preference  for  FXS  port  or  configure  ACIM  settings  for  FXO  port.  

 

Select  "Loop  Start"  or  "Kewl  Start"  for  each  FXS  port.  And  then  click  on  "Update"  to  save  the  change.  

 

Figure  145:  FXS  Ports  Signaling  Preference  

 

For  FXO  port,  users  could  manually  enter  the  ACIM  settings  by  selecting  the  value  from  dropdown  list  for   each  port.  Or  users  could  click  on  "Detect"  for  the  UCM6100  to  automatically  detect  the  ACIM  value.  The   detecting  value  will  be  automatically  filled  into  the  settings.  

Tone  Region  

Advanced  Settings

 

FXO  Opermode  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

 

Figure  146:  FXO  Ports  ACIM  Settings  

 

Table  79:  Internal  Options/Ports  Config  

Select  country  to  set  the  default  tones  for  dial  tone,  busy  tone,  ring  tone   and  etc  to  be  sent  from  the  FXS  port.  The  default  setting  is  "United  States   of  America  (USA)".  

Select   country   to   set   the   On   Hook   Speed,   Ringer   Impedance,   Ringer  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  253  of  304    

 

 

FXS  Opermode  

FXS  TISS  Override  

PCMA  Override  

Boost  Ringer  

Fast  Ringer  

Low  Power  

Ring  Detect  

FXS  MWI  Mode  

Threshold,   Current   Limiting,   TIP/RING   voltage   adjustment,   Minimum  

Operational   Loop   Current,   and   AC   Impedance   as   predefined   for   your   country's  analog  line  characteristics.  The  default  setting  is  "United  States   of  America  (USA)".  

Select   country   to   set   the   On   Hook   Speed,   Ringer   Impedance,   Ringer  

Threshold,   Current   Limiting,   TIP/RING   voltage   adjustment,   Minimum  

Operational   Loop   Current,   and   AC   Impedance   as   predefined   for   your   country's  analog  line  characteristics.  The  default  setting  is  "United  States   of  America  (USA)".  

 

Configure   to   enable   or   disable   override   Two-­Wire   Impedance   Synthesis  

(TISS).  The  default  setting  is  No.  

If   enabled,   users   can   select   the   impedance   value   for   Two-­Wire  

Impedance  Synthesis  (TISS)  override.  The  default  setting  is  600Ω.  

Select   the   codec   to   be   used   for   analog   lines.   North   American   users   should  choose  PCMU.  All  other  countries,  unless  already  known,  should   be  assumed  to  be  PCMA.  The  default  setting  is  PCMU.  

 

Note:  

This  option  requires  system  reboot  to  take  effect.  

Configure   whether   normal   ringing   voltage   (40V)   or   maximum   ringing   voltage  (89V)  for  analog  phones  attached  to  the  FXS  port  is  required.  The   default  setting  is  "Normal".  

Configure  to  increase  the  ringing  speed  to  25HZ.  This  option  can  be  used   with  "Low  Power"  option.  The  default  setting  is  "Normal".  

Configure  the  peak  voltage  up  to  50V  during  "Fast  Ringer"  operation.  This   option  is  used  with  "Fast  Ringer".  The  default  setting  is  "Normal".  

If  set  to  "Full  Wave",  false  ring  detection  will  be  prevented  for  lines  where  

Caller  ID  is  sent  before  the  first  ring  and  proceeded  by  a  polarity  reversal,   as  in  UK.  The  default  setting  is  "Standard".  

Configure   the   type   of   Message   Waiting   Indicator   on   FXS   lines.   The   default  setting  is  "FSK".  

•  

FSK:  Frequency  Shift  Key  Indicator  

•  

NEON:  Light  Neon  Bulb  Indicator.  

 

 

INTERNAL  OPTIONS/STUN  MONITOR  

 

Table  80:  Internal  Options/STUN  Monitor  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  254  of  304    

 

 

STUN  Server  

 

Configures   the   IP   address   or   URL   of   the   STUN   server   to   query.   If   not   specified,  STUN  is  disabled.  The  default  setting  is  stun.ipvideotalk.com.  

Valid  format:  

[(hostname  |  IP-­address)  [':'  port]  

The  default  port  number  is  3478  if  not  specified.  

Configure  the  number  of  seconds  between  STUN  Refreshes.  The  default   setting  is  30  seconds.  

STUN  Refresh  

 

INTERNAL  OPTIONS/PAYLOAD  

 

 

The  UCM6100  payload  type  for  audio  codecs  and  video  codes  can  be  configured  here.  

Table  81:  Internal  Options/Payload  

AAL2-­G.726  

DTMF  

G.721  Compatible  

G.726   iLBC  

H.264  

H.263P  

Configure   payload   type   for   ADPCM   (G.726,   32kbps,   AAL2   codeword   packing).  The  default  setting  is  112.  

Configured  payload  type  for  DTMF.  The  default  setting  is  101.  

Configure  to  enable/disable  G.721  compatible.  The  default  setting  is  Yes.  

Configure  the  payload  type  for  G.726  if  "G.721  Compatible"  is  disabled.  

The  default  setting  is  111.  

Configure  the  payload  type  for  iLBC.  The  default  setting  is  97.  

Configure  the  payload  type  for  H.264.  The  default  setting  is  99.  

Configure  the  payload  type  for  H.263+.  The  default  setting  is  100  103.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  255  of  304    

 

 

IAX  SETTINGS  

 

 

The  UCM6100  IAX  global  settings  can  be  accessed  via  Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>IAX  Settings.  

IAX  SETTINGS/GENERAL  

Bind  Port  

Bind  Address  

IAX1  Compatibility  

No  Checksums  

Delay  Reject  

ADSI  

Music  On  Hold  Interpret  

Table  82:  IAX  Settings/General  

Configure  the  port  number  that  the  IAX2  will  be  allowed  to  listen  to.  The   default  setting  is  4569.  

Configure  the  address  that  the  IAX2  will  be  forced  to  bind  to.  The  default   setting  is  0.0.0.0,  which  means  all  addresses.  

Select  to  configure  IAX1  compatibility.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

If   selected,   UDP   checksums   will   be   disabled   and   no   checksums   will   be   calculated/checked   on   systems   supporting   this   features.   The   default   setting  is  "No".  

If   enabled,   the   IAX2   will   delay   the   rejection   of   calls   to   avoid   DOS.   The   default  setting  is  "No".  

Select  to  enable  ADSI  phone  compatibility.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

Specify   which   Music   On   Hold   class   this   channel   would   like   to   listen   to   when  being  put  on  hold.  This  music  class  is  only  effective  if  this  channel   has  no  music  class  configured  and  the  bridged  channel  putting  the  call  on   hold  has  no  "Music  On  Hold  Suggest"  setting.  

Specify   which   Music   On   Hold   class   to   suggest   to   the   bridged   channel   when  putting  the  call  on  hold.  

Configure  the  bandwidth  for  IAX  settings.  The  default  setting  is  "Low".  

Music  On  Hold  Suggest  

Bandwidth  

 

IAX  SETTINGS/REGISTRATION  

Table  83:  IAX  Settings/Registration  

IAX  Registration  Options

 

Min  Reg  Expire  

Max  Reg  Expire  

IAX  Thread  Count  

IAX  Max  Thread  Count  

Configure   the   minimum   period   (in   seconds)   of   registration.   The   default   setting  is  60.  

Configure   the   maximum   period   (in   seconds)   of   registration.   The   default   setting  is  3600.  

Configure  the  number  of  IAX  helper  threads.  The  default  setting  is  10.  

Configure   the   maximum   number   of   IAX   threads   allowed.   The   default   setting  is  100.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  256  of  304    

 

 

Auto  Kill  

Authentication  Debugging  

Codec  Priority  

If   set   to   "yes",   the   connection   will   be   terminated   if   ACK   for   the   NEW   message  is  not  received  within  2000ms.  Users  could  also  specify  number  

(in  milliseconds)  in  addition  to  "yes"  and  "no".  The  default  setting  is  "yes".  

If   enabled,   authentication   traffic   in   debugging   will   not   show.   The   default   setting  is  "No".    

Configure  codec  negotiation  priority.  The  default  setting  is  "Reqonly".  

•  

Caller  

Consider  the  callers  preferred  order  ahead  of  the  host's.  

•  

Host  

Consider  the  host's  preferred  order  ahead  of  the  caller's.  

•  

Disabled  

Disable  the  consideration  of  codec  preference  all  together.  

•  

Reqonly  

This   is   almost   the   same   as   "Disabled",   except   when   the   requested   format  is  not  available.  The  call  will  only  be  accepted  if  the  requested   format  is  available.    

Configure  ToS  bit  for  preferred  IP  routing.   Type  of  Service  

IAX  Trunk  Options

 

Trunk  Frequency  

Trunk  Time  Stamps  

 

Configure   the   frequency   of   trunk   frames   (in   milliseconds).   The   default   setting  is  20.  

If   enabled,   time   stamps   will   be   attached   to   trunk   frames.   The   default   setting  is  "No".  

 

IAX  SETTINGS/STATIC  DEFENSE  

Table  84:  IAX  Settings/Static  Defense  

Call  Token  Optional  

Enter  a  single  IP  address  (e.g.,  11.11.11.11)  or  a  range  of  IP  addresses  

(11.11.11.11/22.22.22.22)  for  which  call  token  validation  is  not  required.  

Max  Call  Numbers   Configure  the  maximum  number  of  calls  allowed  for  a  single  IP  address.  

Max  Unvalidated  Call  Numbers   Configure  the  maximum  number  of  unvalidated  calls  for  all  IP  addresses.  

Call  Number  Limits   Configure  to  limit  the  number  of  calls  for  a  give  IP  address  of  IP  range.  

IP  or  IP  Range  

Enter   the   IP   address   (11.11.11.11)   or   a   range   of   IP   addresses  

(11.11.11.11/22.22.22.22)  to  be  considered  for  call  number  limits.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  257  of  304    

 

 

SIP  SETTINGS  

 

 

The  UCM6100  SIP  global  settings  can  be  accessed  via  Web  GUI-­>PBX-­>SIP  Settings.  

SIP  SETTINGS/GENERAL  

Realm  For  Digest  

Authentication  

Bind  UDP  Port  

Bind  IP  Address  

Allow  Guest  Calls  

Overlap  Dialing  

Allow  Transfer  

Enable  DNS  SRV  Lookups  on  

Outbound  Calls  

MWI  From  

Table  85:  SIP  Settings/General  

Configure   the   host   name   or   domain   name   for   the   UCM6100.   Realms  

MUST   be   globally   unique   according   to   RFC3261.   The   default   setting   is  

Grandstream.  

Configure  the  UDP  port  used  for  SIP.  The  default  setting  is  5060.  

Configure  the  IP  address  to  bind  to.  The  default  setting  is  0.0.0.0,  which   means  binding  to  all  addresses.  

If   enabled,   the   UCM6100   allows   unauthorized   INVITE   coming   into   the  

 

PBX  and  the  call  can  be  made.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

Warning:

 

Please  be  aware  of  the  potential  security  risk  when  enabling  "Allow  Guest  

Calls"  as  this  will  allow  any  user  with  the  UCM6100  address  to  dial  into   the  UCM6100.  

Select  to  enable  overlap  dialing  support.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

If  set  to  "No",  all  transfers  initiated  by  the  endpoint  in  the  UCM6100  will  be   disabled  (unless  enabled  in  peers  or  users).  The  default  setting  is  "Yes".  

Select   to   enables   DNS   SRV   lookups   on   outbound   calls   from   the  

UCM6100.  The  default  setting  is  "Yes".  

When   sending   MWI   NOTIFY   requests,   this   value   will   be   used   in   the  

"From:"  header  as  the  "name"  field.  If  no  "From  User"  is  configured,  the      

"user"  field  of  the  URI  in  the  "From:"  header  will  be  filled  with  this  value.  

SIP  Domain  Support

 

Domain  

From  Domain  

Configure   the   domain   for   the   UCM6100.   Incoming   INVITE   and   REFER   messages   can   be   matched   against   a   list   of   "allowed"   domains,   each   of   which   can   direct   the   call   to   a   specific   context   if   desired.   By   default,   all   domains   are   accepted   and   sent   to   the   default   context   or   the   context   associated   with   the   user/peer   placing   the   call.   Register   to   non-­local   domains  will  be  automatically  denied  if  a  domain  list  is  configured.  Up  to  

10  domains  can  be  added.  

Configure  the  domain  in  the  "From:"  header  of  the  SIP  message.  It  may  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  258  of  304    

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Auto  Domain   be  required  by  some  providers  for  authentication.  

If  enabled,  the  UCM6100  will  add  local  host  name  and  local  IP  to  domain   list.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

If   enabled,   requests   for   external   domains   that   are   not   served   by   the  

UCM6100  will  be  allowed.  The  default  setting  is  "Yes".  

Allow  External  Domains  

 

SIP  SETTINGS/MISC  

Table  86:  SIP  Settings/Misc  

Outbound  SIP  Registrations

 

Register  Timeout  

Register  Attempts  

Configure  the  register  retry  timeout  (in  seconds).  The  default  setting  is  20.  

Configure  the  number  of  registration  attempts  before  the  UCM6100  gives   up.  The  default  setting  is  0,  which  means  the  UCM6100  will  keep  trying   until  the  server  side  accepts  the  registration  request.  

Video

 

Max  Bit  Rate  (kb/s)  

Support  SIP  Video  

Generate  Manager  Events  

Reject  Non-­Matching  INVITE  

Configure   the   maximum   bit   rate   (in   kb/s)   for   video   calls.   The   default   setting  is  384.  

Select  to  enable  video  support  in  SIP  calls.  The  default  setting  is  "Yes".  

If   enabled,   the   UCM6100   will   generate   manager   events   when   SIP   UA   performs  events  (e.g.  Hold).  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

If  enabled,  when  rejecting  an  incoming  INVITE  or  REGISTER  request,  the  

UCM6100  will  always  reject  with  "401  Unauthorized"  instead  of  notifying   the   requester   whether   there   is   a   matching   user   or   peer   for   the   request.  

This  reduces  the  ability  of  an  attacker  to  scan  for  valid  SIP  usernames.  

The  default  setting  is  "No".  

 

SIP  SETTINGS/SESSION  TIMER  

 

Table  87:  SIP  Settings/Session  Timer  

Session  Timers  

Session  Expire  

Select  the  session  timer  mode.  The  default  setting  is  "Accept".  

The  options  are:  

•  

Originate  

Always  request  and  run  session  timer.  

•  

Accept  

Run  session  timer  only  when  requested  by  other  UA.    

•  

Refuse  

Do  not  run  session  timer.  

Configure  the  maximum  session  refresh  interval  (in  seconds).  The  default  

Page  259  of  304    

 

 

Min  SE  

Session  Refresher   setting  is  1800.  

Configure  the  minimum  session  refresh  interval  (in  seconds).  The  default   setting  is  90.  

Select   the   session   refresher   to   be   UAC   or   UAS.   The   default   setting   is  

UAC.  

 

SIP  SETTINGS/TCP  AND  TLS  

TCP  Enable  

TCP  Bind  Address  

TLS  Enable  

TLS  Bind  Address  

TLS  Client  Protocol  

TLS  Do  Not  Verify  

TLS  Self-­Signed  CA  

TLS  Cert  

 

Table  88:  SIP  Settings/TCP  and  TLS  

Configure   to   allow   incoming   TCP   connections   with   the   UCM6100.   The   default  setting  is  "No".  

Configure  the  IP  address  for  TCP  server  to  bind  to.  0.0.0.0  means  binding   to  all  interfaces.  The  port  number  is  optional.  If  not  specified,  5060  will  be   used.  

Configure   to   allow   incoming   TLS   connections   with   the   UCM6100.   The   default  setting  is  "No".  

Configure  the  IP  address  for  TLS  server  to  bind  to.  0.0.0.0  means  binding   to  all  interfaces.  The  port  number  is  optional.  If  not  specified,  5061  will  be  

  used.  

Note:  

The   IP   address   must   match   the   common   name   (hostname)   in   the   certificate.  Please  do  not  bind  a  TLS  socket  to  multiple  IP  addresses.  For   details   on   how   to   construct   a   certificate   for   SIP,   please   refer   to   the   following  document:   http://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-­ietf-­sip-­domain-­certs  

Select   the   TLS   protocol   for   outbound   client   connections.   The   default   setting  is  TLSv1.  

If  enabled,  the  TLS  server's  certificate  won't  be  verified  when  acting  as  a   client.  The  default  setting  is  "Yes".  

This   is   the   CA   certificate   if   the   TLS   server   being   connected   to   requires   self-­signed   certificate,   including   server's   public   key.   This   file   will   be   renames  as  "TLS.ca"  automatically.  

 

Note:  

The  size  of  the  uploaded  ca  file  must  be  under  2MB.  

This  is  the  Certificate  file  (*.pem  format  only)  used  for  TLS  connections.  It  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  260  of  304    

 

TLS  CA  Cert  

 

  contains  private  key  for  client  and  signed  certificate  for  the  server.  This  file   will  be  renamed  as  "TLS.pem"  automatically.  

Note:  

The  size  of  the  uploaded  certificate  file  must  be  under  2MB.  

This  file  must  be  named  with  the  CA  subject  name  hash  value.  It  contains  

CA's   (Certificate   Authority)   public   key,   which   is   used   to   verify   the   accessed  servers.  

 

Note:  

The  size  of  the  uploaded  CA  certificate  file  must  be  under  2MB.  

Display  a  list  of  files  under  the  CA  Cert  directory.   TLS  CA  List  

 

SIP  SETTINGS/NAT  

External  IP  Address  

External  Host  

External  Refresh  

External  TCP  Port  

External  TLS  Port  

Local  Network  Address  

Table  89:  SIP  Settings/NAT  

Configure   a   static   address   and   port   (optional)   that   will   be   used   in   outbound   SIP   messages   if   the   UCM6100   is   behind   NAT.   If   it's   a   hostname,  it  will  only  be  looked  up  once.  

Specify   an   external   host   name,   which   is   similar   to   External   Address   except   the   host   name   will   be   looked   up   periodically   based   on   the  

"External  Refresh"  interval.    

Configure   the   refresh   interval   for   the   external   host   (if   used)   The   default   setting  is  10.  

Configure  the  externally  mapped  TCP  port  when  the  UCM6100  is  behind   a  static  NAT  or  PAT.  

Configures  the  externally  mapped  TLS  port  when  UCM6100  is  behind  a   static  NAT  or  PAT.  

Specify  a  list  of  network  addresses  that  are  considered  inside  of  the  NAT   network.   Multiple   entries   are   allowed.   If   not   configured,   the   external   IP  

  address  will  not  be  set  correctly.  

A  sample  configuration  could  be  as  follows:  

192.168.0.0/16  

 

SIP  SETTINGS/TOS  

ToS  For  SIP  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Table  90:  SIP  Settings/ToS  

Configure   the   Type   of   Service   for   SIP   packets.   The   default   setting   is  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  261  of  304    

 

 

ToS  For  RTP  Audio  

ToS  For  RTP  Video  

Default  Incoming/Outgoing  

Registration  Time  

Max  Registration/Subscription  

Time  

Min  Registration/Subscription  

Time  

Music  On  Hold  Interpret  

Music  On  Hold  Suggest  

Enable  Relaxed  DTMF  

DTMF  Mode  

RTP  Timeout  

RTP  Hold  Timeout  

Trust  Remote  Party  ID  

Send  Remote  Party  ID  

Generate  In-­Band  Ringing  

None.  

Configure  the  Type  of  Service  for  RTP  audio  packets.  The  default  setting   is  None.  

Configure  the  Type  of  Service  for  RTP  video  packets.  The  default  setting   is  None.  

Configure   the   default   duration   (in   seconds)   of   incoming/outgoing   registration.  The  default  setting  is  120.  

Configure   the   maximum   duration   (in   seconds)   of   incoming   registration   and  subscription  allowed  by  the  UCM6100.  The  default  setting  is  3600.  

Configure  the  minimum  duration  (in  seconds)  of  incoming  registration  and   subscription  allowed  by  the  UCM6100.  The  default  setting  is  60.  

Configure   the   Music   On   Hold   class   for   the   channel   when   being   put   on   hold.  This  is  used  when  the  Music  On  Hold  class  is  not  set  on  the  channel   and   the   peer   channel   placing   the   call   on   hold   doesn't   have   "Music   On  

Hold  Suggest".  

Configure  the  Music  On  Hold  class  to  suggest  to  the  peer  channel  when   placing  the  peer  on  hold.  

Select  to  enable  relaxed  DTMF  handling.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

Select   DTMF   mode   to   send   DTMF.   The   default   setting   is   RFC2833.   If  

"Info"  is  selected,  SIP  INFO  message  will  be  used.  If  "Inband"  is  selected,  

64-­kbit  codec  PCMU  and  PCMA  are  required.  When  "Auto"  is  selected,  

"RFC2833"  will  be  used  if  offered,  otherwise  "Inband"  will  be  used.  The   default  setting  is  "RFC2833".  

 

During   an   active   call,   if   there   is   no   RTP   activity   within   the   timeout   (in   seconds),  the  call  will  be  terminated.  The  default  setting  is  no  timeout.    

Note:  

This  setting  doesn't  apply  to  calls  on  hold.  

When  the  call  is  on  hold,  if  there  is  no  RTP  activity  within  the  timeout  (in   seconds),   the   call   will   be   terminated.   This   value   of   RTP   Hold   Timeout   should  be  larger  than  RTP  Timeout.  The  default  setting  is  no  timeout.  

Configure   whether   the   Remote-­Party-­ID   should   be   trusted.   The   default   setting  is  "No".  

Configure   whether   the   Remote-­Party-­ID   should   be   sent   or   not.   The   default  setting  is  "No".  

Configure  whether  the  UCM6100  should  generate  inband  ringing  or  not.  

The  default  setting  is  "Never".  

•  

Yes:   The   UCM6100   will   send   180   Ringing   followed   by   183   Session  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  262  of  304    

 

Server  User  Agent  

Send  Compact  SIP  Headers  

Add  "user=phone"  to  URI  

 

 

 

Progress  and  in-­band  audio.  

•  

No:  The  UCM6100  will  send  180  Ringing  if  183  Session  Progress  has   not  been  sent  yet.  If  audio  path  is  established  already  with  183  then   send  in-­band  ringing.  

•  

Never:  Whenever  ringing  occurs,  the  UCM6100  will  send  180  Ringing   as   long   as   200OK   has   not   been   set   yet.   Inband   ringing   will   not   be   generated  even  the  end  point  device  is  not  working  properly.  

Configure  the  user  agent  string  for  the  UCM6100.  

If  enabled,  compact  SIP  headers  will  be  sent.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

If  enabled,  "user=phone"  will  be  added  to  URI  that  contains  a  valid  phone   number.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  263  of  304    

 

VALUE-­‐‑ADDED  FEATURES  

FAX  SENDING  

 

The   UCM6100   supports   sending   Fax   via   web   UI   access.   This   feature   can   be   found   on   web  

UI-­>PBX-­>Value-­added  Features-­>Fax  Sending  page.  In  order  to  send  fax,  pre-­setup  for  analog  trunk  

  and   outbound   route   is   required.   Please   refer   to  

[ANALOG   TRUNKS],   [VOIP   TRUNKS]

  and  

[OUTBOUND  

ROUTES]

 sections  for  configuring  analog  trunk  and  outbound  route.  

After   making   sure   analog   trunk   or   VoIP   Trunk   is   setup   properly   and   UCM6100   can   reach   out   to   PSTN   numbers  via  the  trunk,  on  Fax  Sending  page,  enter  the  fax  number  and  upload  the  file  to  be  faxed.  Then  

  click  on  “Send”  to  start.  The  progress  of  sending  fax  will  be  displayed  in  web  UI.  Users  can  also  view  the   sending  history  is  in  the  same  web  page.  

 

 

Figure  147:  Fax  Sending  in  Web  UI  

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  264  of  304    

 

ANNOUNCEMENTS  CENTER  

 

UCM6100   series   supports   Announcements   Center   feature   starting   from   firmware   version   1.0.9.26.  

Announcements  Center  allows  users  to  previously  record  and  store  voice  message  into  UCM6100  with  a   specified  code.  The  users  can  also  create  group  with  specified  extensions.  When  the  code  and  the  group   number  are  dialed  together  in  the  combination  of  code  +  group  number,  the  specified  voice  message  is  

 

  sent  to  all  group  members  and  only  extensions  in  the  group  will  hear  the  voice  message.    

 

 

Figure  148:  Announcements  Center  

 

ANNOUNCEMENTS  CENTER  SETTINGS  

Table  91:  Announcements  Center  Settings  

Name  

Code  

Custom  Prompt  

Ring  Timeout  

Configure   a   name   for   the   newly   created   Announcements   Center   for   identify  this  announcement  center.  

Enter   a   code   number   for   the   custom   prompt.   This   code   will   be   used   in   combination  with  the  group  number.  For  example,  if  the  code  is  55,  and   group  number  is  666.  The  user  can  dial  55666  to  send  prompt  55  to  all  

  members  in  group  666.  

Note:  

The  combination  number  must  not  conflict  with  any  number  in  the  system   such  as  extension  number  or  conference  number.  

This  option  is  to  set  a  custom  prompt  as  an  announcement  to  notify  group   members.   The   file   can   be   uploaded   from   page   ‘Custom   Prompt’.   Click  

‘Prompt’  to  add  additional  record.  

Configure  the  ring  timeout  for  the  group  members.  The  default  value  is  30   seconds.    

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  265  of  304    

 

 

 

GROUP  SETTINGS  

Table  92:  Group  Settings  

Name   Configure  a  name  for  the  newly  created  group  to  identify  the  group.  

Number  

Configure  the  group  number.  The  group  number  is  used  in  combination   with  the  code.  For  example,  if  group  number  is  666,  and  code  is  55.  The  

  user  can  dial  55666  to  send  prompt  55  to  all  members  in  group  666.  

Note:  

The  combination  number  must  not  conflict  with  any  number  in  the  system   such  as  extension  number  or  conference  number.  

 

 

Announcements   Center   feature   can   be   found   under   web   UI-­>   PBX-­>Value-­added   Features-­>  

Announcements  Center.  The  following  example  demonstrates  the  usage  of  this  feature.    

1.   Click     to  create  new  group.    

2.   Give  a  name  to  the  newly  created  group.  

3.   Create  a  group  number  which  is  used  with  code  to  send  voice  message.    

4.   Select  the  extensions  to  be  included  in  the  group,  who  will  receive  the  voice  message.  

 

Figure  149:  Announcements  Center  Group  Configuration  

 

In  this  example,  group  “Test”  has  number  666.  Extension  1000,  1001  and  1002  are  in  this  group.    

5.   Click     to  create  a  new  Announcement  Center.    

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  266  of  304    

 

6.   Give  a  name  to  the  newly  created  Announcement  Center.  

7.   Specify  the  code  which  will  be  used  with  group  number  to  send  the  voice  message  to.  

8.   Select  the  message  that  will  be  used  by  the  code  from  the  Custom  Prompt  drop  down  menu.  To  create   a  new  Prompt,  please  click  “Prompt”  link  and  follow  the  instructions  in  that  page.  

 

 

 

Figure  150:  Announcements  Center  Code  Configuration  

 

Code  and  Group  number  are  used  together  to  direct  specified  message  to  the  target  group.  All  extensions   in  the  group  will  receive  the  message.  For  example,  we  can  send  code  55  to  group  666  by  dialing  55666  

  from  any  extension  registered  to  the  UCM6100.  All  the  members  in  group  666  which  are  extension  1000,  

1001  and  1002  will  receive  this  voice  message  after  they  pick  up  the  call.  

 

Figure  151:  Announcements  Center  Example  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  267  of  304    

 

STATUS  AND  REPORTING  

PBX  STATUS  

 

The  UCM6100  monitors  the  status  for  Trunks,  Extensions,  Queues,  Conference  Rooms,  Interfaces  and  

Parking   lot.   It   presents   administrators   the   real   time   status   in   different   sections   under   web  

 

GUI-­>Status-­>PBX  Status.  

 

 

Figure  152:  Status-­>PBX  Status  

 

TRUNKS  

 

 

Users  could  see  all  the  configured  trunk  status  in  this  section.  

Status  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  153:  Trunk  Status  

 

Table  93:  Trunk  Status  

Display  trunk  status.  

•  

Analog  trunk  status:  

Available  

Busy  

Unavailable  

Unknown  Error  

•  

SIP  Peer  trunk  status:  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  268  of  304    

 

Unreachable:  The  hostname  cannot  be  reached.  

Unmonitored:  QUALIFY  feature  is  not  turned  on  to  be  monitored.  

Reachable:  The  hostname  can  be  reached.  

•  

SIP  Register  trunk  status:  

Registered  

Unrecognized  Trunk  

Display  trunk  name   Trunks  

Type  

Username  

Display  trunk  Type:  

•  

Analog  

•  

SIP  

•  

IAX  

Display  username  for  this  trunk.  

Port/Hostname/IP   Display  Port  for  analog  trunk,  or  Hostname/IP  for  VoIP  (SIP/IAX)  trunk.  

 

 

Other  operations  are  also  available  in  trunk  status  section:  

 

•  

Click  on  "Trunks",  the  web  page  will  redirect  to  trunk  configuration  page  which  can  also  be  accessed   via  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call  Routes-­>Analog  Trunks.  

•  

Click  on     to  refresh  the  trunk  status.  

•  

Click  on  [  +  ]  to  expand  the  status  detail  table.  

•  

Click  on  [  -­  ]  to  hide  the  status  detail  table.  

 

EXTENSIONS  

 

Users  could  see  all  the  configured  extension  status  in  this  section.  

 

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  154:  Extension  Status  

 

 

 

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  269  of  304    

 

Table  94:  Extension  Status  

Status  

Display  extension  number  (including  feature  code).  The  color  indicator  has  the   following  definitions.  

•  

•  

  Green:  Free  

  Blue:  Ringing  

•  

•  

  Yellow:  In  Use  

  Grey:  Unavailable  

Display  the  extension  number.  

First  name  and  last  name  of  the  extension.  

Extension  

Name/Label  

Message  

Display  message  status  for  the  extension.  

Example:  2/4/1  

Description:   There   are   2   urgent   messages,   4   messages   in   total   and   1   message  that  has  been  already  read.  

Type  

Displays  extension  type.  

•  

SIP  User  

•  

IAX  User  

•  

Analog  User  

•  

Ring  Groups  

•  

Voicemail  Groups  

 

 

 

Other  operations  are  also  available  in  extension  status  section:  

•  

Click  on  "Extensions",  the  web  page  will  redirect  to  extension  configuration  page  which  can  also  be   accessed  via  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Basic/Call  Routes-­>Extensions.  

•  

Click  on     to  refresh  the  extension  status.  

 

•  

Click  on  one  of  the  tabs   the  corresponding  extensions  accordingly.  

 

•  

Click  on  [  +  ]  to  expand  the  status  detail  table.  

•  

Click  on  [  -­  ]  to  hide  the  status  detail  table.  

  to  display  

QUEUES  

 

Users   could   see   all   the   configured   call   queue   status   in   this   section.   The   following   figure   shows   the   call   queue  6500  being  in  used.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  270  of  304    

 

 

Figure  155:  Queue  Status  

 

The   current   call   status   (caller   ID,   duration),   agent   status,   service   level,   calls   summary  

(completed/abandoned)  are  shown  for  the  call  queue.  The  agent  status  is  defined  as  below.  

 

Table  95:  Agent  Status  

 

The  agent  is  available/idle.  

 

The  agent  is  ringing.  

 

The  agent  is  talking/busy.  

 

The  agent  has  been  logged  out.  

 

On  the  UCM6100,  Service  Level  is  defined  as  the  percentage  of  high-­quality  calls  over  all  calls  in  the  call   queue,  where  high-­quality  call  means  calls  answered  within  10  seconds.  

 

Other  operations  are  also  available  in  queue  status  section:  

 

•  

Click   on   "Queues",   the   web   page   will   redirect   to   call   queue   configuration   page   which   can   also   be   accessed  via  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Call  Features-­>Call  Queue.  

•  

Click  on     to  refresh  the  call  queue  status.  

•  

Click  on  [  +  ]  to  expand  the  call  queue  detail.  

 

•  

Click  on  [  -­  ]  to  hide  the  call  queue  detail.  

CONFERENCE  ROOMS  

 

Users   could   see   all   the   conference   room   status   in   this   section.   It   shows   all   the   configured   conference   rooms,  current  users,  call  duration  for  each  user  and  conference  call.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  156:  Conference  Room  Status  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  271  of  304    

 

 

Other  operations  are  also  available  in  conference  room  status  section:  

•  

Click  on  "Conference  Rooms",  the  web  page  will  redirect  to  conference  room  configuration  page  which   can  also  be  accessed  via  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Call  Features-­>Conference.  

•  

Click  on     to  refresh  the  conference  room  status.  

 

•  

Click  on  [  +  ]  to  expand  the  conference  room  details.  

•  

Click  on  [  -­  ]     to  hide  the  conference  room  details.  

INTERFACES  STATUS  

 

This  section  displays  interface/port  connection  status  on  the  UCM6100.  The  following  example  shows  the   interface  status  for  UCM6116  with  USB,  SD  card,  LAN  port  and  FXS1  connected.  

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  157:  UCM6116  Interfaces  Status  

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Table  96:  Interface  Status  Indicators  

USB  connected.  

USB  disconnected.  

SD  Card  connected.  

SD  Card  disconnected.  

LAN/WAN  connected.  

LAN/WAN  not  configured.  

LAN/WAN  disconnected.  

FXS/FXO  connected.  

FXS/FXO  waiting.  

FXS/FXO  busy.  

FXS/FXO  not  configured.  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  272  of  304    

 

 

FXS/FXO  disconnected.  

 

Other  operations  are  also  available  in  interface  status  section:  

 

•  

Click  on  "Interfaces  Status",  the  web  page  will  redirect  to  ports  configuration  page  which  can  also  be   accessed  via  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Ports  Config.  

•  

Click  on     to  refresh  the  interface  status.  

•  

Click  on  [  +  ]  to  expand  the  interface  details.  

 

•  

Click  on  [  -­  ]  to  hide  the  interface  details.  

PARKING  LOT  

 

 

The   UCM6100   supports   call   park   using   feature   code.   When   there   is   call   being   parked,   this   section   will   display  the  parking  lot  status.  

 

 

Figure  158:  Parking  Lot  Status  

 

Table  97:  Parking  Lot  Status  

Caller  ID  

Channel  

Extension  

Timeout  

Display  the  caller  ID  who  parks  the  call.  

Display  channel  for  the  call  park.  

Display  the  parking  lot  number  where  the  call  is  parked/retrieved.  

Display   timeout   (in   seconds)   for   the   parked   call.   The   status   page   will   dynamically  update  this  timer  from  120  seconds  (default)  to  0.  When  the  timer   reaches  0,  the  caller  who  parks  the  call  will  be  called  back.  

 

 

Other  operations  are  also  available  in  parking  lot  status  section:  

•  

Click  on  "Parking  Lot",  the  web  page  will  redirect  to  feature  codes  page  which  can  also  be  accessed   via  web  GUI-­>PBX-­>Internal  Options-­>Feature  Codes.  

•  

Click  on     to  refresh  the  parking  lot  status.  

 

•  

Click  on  [  +  ]  to  expand  the  parking  lot  details.  

•  

Click  on  [  -­  ]  to  hide  the  parking  details.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  273  of  304    

 

 

SYSTEM  STATUS  

 

The  UCM6100  system  status  can  be  accessed  via  Web  GUI-­>Status-­>System  Status,  which  displays  the   following  system  information.  

 

•  

General  

•  

Network  

•  

Storage  Usage  

•  

Resource  Usage  

 

GENERAL  

 

 

Under   Web   GUI-­>Status-­>System   Status-­>General,   users   could   check   the   hardware   and   software   information  for  the  UCM6100.  Please  see  details  in  the  following  table.  

Table  98:  System  Status-­>General  

Status  -­>System  Status  -­>  General

 

Model   Product  model.  

Part  Number   Product  part  number.  

System  Time  

Up  Time  

Boot  

Core  

Base  

Current  system  time.  The  current  system  time  is  also  available  on  the  upper  right  of   each  web  page.  

System  up  time  since  the  last  reboot.  

Boot  version.  

Core  version.  

Base  version.  

Program  

Recovery  

Program  version.  This  is  the  main  software  release  version.  

Recovery  version.  

 

NETWORK  

 

 

Under  Web  GUI-­>Status-­>System  Status-­>Network,  users  could  check  the  network  information  for  the  

UCM6100.  Please  see  details  in  the  following  table.  

Table  99:  System  Status-­>Network  

Status  -­>  System  Status  -­>  Network

 

MAC  Address   Global  unique  ID  of  device,  in  HEX  format.  The  MAC  address  can  be  found  on  the  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  274  of  304    

 

IP  Address  

Gateway  

Subnet  Mask  

DNS  Server  

  label  coming  with  original  box  and  on  the  label  located  on  the  bottom  of  the  device.  

IP  address.  

Default  gateway  address.  

Subnet  mask  address.  

DNS  Server  address.  

STORAGE  USAGE  

 

Users   could   access   the   storage   usage   information   from   Web   GUI-­>Status-­>System   Status-­>Storage  

Usage.  It  shows  the  available  and  used  space  for  the  following  partitions.  

•  

Configuration  partition  

This  partition  contains  PBX  system  configuration  files  and  service  configuration  files.  

•  

Data  partition  

Voicemail,  recording  files,  IVR  file,  Music  on  Hold  files  and  etc.  

•  

USB  disk  

USB  disk  will  display  if  connected.  

•  

SD  Card  

SD  Card  will  display  if  connected.  

 

 

Figure  159:  System  Status-­>Storage  Usage  

 

RESOURCE  USAGE  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  275  of  304    

 

When   configuring   and   managing   the   UCM6100,   users   could   access   resource   usage   information   to   estimate   the   current   usage   and   allocate   the   resources   accordingly.   Under   Web   GUI-­>Status-­>System  

 

Status-­>Resource  Usage,  the  current  CPU  usage  and  Memory  usage  are  shown  in  the  pie  chart.  

 

Figure  160:  System  Status-­>Resource  Usage  

 

SYSTEM  EVENTS  

 

The   UCM6100   can   monitor   important   system   events,   log   the   alerts   and   send   Email   notifications   to   the  

  system  administrator.  

 

ALERT  EVENTS  LIST  

 

The  system  alert  events  list  can  be  found  under  Web  GUI-­>Status-­>System  Events-­>Alert  Events  List.  

 

The  following  event  are  currently  supported  on  the  UCM6100  which  will  have  alert  and/or  Email  generated   if  occurred:  

Disk  Usage  

Modify  Admin  Password  

Memory  Usage  

System  Reboot  

System  Update  

System  Crash  

Register  SIP  Failed  

Register  SIP  Trunk  Failed  

Restore  Config  

User  Login  Success  

User  Login  Failed  

SIP  Internal  Call  Failure  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  276  of  304    

 

SIP  Outgoing  Call  through  Trunk  Failure  

Fail2ban  Blocking  

SIP  Lost  Registration  

SIP  Peer  Trunk  Status  

Click  on       to  configure  the  parameters  for  each  event.  See  examples  below.    

 

1.   Disk  Usage.  

 

Figure  161:  System  Events-­>Alert  Events  Lists:  Disk  Usage  

 

•  

Detect  Cycle:  The  UCM6100  will  perform  the  internal  disk  usage  detection  based  on  this  cycle.  

Users  can  enter  the  number  and  then  select  second(s)/minute(s)/hour(s)/day(s)  to  configure  the   cycle.  

•  

Alert   Threshold:   If   the   detected   value   exceeds   the   threshold   (in   percentage),   the   UCM6100   system  will  send  the  alert.  

 

2.   Memory  Usage  

 

 

Figure  162:  System  Events-­>Alert  Events  Lists:  Memory  Usage  

 

•  

Detect  Cycle:  The  UCM6100  will  perform  the  memory  usage  detection  based  on  this  cycle.  Users   can  enter  the  number  and  then  select  second(s)/minute(s)/hour(s)/day(s)  to  configure  the  cycle.  

•  

Alert   Threshold:   If   the   detected   value   exceeds   the   threshold   (in   percentage),   the   UCM6100   system  will  send  the  alert.  

 

3.   System  Reboot  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  277  of  304    

 

 

Figure  163:  System  Events-­>Alert  Events  Lists:  System  Reboot  

 

•  

Detect  Cycle:  The  UCM6100  will  check  the  system  reboot  based  on  this  cycle.  Users  can  enter   the  number  and  then  select  second(s)/minute(s)/hour(s)/day(s)  to  configure  the  cycle.  

 

4.   System  Crash  

 

Figure  164:  System  Events-­>Alert  Events  Lists:  System  Crash  

 

 

•  

Detect  Cycle:  The  UCM  will  detect  the  event  at  each  cycle  based  on  the  specified  time.  Users  can   enter  the  number  and  then  select  second(s)/minute(s)/hour(s)/day(s)  to  configure  the  cycle.  

Click  on  the  switch       to  turn  on/off  the  alert  and  Email  notification  for  the  event.  Users   could  also  select  the  checkbox  for  each  event  and  then  click  on  button  "Alert  On",  "Alert  Off",  "Email  

Notification  On",  "Email  Notification  Off"  to  control  the  alert  and  Email  notification  configuration.  

 

ALERT  LOG  

 

 

Under  Web  GUI-­>Status-­>System  Events-­>Alert  Log,  system  messages  from  triggered  system  events   are  listed  as  alert  logs.  The  following  screenshot  shows  system  crash  alert  logs.    

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  278  of  304    

 

 

Figure  165:  System  Events-­>Alert  Log  

 

User  could  also  filter  alert  logs  by  selecting  a  certain  event  category,  type  of  alert  log,  and/or  specifying  a   certain   time   period.   The   matching   results   will   be   displayed   after   clicking   on   classified  into  two  types  by  the  system:  

.   Alert   logs   are  

 

1.   Generate   Alert:   Generated   when   alert   events   happen,   for   example,   alert   logs   for   disk   usage   exceeding  the  alert  threshold.  

2.   Restore   to   Normal:   Generated   when   alert   events   being   cleared,   for   example,   logs   for   disk   usage   dropping  back  below  the  alert  threshold.  

 

User  could  filter  out  alert  logs  of  “Generate  Alert”  or  “Restore  to  Normal”  by  specifying  the  type  according  

  to  need.  The  following  figure  shows  an  example  of  filtering  out  alert  logs  of  type  of  “Restore  to  Normal”.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  166:  Filter  for  Alert  Log  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  279  of  304    

 

ALERT  CONTACT  

 

 

Users  could  add  administrator's  Email  address  under  Web  GUI-­>Status-­>System  Events-­>Alert  Contact   to  send  the  alert  notification  to.  Up  to  10  Email  addresses  can  be  added.  

CDR  

 

A   Call   Detail   Record   (CDR)   is   a   data   record   produced   by   telephone   exchange   activities   or   other   telecommunications  equipment  documenting  the  details  of  a  phone  call  that  passed  through  the  PBX.  The  

 

CDR  is  composed  of  the  following  data  fields  on  the  UCM6100.  

•  

Start  Time.  Format:  2013-­03-­27  16:47:03.  

•  

Call  From.  Format:  "John  Doe"<6012>.  

•  

Call  To.  Format:  6005.  

•  

Answered  By.  Format:  6005.  

•  

Call  Time.  Format:  0:00:10.  

•  

Talk  Time.  Format:  0:00:10  

•  

Status.  Format:  NO  ANSWER,  BUSY,  ANSWERED,  or  FAILED.  

•  

Options.  Voice  record  playing/downloading/deleting.  

 

Users   could   filter   the   call   report   by   specifying   the   date   range   and   criteria,   depending   on   how   the   users   would  like  to  include  the  logs  to  the  report.  Then  click  on  "View  Report"  button  to  display  the  generated   report.  

 

Figure  167:  CDR  Filter  

 

Inbound  calls  

Outbound  calls  

Internal  calls  

Table  100:  CDR  Filter  Criteria  

Inbound  calls  are  calls  originated  from  a  non-­internal  source  (like  a  VoIP  trunk)  and   sent  to  an  internal  extension.  

Outbound   calls   are   calls   sent   to   a   non-­internal   source   (like   a   VoIP   trunk)   from   an   internal  extension.  

Internal  calls  are  calls  from  one  internal  extension  to  another  extension,  which  are  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  280  of  304    

 

 

External  calls  

Inbound  Trunks  

Outbound  Trunks  

Start  Time  

End  Time   not  sent  over  a  trunk.  

External  calls  are  calls  sent  from  one  trunk  to  another  trunk,  which  are  not  sent  to  any   internal  extension.  

Select   certain   inbound   trunk(s)   and   the   CDR   of   calls   going   inbound   through   the   trunk(s)  will  be  filtered  out.  

Select  certain  outbound  trunk(s)  and  the  CDR  of  calls  going  outbound  through  the   trunk(s)  will  be  filtered  out.  

Specify  the  start  time  to  filter  the  CDR  report.  Click  on  the  calendar  icon  on  the  right   and  the  calendar  will  show  for  users  to  select  the  exact  date  and  time.  

Specify  the  end  time  to  filter  the  CDR  report.  Click  on  the  calendar  icon  on  the  right   and  the  calendar  will  show  for  users  to  select  the  exact  date  and  time.  

Caller  Number  

Caller  Name  

Callee  Number  

Enter   the   caller   number   to   filter   the   CDR   report.   CDR   with   the   matching   caller   number  will  be  filtered  out.  

User  could  specify  a  particular  caller  number  or  enter  a  pattern.  ‘.’  matches  zero  or   more   characters,   only   appears   in   the   end.   ‘X’   matches   any   digit   from   0   to   9,   case-­insensitive,  repeatable,  only  appears  in  the  end.  

 

For  example:  

3XXX:   It   will   filter   out   CDR   that   having   caller   number   with   leading   digit   3   and   of   4   digits  length.  

3.:   It   will   filter   out   CDR   that   having   caller   number   with   leading   digit   3   and   of   any   length.  

Enter  the  caller  name  to  filter  the  CDR  report.  CDR  with  the  matching  caller  name  will   be  filtered  out.  

Enter   the   callee   number   to   filter   the   CDR   report.   CDR   with   the   matching   callee   number  will  be  filtered  out.  

 

 

The  call  report  will  display  as  the  following  figure  shows.  

Figure  168:  Call  Report  

 

Users  could  perform  the  following  operations  on  the  call  report.  

•  

Sort  

Click  on  the  header  of  the  column  to  sort  by  this  category.  For  example,  clicking  on  "Start  Time"  will  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  281  of  304    

 

  sort  the  report  according  to  start  time.  Clicking  on  "Start  Time"  again  will  reverse  the  order.  

•  

Download  Searched  Results  

Click  on  “Download  Search  Result(s)”  to  export  the  records  filtered  out  to  a  .csv  file.  

•  

Download  All  Records  

Click  on  “Download  All  Records”  to  export  all  the  records  to  a  .csv  file.  

•  

Delete  All  

On  the  bottom  of  the  page,  click  on  "Delete  All"  button  to  remove  all  the  call  report  information.  

•  

Play/Download/Delete  Recording  File  (per  entry)  

If   the   entry   has   audio   recording   file   for   the   call,   the   three   icons   on   the   most   right   column   will   be   activated  for  users  to  select.  In  the  following  picture,  the  second  entry  has  audio  recording  file  for  the   call.  

Click  on     to  play  the  recording  file;;  click  on     to  download  the  recording  file  in  .wav  format;;  click   on     to  delete  the  recording  file  (the  call  record  entry  will  not  be  deleted).  

Figure  169:  Call  Report  Entry  with  Audio  Recording  File  

 

 

•  

Automatic  Download  CDR  Records  

User  could  configure  the  UCM6100  to  automatically  download  the  CDR  records  and  send  the  records   to   an   Email   address.   Click   on   “Automatic   Download   Settings”,   and   configure   the   parameters   in   the   dialog  below.    

 

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  170:  Automatic  Download  Settings  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  282  of  304    

 

To  receive  CDR  record  automatically  from  Email,  check  “Enable”  and  select  a  time  period  “By  Day”  “By  

Week”   or   “By   Month”   for   the   automatic   download   period.   Make   sure   you   have   entered   an   Email   address  to  receive  the  CDR  records.  

 

DOWNLOADED  CDR  FILE  

 

 

The  downloaded  CDR  (.csv  file)  has  different  format  from  the  web  UI  CDR.  Here  are  some  descriptions.  

 

•  

Call  From,  Call  To  

"Call  From":  the  caller  ID.  

 

"Call  To":  the  callee  ID.  

If  "Call  From"  shows  empty,  "Call  To"  shows  "s"  (see  highlight  part  in  the  picture  below)  and  the  "Source  

Channel"  contains  "DAHDI",  this  means  the  call  is  from  FXO/PSTN  line.  For  FXO/PSTN  line,  we  only  know   there  is  an  incoming  request  when  there  is  incoming  call  but  we  don't  know  the  number  being  called.  So  

  we  are  using  "s"  to  match  it  where  "s"  means  "start".  

 

Figure  171:  Downloaded  CDR  File  Sample  -­  Call  To  Shows  "s"  

 

 

•  

Context  

 

There  are  different  context  values  that  might  show  up  in  the  downloaded  CDR  file.  The  actual  value  can   vary  case  by  case.  Here  are  some  sample  values  and  their  descriptions.  

from-­internal:  internal  extension  makes  outbound  calls.  

ext-­did-­XXXXX:  inbound  calls.  It  starts  with  "ext-­did",  and  "XXXXX"  content  varies  case  by  case,  which  

  also  relate  to  the  order  when  the  trunk  is  created.  

ext-­local:  internal  calls  between  local  extensions.  

 

•  

Source  Channel,  Dest  Channel  

Sample  1:  

 

 

Figure  172:  Downloaded  CDR  File  Sample  -­  Source  Channel  and  Dest  Channel  1  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  283  of  304    

 

 

DAHDI  means  it  is  an  analog  call,  FXO  or  FXS.  

For  UCM6102,  DAHDI/(1-­2)  are  FXO  ports,  and  DAHDI(3-­4)  are  FXS  ports.  

For  UCM6104,  DAHDI/(1-­4)  are  FXO  ports,  and  DAHDI(5-­6)  are  FXS  ports.  

For  UCM6108,  DAHDI/(1-­8)  are  FXO  ports,  and  DAHDI(9-­10)  are  FXS  ports.  

 

For  UCM6116,  DAHDI/(1-­16)  are  FXO  ports,  and  DAHDI/(17-­18)  are  FXS  ports.  

Sample  2:  

Figure  173:  Downloaded  CDR  File  Sample  -­  Source  Channel  and  Dest  Channel  2  

 

"SIP"  means  it's  a  SIP  call.  There  are  three  possible  format:  

(a)  SIP/NUM-­XXXXXX,  where  NUM  is  the  local  SIP  extension  number.  The  last  XXXXX  is  a  random  string   and  can  be  ignored.  

(c)   SIP/trunk_X/NUM,   where   trunk_X   is   the   internal   trunk   name,   and   NUM   is   the   number   to   dial   out   through  the  trunk.  

(c)   SIP/trunk_X-­XXXXXX,   where   trunk_X   is   the   internal   trunk   name   and   it   is   an   inbound   call   from   this  

  trunk.  The  last  XXXXX  is  a  random  string  and  can  be  ignored.  

Sample  3:  

 

Figure  174:  Downloaded  CDR  File  Sample  -­  Source  Channel  and  Dest  Channel  3  

 

 

This  is  a  very  special  channel  name.  If  it  shows  up,  most  likely  it  means  a  conference  call.  

There  are  some  other  possible  values,  but  these  values  are  almost  the  application  name  which  are  used  

  by  the  dialplan.  

IAX2/NUM-­XXXXXXX:  it  means  this  is  an  IAX  call.  

Local/@from-­internal-­XXXXX:  it  is  used  internally  to  do  some  special  feature  procedure.  We  can  simply   ignore  it.  

Hangup:   the   call   is   hung   up   from   the   dialplan.   This   indicates   there   are   some   errors   or   it   has   run   into   abnormal  cases.  

 

Playback:  play  some  prompts  to  you,  such  as  183  response  or  run  into  an  IVR.  

ReadExten:  collect  numbers  from  user.  It  may  occur  when  you  input  PIN  codes  or  run  into  DISA  

 

 

STATISTICS  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  284  of  304    

 

CDR  Statistics  is  an  additional  feature  on  the  UCM6100  which  provides  users  a  visual  overview  of  the  call   report  across  the  time  frame.  Users  can  filter  with  different  criteria  to  generate  the  statistics  chart.  

 

Trunk  Type  

Call  Type  

Time  Range  

Figure  175:  CDR  Statistics  

 

Table  101:  CDR  Statistics  Filter  Criteria  

Select  one  of  the  following  trunk  type.  

•  

All  

•  

SIP  Calls  

•  

PSTN  Calls  

Select  one  or  more  in  the  following  checkboxes.  

•  

Inbound  calls  

•  

Outbound  calls  

•  

Internal  calls  

•  

External  calls  

•  

All  calls  

•  

By  month  (of  the  selected  year).  

•  

By  week  (of  the  selected  year).  

•  

By  day  (of  the  specified  month  for  the  year).  

•  

By  hour  (of  the  specified  date).  

•  

By  range.  For  example,  2013-­01  To  2013-­03.  

 

RECORDING  FILES  

 

This  page  lists  all  the  recording  files  recorded  by  "Auto  Record"  per  extension/ring  group/call  queue/trunk,   or  via  feature  code  "Audio  Mix  Record".  If  external  storage  device  is  plugged  in,  for  example,  SD  card  or  

 

USB   drive,   the   files   are   stored   on   the   external   storage.   Otherwise,   internal   storage   will   be   used   on   the  

UCM6100.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  285  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  176:  CDR-­>Recording  Files  

 

•  

Click  on  “Delete  Selected  Recording  Files”  to  delete  the  recording  files.  

•  

Click  on  “Delete  All  Recording  Files”  to  delete  all  recording  files.  

•  

Click  on     to  download  the  recording  file  in  .wav  format.  

•  

Click  on     to  delete  the  recording  file.  

•  

To   sort   the   recording   file,   click   on   the   title   "Caller",   "Callee"   or   "Call   Time"   for   the   corresponding   column.  Click  on  the  title  again  can  switch  the  sorting  mode  between  ascending  order  or  descending  

  order.  

API  CONFIGURATION  

 

The  UCM6100  supports  third  party  billing  interface  API  for  external  billing  software  to  access  CDR  and  call   recordings  on  the  PBX.  The  API  uses  HTTPS  to  request  the  CDR  data  and  call  recording  data  matching   given  parameters  as  configured  on  the  third  party  application.  

 

Before   accessing   the   API,   the   administrators   need   enable   API   and   configure   the   access/authentication  

  information  on  the  UCM6100  first.  The  API  configuration  parameters  are  listed  in  the  table  below.  

Table  102:  API  Configuration  Files  

Enable   Enable/Disable  API.  The  default  setting  is  disabled.  

TLS  Bind  Address   Configure   the   IP   address   for   TLS   server   to   bind   to.   "0.0.0.0"   means   binding   to   all   interfaces.  The  port  number  is  optional  and  the  default  port  number  is  8443.  The  IP   address  must  match  the  common  name  (host  name)  in  the  certificate  so  that  the  TLS   socket  won't  bind  to  multiple  IP  addresses.  The  default  setting  is  0.0.0.0:8443.  

TLS  Private  Key   Upload  TLS  private  key.  The  size  of  the  key  file  must  be  under  2MB.  This  file  will  be   renamed  as  'private.pem'  automatically.  

TLS  Cert   Upload  TLS  cert.  The  size  of  the  certificate  must  be  under  2MB.  This  is  the  certificate   file   (*.pem   format   only)   for   TLS   connection.   This   file   will   be   renamed   as  

"certificate.pem"   automatically.   It   contains   private   key   for   the   client   and   signed  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  286  of  304    

 

 

TLS   Authentication  

Name  

TLS   Authentication  

Password  

Permitted   certificate  for  the  server.  

Configure  the  user  name  for  TLS  authentication.  If  not  configured,  authentication  will   be  skipped.  

Configure  the  password  for  TLS  authentication.  This  is  optional.  

Specify  a  list  of  IP  addresses  permitted  by  API.  This  creates  an  AIP-­specific  access   control  list.  Multiple  entries  are  allowed.    

For  example,  "192.168.40.3/255.255.255.255"  denies  access  from  all  IP  addresses   except  192.168.40.3.  

The  default  setting  is  blank,  meaning  all  IPs  will  be  denied.  Users  must  set  permitted  

IP  address  before  connecting  to  the  API.  

 

 

For  more  details  on  CDR  API  (Access  to  Call  Detail  Records)  and  REC  API  (Access  to  Call  Recording  

Files),  please  refer  the  document  in  the  link  here:  

  http://www.grandstream.com/products/ucm_series/ucm61xx/documents/ucm61xx_cdr_rec_api_guide.pdf

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  287  of  304    

 

UPGRADING  AND  MAINTENANCE  

UPGRADING

 

 

 

The  UCM6100  can  be  upgraded  to  a  new  firmware  version  remotely  or  locally.  This  section  describes  how   to  upgrade  your  UCM6100  via  network  or  local  upload.  

UPGRADING  VIA  NETWORK  

 

The   UCM6100   can   be   upgraded   via   TFTP/HTTP/HTTPS   by   configuring   the   URL/IP   Address   for   the  

TFTP/HTTP/HTTPS  server  and  selecting  a  download  method.  Configure  a  valid  URL  for  TFTP,  HTTP  or  

HTTPS;;  the  server  name  can  be  FQDN  or  IP  address.  

 

Examples  of  valid  URLs:  

  firmware.grandstream.com  

The  upgrading  configuration  can  be  accessed  via  Web  GUI-­>Maintenance-­>Upgrade.  

 

 

Upgrade  Via  

Firmware  Server  Path  

Firmware  File  Prefix  

Firmware  File  Suffix  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

 

Figure  177:  Network  Upgrade  

Table  103:  Network  Upgrade  Configuration  

Allow   users   to   choose   the   firmware   upgrade   method:   TFTP,   HTTP   or  

HTTPS.  

Define  the  server  path  for  the  firmware  server.  

If  configured,  only  the  firmware  with  the  matching  encrypted  prefix  will  be   downloaded  and  flashed  into  the  UCM6100.  

If  configured,  only  the  firmware  with  the  matching  encrypted  postfix  will  be  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  288  of  304    

 

HTTP/HTTPS  User  Name  

HTTP/HTTPS  Password   downloaded  and  flashed  into  the  UCM6100.  

The  user  name  for  the  HTTP/HTTPS  server.  

The  password  for  the  HTTP/HTTPS  server.  

 

 

Please  follow  the  steps  below  to  upgrade  the  firmware  remotely.  

•  

Enter  the  firmware  server  path  under  Web  GUI-­>Maintenance-­>Upgrade.  

•  

Click  on  "Save".  Then  reboot  the  device  to  start  the  upgrading  process.  

•  

Please  be  patient  during  the  upgrading  process.  Once  done,  a  reboot  message  will  be  displayed  in  the  

LCD.  

 

•  

Manually  reboot  the  UCM6100  when  it's  appropriate  to  avoid  immediate  service  interruption.  After  it   boots  up,  log  in  the  web  GUI  to  check  the  firmware  version.  

UPGRADING  VIA  LOCAL  UPLOAD  

 

If  there  is  no  HTTP/TFTP  server,  users  could  also  upload  the  firmware  to  the  UCM6100  directly  via  Web  

 

GUI.  Please  follow  the  steps  below  to  upload  firmware  locally.  

•  

Download  the  latest  UCM6100  firmware  file  from  the  following  link  and  save  it  in  your  PC.   http://www.grandstream.com/support/firmware  

 

•  

Log  in  the  Web  GUI  as  administrator  in  the  PC.  

•  

Go   to   Web   GUI-­>Maintenance-­>Upgrade,   upload  the  firmware  file  by  clicking  on   the  firmware  file  from  your  PC.  The  default  firmware  file  name  is  ucm6100fw.bin  

    and  select  

 

 

 

•  

Click  on     to  start  upgrading.  

Figure  178:  Local  Upgrade  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  289  of  304    

 

 

Figure  179:  Upgrading  Firmware  Files  

 

•  

Wait  until  the  upgrading  process  is  successful  and  a  window  will  be  popped  up  in  the  Web  GUI.  

 

 

 

Figure  180:  Reboot  UCM6100  

 

 

•  

Click  on  "OK"  to  reboot  the  UCM6100  and  check  the  firmware  version  after  it  boots  up.  

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

  Note:  

Please  do  not  interrupt  or  power  cycle  the  UCM6100  during  upgrading  process.  

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  290  of  304    

 

NO  LOCAL  FIRMWARE  SERVERS  

 

For   users   that   would   like   to   use   remote   upgrading   without   a   local   TFTP   server,   Grandstream   offers   a  

NAT-­friendly  HTTP  server.  This  enables  users  to  download  the  latest  software  upgrades  for  their  devices   via  this  server.  Please  refer  to  the  webpage:     http://www.grandstream.com/support/firmware .    

 

Alternatively,  users  can  download  a  free  TFTP  or  HTTP  server  and  conduct  a  local  firmware  upgrade.  A   free  windows  version  TFTP  server  is  available  for  download  from  :   http://www.solarwinds.com/products/freetools/free_tftp_server.aspx

  http://tftpd32.jounin.net

 

 

 

Instructions  for  local  firmware  upgrade  via  TFTP:

 

1.   Unzip  the  firmware  files  and  put  all  of  them  in  the  root  directory  of  the  TFTP  server;;  

2.   Connect  the  PC  running  the  TFTP  server  and  the  UCM6100  to  the  same  LAN  segment;;  

3.   Launch  the  TFTP  server  and  go  to  the  File  menu-­>Configure-­>Security  to  change  the  TFTP  server's   default  setting  from  "Receive  Only"  to  "Transmit  Only"  for  the  firmware  upgrade;;  

4.   Start  the  TFTP  server  and  configure  the  TFTP  server  in  the  UCM6100  web  configuration  interface;;  

5.   Configure  the  Firmware  Server  Path  to  the  IP  address  of  the  PC;;  

6.   Update  the  changes  and  reboot  the  UCM6100.  

 

 

End  users  can  also  choose  to  download  a  free  HTTP  server  from   http://httpd.apache.org/  or  use  

Microsoft  IIS  web  server.  

BACKUP

 

 

 

The   UCM6100   configuration   can   be   backed   up   locally   or   via   network.   The   backup   file   will   be   used   to   restore  the  configuration  on  UCM6100  when  necessary.  

 

BACKUP/RESTORE

 

 

Users   could   backup   the   UCM6100   configurations   for   restore   purpose   under   Web  

GUI-­>Maintenance-­>Backup-­>Local  Backup.    

 

Click  on     to  create  a  new  backup  file.  Then  the  following  dialog  will  show.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  291  of  304    

 

 

Figure  181:  Create  New  Backup  

 

1.   Choose  the  type(s)  of  files  to  be  included  in  the  backup.  

2.   Choose  where  to  store  the  backup  file:  USB  Disk,  SD  Card  or  Local.  

3.   Name  the  backup  file.  

4.   Click  on  "Backup"  to  start  backup.    

 

Once  the  backup  is  done,  the  list  of  the  backups  will  be  displayed  with  date  and  time  in  the  web  page.  

Users  can  download   ,  restore   ,  or  delete     it  from  the  UCM61xx  internal  storage  or  the  external  

  device.  

 

Click   on     to   upload   backup   file   from   the   local   device   to   UCM61xx.   The   uploaded   backup  file  will  also  be  displayed  in  the  web  page  and  can  be  used  to  restore  the  UCM61xx.  

 

 

Figure  182:  Backup  /  Restore  

 

  option   allows   UCM   to   perform   automatically   backup   on   the   user   specified   time.    

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  292  of  304    

 

Regular  backup  file  can  only  be  stored  in  USB  /  SD  card  /  SFTP  server.  User  is  allowed  to  set  backup  time   from  0-­23  and  how  frequent  the  backup  will  be  performed.    

 

 

Figure  183:  Local  Backup  

DATA  SYNC  

 

Besides   local   backup,   users   could   backup   the   voice   records/voice   mails/CDR/FAX   in   a   daily   basis   to   a   remote  server  via  SFTP  protocol  automatically  under  Web  GUI-­>Maintenance-­>Backup-­>Data  Sync.    

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  184:  Data  Sync  

 

Table  104:  Data  Sync  Configuration  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  293  of  304    

 

 

Enable  Backup  

Account  

Password  

Enable  the  auto  backup  function.  The  default  setting  is  "No".  

Enter  the  Account  name  on  the  SFTP  backup  server.  

Enter   the   Password   associate   with   the   Account   on   the   SFTP   backup   server.  

Server  Address  

Backup  Time  

Enter  the  SFTP  server  address.  

Enter  0-­23  to  specify  the  backup  hour  of  the  day.  

 

 

Before   saving   the   configuration,   users   could   click   on   "Test   Connection".   The   UCM6100   will   then   try   connecting  the  server  to  make  sure  the  server  is  up  and  accessible  for  the  UCM6100.  Save  the  changes   and   all   the   backup   logs   will   be   listed   on   the   web   page.   After   data   sync   is   configured,   users   could   also  

  instead   of   waiting   for   the   backup   manually   synchronize   all   data   by   clicking   on  

  time  interval  to  come.  

RESTORE  CONFIGURATION  FROM  BACKUP  FILE  

 

 

To   restore   the   configuration   on   the   UCM6100   from   a   backup   file,   users   could   go   to   Web  

GUI-­>Maintenance-­>Backup-­>Local  Backup.  

•  

A  list  of  previous  configuration  backups  is  displayed  on  the  web  page.  Users  could  click  on     of  the   desired  backup  file  and  it  will  be  restored  to  the  UCM6100.  

•  

If  users  have  other  backup  files  on  PC  to  restore  on  the  UCM6100,  click  on  "Upload  Backup  File"  first   and  select  it  from  local  PC  to  upload  on  the  UCM6100.  Once  the  uploading  is  done,  this  backup  file  will   be  displayed  in  the  list  of  previous  configuration  backups  for  restore  purpose.  Click  on   from  the  backup  file.  

  to  restore  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  294  of  304    

 

 

Figure  185:  Restore  UCM6100  from  Backup  File  

 

 

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

 

  Note:  

•   The  uploaded  backup  file  must  be  a  tar  file  with  no  special  characters  like  *,!,#,@,&,$,%,^,(,),/,\,space   in  the  file  name.  

 

 

•   The  uploaded  back  file  size  must  be  under  10MB.  

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

CLEANER  

 

 

Users  could  configure  to  clean  the  Call  Detail  Report/Voice  Records/Voice  Mails/FAX  automatically  under  

Web  GUI-­>Maintenance-­>Cleaner.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  295  of  304    

 

 

 

Figure  186:  Cleaner

 

 

Table  105:  Cleaner  Configuration  

Enable  CDR  Cleaner  

CDR  Clean  Time  

Clean  Interval  

Enable  VR  Cleaner  

Enable  the  CDR  Cleaner  function.  

Enter  0-­23  to  specify  the  hour  of  the  day  to  clean  up  CDR.  

Enter  1-­30  to  specify  the  day  of  the  month  to  clean  up  CDR.  

Choose  Cleaner  File  

VR  Clean  Threshold  

Enter  the  Voice  Records  Cleaner  function.  

Select  the  files  for  system  automatic  clean.  

•  

Recording  Files  

•  

Conference  

•  

Queue  

•  

Voicemail  

•  

Fax    

Specify  the  Voice  Records  threshold  from  0  to  99  by  using  local  storage   status  in  percentage.  

VR  Clean  Time  

Clean  Interval  

Enter  0-­23  to  specify  the  hour  of  the  day  to  clean  up  Voice  Records.  

Enter  1-­30  to  specify  the  day  of  the  month  to  clean  up  Voice  Records.  

 

 

All  the  cleaner  logs  will  be  listed  on  the  bottom  of  the  page.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  296  of  304    

 

 

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

  Note:  

Cleaner  will  delete  data  based  on  Recording  Storage  selection.  If  USB  Disk  is  selected,  Cleaner  will  only   clean  data  in  USB  and  local  data  will  leave  untouched.  If  Enable  auto  change  is  selected  and  USB  disk  is   connected,  Cleaner  will  only  delete  data  in  USB  drive.  Recordings  Storage  function  can  be  found  under   web  UI-­>  Settings-­>  Recordings  Storage-­>  Recordings  Storage.    

 

 

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

RESET  AND  REBOOT  

 

 

Users  could  perform  reset  and  reboot  under  Web  GUI-­>Maintenance-­>Reset  and  Reboot.  

 

To  factory  reset  the  device,  select  the  mode  type  first.  There  are  two  different  types  for  reset.  

•   User  Data:  All  the  data  including  voicemail,  recordings,  IVR  Prompt,  Music  on  Hold,  CDR  and  backup   files  will  be  cleared.  

•  

All:  All  the  configurations  and  data  will  be  reset  to  factory  default.

 

 

 

 

Figure  187:  Reset  and  Reboot  

 

 

SYSLOG

 

 

On   the   UCM6100,   users   could   dump   the   syslog   information   to   a   remote   server   under   Web  

GUI-­>Maintenance-­>Syslog.  Enter  the  syslog  server  hostname  or  IP  address  and  select  the  module/level   for  the  syslog  information.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  297  of  304    

 

The   default   syslog   level   for   all   modules   is   "error",   which   is   recommended   in   your   UCM6100   settings   because  it  can  be  helpful  to  locate  the  issues  when  errors  happen.  

 

Some   typical   modules   for   UCM6100   functions   are   as   follows   and   users   can   turn   on   "notic"   and   "verb"  

  levels  besides  "error"  level.   pbx:  This  module  is  related  to  general  PBX  functions.   chan_sip:  This  module  is  related  to  SIP  calls.   chan_dahdi:  This  module  is  related  to  analog  calls  (FXO/FXS).  

 

  app_meetme:  This  module  is  related  to  conference  bridge.  

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

  Note:  

 

 

Syslog  is  usually  for  debugging  and  troubleshooting  purpose.  Turning  on  all  levels  for  all  syslog  modules  is   not   recommended   for   daily   usage.   Too   many   syslog   print   might   cause   traffic   and   affect   system   performance.  

-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­-­  

TROUBLESHOOTING

 

 

On   the   UCM6100,   users   could   capture   traces,   ping   remote   host   and   traceroute   remote   host   for  

  troubleshooting  purpose  under  Web  GUI-­>Maintenance-­>Troubleshooting.  

ETHERNET  CAPTURE  

 

The  captured  trace  can  be  downloaded  for  analysis.  Also  the  instructions  or  result  will  be  displayed  in  the   web  GUI  output  result.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26  

Figure  188:  Ethernet  Capture  

UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual  

 

Page  298  of  304    

 

The  output  result  is  in  .pcap  format.  Therefore,  users  could  specify  the  capture  filter  as  used  in  general   network   traffic   capture   tool   (host,   src,   dst,   net,   protocol,   port,   port   range)   before   starting   capturing   the  

  trace.  

IP  PING  

 

Enter   the   target   host   in   host   name   or   IP   address.   Then   press   "Start"   button.   The   output   result   will   dynamically  display  in  the  window  below.  

 

 

 

Figure  189:  PING  

 

TRACEROUTE  

 

Enter   the   target   host   in   host   name   or   IP   address.   Then   press   "Start"   button.   The   output   result   will   dynamically  display  in  the  window  below.  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  299  of  304    

 

 

Figure  190:  Traceroute

 

 

ANALOG  RECORD  TRACE  

 

Analog  record  trace  can  be  used  to  troubleshoot  analog  trunk  issue,  for  example,  the  UCM6100  user  has   caller   ID   issue   for   incoming   call   from   Analog   trunk.   Users   can   access   analog   record   trance   under   web  

 

GUI-­>Maintenance-­>Troubleshooting  -­>Analog  Record  Trace.  

 

Here  is  the  step  to  capture  trace:  

1.   Select  FXO  or  FXS  for  "Record  Ports".  If  the  issue  happens  on  FXO  1,  select  FXO  port  1  to  record  the   trace.  

2.   Select  "Record  Direction".  

3.   Select  "Record  File  Mode"  to  separate  the  record  per  direction  or  mix.  

4.   Click  on  "Start".  

5.   Make  a  call  via  the  analog  port  that  has  the  issue.  

6.   Once  done,  click  on  "Stop".  

7.   Click  on  "Download"  to  download  the  analog  record  trace.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  300  of  304    

 

 

Figure  191:  Troubleshooting  Analog  Trunks  

 

After  capturing  the  trace,  users  can  download  it  for  basic  analysis.  Or  you  can  contact  Grandstream  

 

Technical  support  in  the  following  link  for  further  assistance  if  the  issue  is  not  resolved.   http://www.grandstream.com/index.php/support  

 

SERVICE  CHECK  

 

 

Enable  Service  Check  to  periodically  check  UCM6100.  Check  Cycle  is  configurable  in  seconds  and  the  default   setting   is   60   sec.   Check   Times   is   the   maximum   number   of   failed   checks   before   restart   the   UCM6100.   The   default  setting  is  3.  If  there  is  no  response  from  UCM6100  after  3  attempts  (default)  to  check,  current  status  will   be  stored  and  the  internal  service  in  UCM6100  will  be  restarted.  

 

 

Figure  192:  Service  Check  

 

 

REMOTE  ACCESS  

SSH  ACCESS  

 

SSH  switch  now  is  available  via  web  UI  and  LCD.  User  can  enable  or  disable  SSH  access  directly  from   web   UI   or   LCD   screen.   For   web   SSH   access,   please   log   in   UCM   6100   web   interface   and   go   to  

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  301  of  304    

 

 

 

Maintenance-­>Remote  Access-­>SSH  Access.  By  default,  SSH  access  is  disabled  for  security  concerns.  

It  is  highly  recommend  to  only  enable  SSH  access  for  debugging  purpose.    

 

 

Figure  193:  SSH  Access  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  302  of  304    

 

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  303  of  304    

 

EXPERIENCING  THE  UCM6100  SERIES  IP  PBX  

 

Please  visit  our  website:   http://www.grandstream.com

 to  receive  the  most  up-­  to-­date  updates  on  firmware   releases,  additional  features,  FAQs,  documentation  and  news  on  new  products.    

We  encourage  you  to  browse  our   product  related  documentation ,   FAQs  and   User  and  Developer  Forum   for   answers   to   your   general   questions.     If   you   have   purchased   our   products   through   a   Grandstream  

Certified  Partner  or  Reseller,  please  contact  them  directly  for  immediate  support.      

Our  technical  support  staff  is  trained  and  ready  to  answer  all  of  your  questions.  Contact  a  technical  support   member  or   submit  a  trouble  ticket  online  to  receive  in-­depth  support.

Thank  you  again  for  purchasing  Grandstream  UCM6100  series  IP  PBX  appliance,  it  will  be  sure  to  bring  

 

  convenience  and  color  to  both  your  business  and  personal  life.  

 

 

*  Asterisk  is  a  Registered  Trademark  of  Digium,  Inc.  

 

 

Firmware  Version  1.0.9.26   UCM6100  Series  IP  PBX  User  Manual   Page  304  of  304    

 

 

 

FCC  Caution:

 

Any  Changes  or  modifications  not  expressly  approved  by  the  party  responsible  for  compliance  could  void   the  user's  authority  to  operate  the  equipment.  

 

This  device  complies  with  part  15  of  the  FCC  Rules.  Operation  is  subject  to  the  following  two  conditions:  

(1)   This   device   may   not   cause   harmful   interference,   and   (2)   this   device   must   accept   any   interference  

  received,  including  interference  that  may  cause  undesired  operation.  

Note:   This   equipment   has   been   tested   and   found   to   comply   with   the   limits   for   a   Class   B   digital   device,   pursuant  to  part  15  of  the  FCC  Rules.  These  limits  are  designed  to  provide  reasonable  protection  against   harmful   interference   in  a   residential   installation.   This   equipment   generates,   uses   and   can   radiate   radio   frequency  energy  and,  if  not  installed  and  used  in  accordance  with  the  instructions,  may  cause  harmful   interference  to  radio  communications.  However,  there  is  no  guarantee  that  interference  will  not  occur  in  a   particular   installation.   If   this   equipment   does   cause   harmful  interference   to   radio   or   television   reception,   which  can  be  determined  by  turning  the  equipment  off  and  on,  the  user  is  encouraged  to  try  to  correct  the   interference  by  one  or  more  of  the  following  measures:  

 

-­  Reorient  or  relocate  the  receiving  antenna.  

 

 

-­  Increase  the  separation  between  the  equipment  and  receiver.  

 

-­  Connect  the  equipment  into  an  outlet  on  a  circuit  different  from  that  to  which  the  receiver  is  connected.  

 

 

-­  Consult  the  dealer  or  an  experienced  radio/TV  technician  for  help.  

 

Regulatory  Information  

U.S.  FCC  Part  68  Statement  

This  equipment  complies  with  Part  68  of  the  FCC  rules  and  the  requirements  adopted  by  the  ACTA.  The   unit  bears  a  label  on  the  back  which  contains  among  other  information  a  product  identifier  in  the  format  

US:   GNIIS00BUCM6104/US:   GNIIS00BUCM6116.   If   requested,   this   number   must   be   provided   to   the   telephone  company.  

This  equipment  uses  the  following  standard  jack  types  for  network  connection:  RJ11C.  

This  equipment  contains  an  FCC  compliant  modular  jack.  It  is  designed  to  be  connected  to  the  telephone   network   or   premises   wiring   using   compatible   modular   plugs   and   cabling   which   comply   with   the   requirements  of  FCC  Part  68  rules.  

The   Ringer   Equivalence   Number,   or   REN,   is   used   to   determine   the   number   of   devices   which   may   be   connected  to  the  telephone  line.  An  excessive  REN  may  cause  the  equipment  to  not  ring  in  response  to  an   incoming  call.  In  most  areas,  the  sum  of  the  RENs  of  all  equipment  on  a  line  should  not  exceed  five  (5.0).  

 

 

In  the  unlikely  event  that  this  equipment  causes  harm  to  the  telephone  network,  the  telephone  company   can  temporarily  disconnect  your  service.  The  telephone  company  will  try  to  warn  you  in  advance  of  any   such  disconnection,  but  if  advance  notice  isn't  practical,  it  may  disconnect  the  service  first  and  notify  you   as   soon   as   possible   afterwards.   In   the   event   such   a   disconnection   is   deemed &nbs